AAnalyst 300 Service Manual Part

Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy 0993-6036
AAnalyst 100 and

AAnalyst 300
Atomic Absorption
Spectrometers
Service Manual
Perkin-Elmer Private
Important: Portions of the information in this service
document are Perkin-Elmer private. This document is to
be used for reference by Perkin-Elmer Service Engineers.
Copyright 1997
The Perkin-Elmer Corporation
All Rights Reserved
November 1997
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
PERKIN-ELMER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS
MATERIAL, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Perkin-Elmer shall not
be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental consequential damages in connection with
the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
Copyright Information
Reproduction or publication of this document in any form or format is prohibited without
written permission of the Perkin-Elmer Corporation or any of its subsidiaries.
Copyright © 1997 The Perkin-Elmer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
Software programs are protected by copyright. It is unlawful to duplicate these programs in
any manner other than for the user's personal use. Specifically, it is unlawful to use, modify, or
duplicate these programs other than for use with the purchaser's original computer.
Release Information
Manual Valid for

Part No. Release Release Date Software Version
0993-6036 C November 1997 WinLab Version 2.6
Trademarks
Perkin-Elmer is a registered trademark of The Perkin-Elmer Corporation.
DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation
Swagelok is a registered traademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company
MS-DOS, Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
OKIDATA and MICROLINE are registered trademarks of Oki America Inc.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Registered names, trademarks, etc. used in this document, even when not specifically marked
as such, are protected by law.
Contents i
Chapter 1: Overview
Introducing the AAnalyst Service Manual ........................................................1-1
Who is This Manual for? .......................................................................................1-1
Hazards ...........................................................................................................1-2
Conventions.....................................................................................................1-2
How is the Manual Organized? ............................................................................1-2
Introducing the AAnalyst Spectrometers..........................................................1-4
Overview of the AAnalyst Optical System ...........................................................1-4
General Features and Instrument Configurations ..............................................1-5
AAnalyst 100 Configurations ...............................................................................1-6
AAnalyst 300 Configurations ...............................................................................1-7
Instrument Specifications.....................................................................................1-7
Operating Principles .......................................................................................1-7
Numerical Specifications.................................................................................1-8
AAnalyst Replacement Parts ..............................................................................1-10
P.C. Boards..........................................................................................................1-10
Personality Devices.............................................................................................1-10
ASICS ..................................................................................................................1-10
Firmware.............................................................................................................1-11
Software ..............................................................................................................1-11
Sample Compartment Items ..............................................................................1-11
Burner Control Items..........................................................................................1-12
Optics...................................................................................................................1-13
Background Corrector Items ..............................................................................1-14
Harnesses and Cables.........................................................................................1-14
Turret Items........................................................................................................1-15
Alignment (Service) Aids ....................................................................................1-15
Miscellaneous Items (including fuses, manuals, and training aids)..................1-16
Metric Hardware.................................................................................................1-18
Chapter 2: Precautions
Introduction.............................................................................................................2-1
Using This Chapter.................................................................................................2-1
Laboratory Safety Guidelines ..............................................................................2-3
General..................................................................................................................2-3
Environmental Conditions....................................................................................2-3
Handling the Instrument......................................................................................2-3
Laboratory Ventilation .........................................................................................2-3
Contents ii
General Safety Practices .......................................................................................2-3

Ultraviolet Radiation Safety.................................................................................2-4
Electrical Safety ....................................................................................................2-4
Safe Handling of Gas Cylinders ...........................................................................2-5
Identifying Cylinders ......................................................................................2-6
Storing Cylinders ............................................................................................2-6
Handling Cylinders .........................................................................................2-7
Safe Handling of Atomizers ..................................................................................2-7
Safe Use of Chemical Reagents ............................................................................2-7
Protective Equipment .....................................................................................2-8
Reagent Use, Storage, and Disposal...............................................................2-8
Waste Disposal Procedures .............................................................................2-8
Drain Vessel Contents ....................................................................................2-9
Primary Source Lamps ...................................................................................2-9
Flame Analyses Safety Practices .......................................................................2-10
Safety Interlocks .................................................................................................2-10
Burner Gases (in General)..................................................................................2-10
Air Supply......................................................................................................2-11
Acetylene .......................................................................................................2-11
Nitrous Oxide ................................................................................................2-12
Safety Checks Before Ignition ............................................................................2-13
Burner Head..................................................................................................2-13
Burner Mixing Chamber and End Cap ........................................................2-13
Nebulizer .......................................................................................................2-14
Drain System.................................................................................................2-14
Hazards with Flame Analyses............................................................................2-14
General Precautions......................................................................................2-14
Flashbacks.....................................................................................................2-15
Ultraviolet Radiation Hazards......................................................................2-15
High Temperatures .......................................................................................2-15
Acetone Carryover.........................................................................................2-16
Acetylides ......................................................................................................2-17
Organic Solvents ...........................................................................................2-17
Cyanide Solutions .........................................................................................2-17
Furnace Analyses Safety Practices ...................................................................2-18
Safety Interlocks .................................................................................................2-18
Inert Gas Supply.................................................................................................2-18
Argon .............................................................................................................2-18
Safety Checks......................................................................................................2-19
Hazards with Furnace Analyses.........................................................................2-19
UV Radiation.................................................................................................2-19
High Temperatures .......................................................................................2-20
Contents iii
Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices...................................................2-21

Inert Gas Supply.................................................................................................2-21
Quartz Cells ........................................................................................................2-21
Safety Checks......................................................................................................2-21
Hazards with M/H Analyses...............................................................................2-21
High Temperatures.............................................................................................2-22
Sodium Tetrahydroborate (Sodium Borohydride) ........................................2-22
Tin (II) Chloride (Stannous Chloride)...........................................................2-22
Hydrofluoric Acid...........................................................................................2-23
Magnesium Perchlorate ................................................................................2-23
Sample Preparation Safety Practices...............................................................2-25
Dissolving Solid Samples in Organics ................................................................2-25
Dissolving Solid Samples Using Acids................................................................2-26
Acid Digestions....................................................................................................2-26
Perchloric Acid...............................................................................................2-26
Hydrofluoric Acid...........................................................................................2-27
Performing Digestions...................................................................................2-27
Digestions at Elevated Pressure...................................................................2-28
Fusion Mixtures ............................................................................................2-28
Chapter 3: AAnalyst Installation

Overview ...................................................................................................................3-1
Preparing the Laboratory .....................................................................................3-1
Environmental Conditions....................................................................................3-1
Bench Space ..........................................................................................................3-2
Exhaust Vent ........................................................................................................3-3
Gases .....................................................................................................................3-3
Air ....................................................................................................................3-3
Acetylene .........................................................................................................3-4
Nitrous Oxide ..................................................................................................3-4
Gases for Accessories.......................................................................................3-4
Gas Line Connections .....................................................................................3-4
Handling Gas Cylinders..................................................................................3-5
Electrical Requirements .......................................................................................3-6
Unpacking the AAnalyst 100 and 300..................................................................3-6
Contents iv
Installing the AAnalyst 100 and 300 ....................................................................3-8

Overview ...............................................................................................................3-8
Installing the Burner Components (Flame Only) ................................................3-8
Overview..........................................................................................................3-8
Install the Burner Assembly in the Sample Compartment Tray ..................3-9
Install the GemTip Nebulizer in the Burner End Cap.................................3-10
Install the Burner Drain System..................................................................3-13
Install the Sample Compartment Door and the Sample Trays ...................3-15
Connect the Gases...............................................................................................3-16
Electrical Connections ........................................................................................3-18
Checking the Voltage Setting .......................................................................3-18
If You Have 220 VAC Mains Power..............................................................3-19
Changing the Instrument Operating Voltage (If you don't have 220 Vac) .3-19
Installing the AC Line Cords ........................................................................3-23
Connecting a Printer...........................................................................................3-25
For a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst 100........................................................3-25
For an AAnalyst 300 and a PC-Controlled AAnalyst 100............................3-25
Installing the AS-90/91 Autosampler.................................................................3-27
Installing an External Analog Recorder.............................................................3-29
Aligning the Burner Head in the Beam .............................................................3-29
Adjusting the Gas Flows and Lighting the Flame.............................................3-30
Checking the Flame Sensor ..........................................................................3-31
Installing the Automatic Turret Assembly ......................................................3-32
Preliminary Steps ...............................................................................................3-33
Install Rotating Toroid (M1) and its Motor........................................................3-34
Install the Turret Shaft and Looker-Wheel Bracket Assembly.........................3-35
Wrapping the Turret Harness ............................................................................3-37
Install the 6-Position Turret...............................................................................3-38
Install the Turret Motor, Gear, and Looker Assembly ......................................3-38
Align the Turret Assembly .................................................................................3-39
Turret-Drive Alignment ................................................................................3-39
Turret-Installation Outline.................................................................................3-41
Rotating Toroid and Toroid Motor......................................................................3-41
Turret Motor, Gear, and Looker Assy ................................................................3-41
Contents v
Chapter 3A: Furnace Installation and Alignment

Installing and Aligning the Furnace................................................................ 3A-1
Removing the Transport Locking Plate ............................................................ 3A-1
Remove the Furnace-Arm Fixing Screw ........................................................... 3A-3
Setting the Furnace IEEE Address ................................................................... 3A-3
Tapping the Furnace Transformer .................................................................... 3A-5
For 220 Vac Line Voltage............................................................................. 3A-6
Coupling the HGA-800 and the AAnalyst......................................................... 3A-6
Installing the Furnace Arm in the Sample Compartment ............................. 3A-10
Gas Connections............................................................................................... 3A-12
Connecting the Water Supply......................................................................... 3A-13
Making the Electrical Connections.................................................................. 3A-14
Installing the AS-72B Autosampler ................................................................ 3A-16
Turning On and Configuring the HGA-800 .................................................... 3A-17
Furnace Temperature Alignment.................................................................... 3A-17
With PC (Computer) Control ..................................................................... 3A-17
Without PC Control (Using the Keypad) ................................................... 3A-20
Chapter 3B: Installing Flame Accessories

About This Chapter ............................................................................................. 3B-1
Configuring a Printer and for IEEE .................................................................. 3B-1
Printer (AAnalyst 100 only)......................................................................... 3B-1
IEEE-488 (AAnalyst 100 only) .................................................................... 3B-2
AS-90/91 Flame Autosampler.............................................................................. 3B-2
Mercury/Hydride Systems.................................................................................. 3B-3
MHS-10 Installation Checklist .......................................................................... 3B-4
Installing the Quartz Cell Holder...................................................................... 3B-4
Installing the Quartz Cell.................................................................................. 3B-5
Flow Injection System......................................................................................... 3B-7
Installation Checklist......................................................................................... 3B-7
Connections to the AAnalyst ............................................................................. 3B-7
Connecting the AS-90/91 Autosampler ............................................................. 3B-7
IEEE-488 Address.............................................................................................. 3B-9
Starting up the AAnalyst and Accessories ........................................................ 3B-9
Performance Tests ........................................................................................... 3B-10
Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position........................................................ 3B-14
Left-to-Right Position Adjustment (see Figure 3B-7) ..................................... 3B-15
Front-to-Back Positioning (see Figure 3B-8)................................................... 3B-16
Running Hydride Analyses .............................................................................. 3B-18
Contents vi
Chapter 4: Performance Tests

Overview ...................................................................................................................4-1
Tests Which Should be Performed at Installation ...........................................4-1
Using the Keypad..................................................................................................4-2
Log Linearity Test...........................................................................................4-2
Double Beam Test ...........................................................................................4-4
Sensitivity and Precision Checks....................................................................4-4
Wavelength Accuracy Test..............................................................................4-6
Using WinLab .......................................................................................................4-6
Log Linearity Test...........................................................................................4-6
AA - BG Test ...................................................................................................4-8
Double Beaming Test......................................................................................4-8
Copper Sensitivity Test...................................................................................4-9
Copper Precision Test ...................................................................................4-10
Wavelength Accuracy Test............................................................................4-11
Additional Performance Tests............................................................................4-12
Using the Keypad................................................................................................4-12
AA Baseline Noise Test.................................................................................4-12
AA - BG Baseline Noise Test ........................................................................4-12
Emission Check .............................................................................................4-13
Using Winlab.......................................................................................................4-14
AA Baseline Noise Test.................................................................................4-14
AA-BG Baseline Noise Test ..........................................................................4-16
Emission Check .............................................................................................4-18
Adjusting the As to K Wavelength Span...........................................................4-20
Overview .............................................................................................................4-20
Procedure for a keypad Instrument ...................................................................4-20
Check AS .......................................................................................................4-20
Check K .........................................................................................................4-21
Adjust the Span.............................................................................................4-21
Procedure When Using WinLab .........................................................................4-23
Check As ........................................................................................................4-23
Check K .........................................................................................................4-24
Adjust the Span.............................................................................................4-24
Contents vii
Chapter 5: Optical/Electrical Alignment

Optical/Electrical Alignment Summary (Outline) ...........................................5-1
1. Preparing to Align the Spectrometer ..............................................................5-1
2. Aligning the Monochromator...........................................................................5-1
3. Aligning the Photometer..................................................................................5-1
4. Aligning the Chopper (Phasing) ......................................................................5-1
5. Phasing the Chopper (LED Alignment) ..........................................................5-1
6. Electronic Calibration (Alignment) .................................................................5-2
7. Final Peaking and Adjustments......................................................................5-2
Preparing for the Alignment ................................................................................5-2
Who is to Align the AAnalyst?..............................................................................5-2
Accessing the Optics .............................................................................................5-2
Preparing to Align the AAnalyst ..........................................................................5-2
Alignment Kit and Hardware Required. ..............................................................5-3
Default Offset Entries for Slit, Turret, Optic, and Grating .................................5-5
Stand-Alone (Keypad) AAnalyst 100 ..............................................................5-5
Computer-Controlled AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300 .................................5-5
Monochromator Alignment...................................................................................5-6
Set the Slit Height ................................................................................................5-6
Mercury Lamp Alignment ....................................................................................5-8
Paraboloid (M5) Height and Side-to-Side Adjustment ........................................5-9
Grating Adjustments ..........................................................................................5-11
Grating Tilt and Angle Adjustment (including parabola focus) ..................5-11
Grating Span Adjustment.............................................................................5-12
Photometer Alignment.........................................................................................5-14
Toroid M4 and Flat M7 Alignment.....................................................................5-14
Aligning the AAnalyst Turret and (Rotating) Optic M1 ....................................5-18
Aligning the Chopper ...........................................................................................5-22
Chopper LED Alignment (Phasing)...................................................................5-25
Electronic Calibration (Alignment) ..................................................................5-28
Overview .............................................................................................................5-28
Preparing for the Alignment...............................................................................5-28
Alignment Procedure ..........................................................................................5-29
Peaking the HCL and D2 Lamp Signals (Lamp Orientation) ......................5-35
Peaking the HCL ................................................................................................5-35
Alternative Method for Peaking the HCL ..........................................................5-36
Peaking the Deuterium (D2) Lamp.....................................................................5-36
Replacing the Turret Harness (P/N N041-0062) ..............................................5-40
Replacement Procedure ......................................................................................5-40
Contents viii
Chapter 6: PC Board Electronics

Overview ...................................................................................................................6-1
Boards Common to the AAnalyst 100 and the AAnalyst 300..............................6-2
Boards used only on the AAnalyst 300.................................................................6-2
Boards used only on the AAnalyst 100.................................................................6-2
System Control Board (N041 - 9004).....................................................................6-4
General Design Principles ....................................................................................6-4
Circuitry (Schematic) Organization .....................................................................6-5
Microprocessor and Memory Circuitry - Sheet 1 ............................................6-5
IEEE Controller - Sheet 2 ...............................................................................6-7
Motor-Control Circuitry - Sheet 3...................................................................6-8
Keyboard and Display Interface - Sheet 4......................................................6-9
Lamp and Identity (ID) Control - Sheet 5 ....................................................6-11
External Interface - Sheet 6..........................................................................6-12
Signal Processing - Sheet 7...........................................................................6-14
A/D Conversion and Control - Sheet 8..........................................................6-17
Power Supplies - Sheet 9...............................................................................6-19
HCL/PMT/D2 Warm-Up (WU) Board (N041-9054) .............................................6-21
Overview .............................................................................................................6-21
Hollow Cathode Lamp (HCL) Circuit .................................................................6-21
Deuterium Arc Power Supply Circuit Description .............................................6-21
Filament Heater Supply Voltage ..................................................................6-22
Anode Striking Voltage .................................................................................6-22
Anode Sustaining Voltage and Current .......................................................6-22
Photomultiplier Tube Power Supply ..................................................................6-22
Motor-Control PCB (N041-9044 - AAnalyst 300) ................................................6-24
Control and Drive Circuitry................................................................................6-24
Turret Motor..................................................................................................6-24
Slit Motor.......................................................................................................6-25
Grating (G) Motor .........................................................................................6-25
Rotating Optic (M1) Motor............................................................................6-27
Voltage Regulator Circuit ...................................................................................6-27
Motor-Control PCB (N041-9124 - AAnalyst 100) ................................................6-28
General................................................................................................................6-28
Control and Drive Circuitry................................................................................6-28
Voltage Regulator Circuit ...................................................................................6-29
Burner Interface (Interlock) Board (N041-9064).............................................6-30
Overview .............................................................................................................6-30
Flame Detector....................................................................................................6-30
Burner-Head Detectors (Sensors).......................................................................6-30
Interlocks and Other Functions..........................................................................6-31
Contents ix
Fuse Board (N041-9074)........................................................................................6-32

Flame-Control Board (N041-9014)-(For AAnalyst 300 Only) .........................6-33
General Design Principles ..................................................................................6-33
Sheet 1 - Microcontroller and Memory ...............................................................6-34
Sheet 2 - IEEE Controller...................................................................................6-36
Sheet 3 - Power Supplies and Interlock Interface..............................................6-36
Sheet 4 - Solenoid Control ..................................................................................6-40
Sheet 5 - Data Conversion ..................................................................................6-43
Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084) ............................................................6-44
Introduction.........................................................................................................6-44
Power Supply Circuitry.......................................................................................6-44
Voltage Supervisor Circuit..................................................................................6-44
Flame Sense Circuit............................................................................................6-44
Interlocks.............................................................................................................6-45
Drivers.................................................................................................................6-45
Xilinx 3030 ..........................................................................................................6-46
Xilinx Logic .........................................................................................................6-46
Turret Board Assembly (N041-9094)...................................................................6-48
Primary Lamp Control........................................................................................6-48
Interface for Lamp-Coding Chips .......................................................................6-48
Board-Identification Provision............................................................................6-49
Keyboard Display Board (N040-1054) ................................................................6-49
Timing Diagrams...................................................................................................6-51
Chapter 7: Burner Control System

About This Chapter ................................................................................................7-1
System Description.................................................................................................7-3
System Overview ..................................................................................................7-3
Burner Assembly...................................................................................................7-4
Burner Drain System............................................................................................7-4
Igniter Assembly ...................................................................................................7-4
AAnalyst 100 Gas Control ....................................................................................7-5
AAnalyst 300 Gas Control ....................................................................................7-7
Contents x
Burner Maintenance ............................................................................................7-10

Removing the Burner Assembly .........................................................................7-10
Removing the Burner Assembly Components....................................................7-11
Cleaning Burner Components ............................................................................7-11
Cleaning the Burner Head............................................................................7-12
Cleaning the Burner Chamber .....................................................................7-13
Cleaning the Nebulizer .................................................................................7-16
A. Simplified Cleaning of Standard and High-Sensitivity GemTip Neb .....7-17
B. Complete Cleaning of Standard and High-Sensitivity GemTip Neb ......7-18
C. Removing & Replacing the High-Sensitivity Nebulizer's Impact Bead ..7-21
Drain System Maintenance.................................................................................7-22
Cleaning (Flushing) the Drain System ..............................................................7-22
Replacing the Drain Tubing ...............................................................................7-22
Cleaning the Trap Switch Assembly ..................................................................7-23
Replacing the Drain Assembly ...........................................................................7-24
Igniter Assembly Maintenance...........................................................................7-25
Adjusting the Igniter Arm position ....................................................................7-25
Gas Box Maintenance...........................................................................................7-26
Adjusting the Nebulizer Pressure Regulator (AAnalyst 100 and 300)..............7-26
Replacing Solenoids ............................................................................................7-28
Assembling a Gauge Fixture ..............................................................................7-31
Building a Flowmeter Fixture ............................................................................7-32
Testing the Gas Flows (AAnalyst 300)...............................................................7-34
Resetting the Flows (AAnalyst 300)...................................................................7-34
Introduction.........................................................................................................7-35
Procedure ............................................................................................................7-35
Checking and Calibrating the Oxidant Flow ...............................................7-37
Checking and Calibrating the Fuel Flow .....................................................7-38
Chapter 8: Diagnostics
Overview ...................................................................................................................8-1
System Initialization on Power Up ......................................................................8-2
Using Service Diagnostics with a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst...................8-3
Accessing the Parameter Entry Codes .................................................................8-3
The Diagnostics Parameter Entry Codes .............................................................8-3
Using Service Diagnostics with WinLab ............................................................8-6
Accessing WinLab Service Diagnostics ................................................................8-6
WinLab Flame Diagnostics...................................................................................8-7
Reset Device ....................................................................................................8-7
WinLab Furnace Diagnostics .............................................................................8-14
Error Messages For AAnalyst 100 ......................................................................8-18
Contents xi
Chapter 9: Electrical Schematics and Board Layouts

System Control Board (N041-9000, 9002)
HCL/PMT/D2 Warm Up Board (N041-9050, 9052)
Burner Interface Board (N041-9060, 9062)
Fuse Board (N041-9070, 9072)
Flame Control Board (N041-9010, 9012)9-1
Four-channel Motor Control Board (N041-9040, 9042)
Turret Board (N041-9090, 9092)
Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9080, 9082)
Two-channel Motor Control Board (N041-9120, 9122)
Keyboard/Display Board (N040-1050)
AAnalyst 100 Interconnect Drawing (N040-0010)
HGA-800 Controller Board (B310-0107-Rev 0)
HGA-800 Controller Board Component Layout
HGA-800 Controller Board Configuration Jumpers
Appendices
Preparing Your Laboratory for PE AA Spectrometers
Installation Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Preventive Maintenance Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Pre-Installation Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Pre-Installation Report, AAnalyst Spectrometer
IPV Test Certificate, Model AAnalyst
Instrument Performance Verification Instructions
Customer Orientation Script, AAnalyst Without Computer
Customer Orientation Script, Systems Running Under AA WinLab
Hollow Cathode And Electrodeless Discharge Lamps
Attention! Redesigned Intensitron Series HC Lamps
Installation Instructions, Background Corrector Kit (0993-6203)
Installation Instructions, Backlight Conversion Kit (0993-6202)
Setting AAnalyst Config. W/PC Using the Terminal Utility
Contents xii
(blank)
Service Manual Overview 1
Introducing the AAnalyst Service Manual
In the first part of this chapter we tell you who this manual is written for,
and how it has been organized. Later in this chapter we introduce the
AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300 Spectrometers, and list the spectrometer
configurations available and the spectrometer specifications.
A comprehensive list of replacement parts and their PE Part Numbers is

included to complete this chapter.
Who is This Manual for?

This service manual is for the use of specially trained Perkin-Elmer
Customer Support Engineers who are familiar with standard safety practices
and procedures. It has not been prepared for general use by customers.
The AAnalyst Spectrometers contain high-voltage electrical components

which may present a life-threatening danger to those servicing the
spectrometer if they do not follow the standard safety practices and
procedures that they have been trained to use.
We strongly advise our customers NOT to try servicing the spectrometer

themselves unless the procedure they are going to perform is described in the
AAnalyst Hardware Guide (P/N 0993-6088).
1-2 Service Manual Overview Introducing the AAnalyst Service Manual
Hazards
In Chapter 2 we have included the hazards which the Customer Support

Engineer should be aware of, and which he should remind the customer of,
when he installs the AAnalyst.
Detailed information about ultraviolet radiation, electrical, gas, and

chemical-reagent hazards is also available in the AAnalyst Hardware Guide
(P/N 0993-6088), and in the AAnalyst Installation Guide (P/N 0993-6157).
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
A caution indicates an operation that could cause instrument damage if

Caution
precautions are not followed.
A warning indicates an operation that could cause personal injury if

precautions are not followed.
Warning
NOTE: A note emphasizes significant information in a

procedure or description.
How is the Manual Organized?

This service manual has all the information required to install and
service both the AAnalyst 100 and the AAnalyst 300 AA Spectrometers.
While there are major differences between the two models, there are many
more similarities ( see pages 1-7 and 1-8, and the electrical block diagram on
page 6-3).
This service manual is divided into 9 Chapters. Each chapter is preceded

by a blue tab. (A 10th tab is included. It is labeled SDB's, and should be
convenient for including pertinant SDB's.)
NOTE: Many of our new service manuals also include the

instrument illustrated parts list. In this case, because of the
amount of information already provided in this service manual,
we provide the IPL as a separate manual (P/N 0993-6196).
Service Manual Overview Introducing the AAnalyst Service Manual 1-3
A list of the Chapters is included below:
• Chapter 1 - Overview of the Manual and of the AAnalyst

Spectrometers (Includes spectrometer specifications and replacement
parts.)
• Chapter 2 - Precautions (It includes hazards and recommended safety

practices.)
• Chapter 3 - Installing the Spectrometer and Accessories This

chapter is broken into three segments:
• AAnalyst Installation
• Furnace Installation and Alignment (3A)
• Installing Flame Accessories (3B)
• Chapter 4 - Performance Tests
• Chapter 5 - Overview and Alignment of the Optical System

(includes Electrical Alignment)
• Chapter 6- Descriptive Overview of the Electrical System and

Comprehensive Circuit Descriptions
• Chapter 7 - Overview and Maintenance Procedures for the

Automatic and Manual Burner Control Systems (Includes testing
and resetting the gas flows for the AAnalyst 300.)
• Chapter 8 - Service Diagnostic Programs and Commands (Includes

diagnostics for keypad controlled and computer controlled instruments.)
• Chapter 9 - Electrical Schematics
• Chapter 10 - SDB's
1-4 Service Manual Overview Introducing the AAnalyst Spectrometers
Introducing the AAnalyst Spectrometers

In this section we give you a brief overview of the optical system of the
AAnalyst, list the general features and configurations available, and provide
a list of the specifications of the AAnalyst 100 and 300.
Overview of the AAnalyst Optical System

The optics of the AAnalyst 100/300 constitute a double-beam, chopped
optical system. Monochromatic light from the HCL source (located in the
single or multi (6)-lamp turret) is focused by mirror M1 (labeled the HCL
toroid in Figure 1-1) onto the chopper (M3). Before reaching the chopper, the
light passes through M2, a beam combiner, where light from the D2
background corrector can be added.
When the light reaches the chopper, it is alternately reflected by the

rotating optic (M3), when it becomes the reference beam. The reference
beam compensates for changes in HCL and D2 lamp intensity, and for
changes in electrical-component (IC) characteristics. (The ratio of the sample-
beam energy to the reference beam energy is approximately 3/1.)
When the beam is not reflected by the chopper, it strikes optics M8 and
M7, and then passes through the sample where absorption occurs.
The sample beam is reflected by toroid M6 past the chopper (M3) where it
is collinear and confocal with the reference beam. The sample/reference
beam is directed by toroid M4 through the entrance slit (S1) into the
monochromator.
In the monochromator, the beam is directed by a paraboloid (M5) to the

grating (G). The grating diffracts the emitted wavelength of the HCL lamp
(and D2 lamp when background correction is used) back to paraboloid M5,
and then through the exit slit (S2) to flat M10 and onto the photomultiplier
detector (PMT).
When using D2 background correction, the (UV) light from the deuterium
lamp is directed by ellipsoid M9 to the beam combiner (M2). The light from
the D2 lamp then follows the same paths as the sample and reference beams
to the monochromator. The photomultiplier detector (PMT) alternately
receives the light from the D2 lamp and the HCL. The instrument electronics
then subtract the background absorption from the sample absorption and
display the true atomic absorption.
Service Manual Overview Introducing the AAnalyst Spectrometers 1-5
Figure 1-1. Optical schematic of the AAnalyst 100/300.
General Features and Instrument Configurations
The AAnalyst 100 is usually controlled via its keypad, but can also be
controlled by an accessory computer. The AAnalyst 300 can only be
computer controlled.
The AAnalyst 100 is the next generation of the Model 3110 AA

Spectrometer, and the AAnalyst 300 is the next generation of the Model 3300
AA Spectrometer.
The AAnalyst 300 has "automatic flame control", while the AAnalyst 100
relies on manual gas control. The AAnalyst 300 has, as a standard feature, a
six-position HCL or EDL motor-driven turret, while the AAnalyst 100 is
standard with a single-lamp holder. Background correction is standard only
on the AAnalyst 300.
The available configurations of the AAnalyst 100 and the AAnalyst 300
are listed in the next two paragraphs.
AAnalyst 100 Configurations

The AAnalyst 100 Atomic Absorption Spectrometer is designed for stand-
alone operation with flame absorption, flame emission, flow injection, and
mercury/hydride atomic absorption techniques.
The spectrometer is shipped in one of the following configurations:
• Flame, 115/230 Vac, Single Lamp, no D2 Background

Corrector, P/N N040-0027.
• Flame, 115/230 Vac, Single Lamp, with D2 Background

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret and D2 Background

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret, no D2 Background

The AAnalyst 100 can be used with the following accessories:
• FIAS 100 or 400
• HGA-800 Graphite Furnace
• MHS-10 Mercury/Hydride System, including the Electrically-heated

Quartz Cell
• EDL Systems II
• Okidata Microline 320 printer or other compatible printer
• AS-72B, AS-90, or AS-91 Flame Autosampler
See the Appendix, Product Information Sheet New “Configure-Them-

Yourself” Versions of the AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300, for more
information on customized versions of the AAnalyst 100/300.
AAnalyst 300 Configurations

The AAnalyst 300 is a computer-controlled Atomic Absorption
Spectrometer designed for flame absorption, flame emission, and
mercury/hydride atomic absorption techniques.
The spectrometer is shipped in the following configuration:
• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret and D2 Background

In addition, the AAnalyst 300 can be used with the following

accessories:
• FIAS 100 or 400
• HGA-800 Graphite Furnace
• MHS-10 Mercury/Hydride System, including the Electrically-heated

Quartz Cell
• EDL Systems II
• H-P Inkjet 660 or H-P LaserJet IV Printer
• AS-72B, AS-90, or AS-91 Flame Autosampler
Instrument Specifications
Operating Principles
Atomic Absorption
"AC", chopped, double-beam, time-shared system.
Atomic Absorption with Background Correction
"AC", chopped, double-beam, time-shared and space-shared sample and

reference beams for both line and continuous sources. Line and
continuous sources are electronically modulated.
Flame Emission
Single-beam, DC-coupled photometric signal.

Numerical Specifications
Voltage and Frequency
• 100 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60Hz ±1%
• 120 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60Hz ±1%
• 220 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60Hz ±1%
• 230/240 Vac [230 ±10%, 240 + 6/− 10 % ±1%]
Power
The rated maximum input current of the AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300
is 248 volt amps.
Dimensions
• Height − 51 cm with flame shield (20 in.)

• Width − 97 cm without leaving room for cooling fan (38 in.)
• Depth − 87 cm with shelf and rear connectors (34 in.)
• Weight − AAnalyst 300 = 68 kg (150 lb)
AAnalyst 100 = 63 kg (140 lb)
Sample Area
Open at the top and accessible via a hinged door from the front.
The sample space is nominally 25 cm wide.
The minimum distance from the center of the sample beam to the back of
the sample compartment is 11 cm.
Wavelength
Wavelength range is 185 − 860 nm.
Accuracy is 0.4 nm at specified wavelengths.
Nominal Spectral Bandwidths
The nominal spectral bandwidths are 0.2 nm and 0.7 nm.

Stray Light
The ratio of the absorbance readings for 5 and 40 µg/mL magnesium

solutions at 202.5 nm must be greater than (>) 5.5.
Sensitivity
With copper standard conditions, a 5 µg/mL copper solution will produce a

signal of at least 0.30 absorbance using a flow spoiler.
Precision
With copper standard conditions, a 5 µg/mL copper solution will produce a

nominal relative standard deviation (RSD) of 0.25% or better. (RSD is
based on ten replicates and a ten-second integration time.)
1-10 Service Manual Overview AAnalyst Replacement Parts
AAnalyst Replacement Parts

This listing includes the P-E Part numbers of AAnalyst parts which may
need to be replaced. Like parts are listed together; there are listings for P.C.
boards, sample-compartment parts, burner control items, optics, background
corrector items, harnesses and cables, turret items, alignment aids, and
miscellaneous items (including manuals and training aids). (We have
included, at the end of the list, part numbers of some commonly used metric
hardware.)
P.C. Boards
SYSTEMS PCB N041-9004
FLAME CONTROL AUTO N041-9014
MOTOR CONTROL (4 MOTOR) N041-9044
MOTOR CONTROL (2 MOTOR) N041-9124
HPD WARM-UP N041-9054
BURNER HEAD INTERFACE N041-9064
FUSE PCB N041-9074
FLAME CONTROL MANUAL N041-9084
TURRET N041-9094
KEYBOARD N040-1050
KEYBOARD DISPLAY N801-6118
Personality Devices
MANUAL WITH D2 N041-0105
MANUAL WITHOUT D2 N041-0107
AUTO (ANALYST 300) N041-0106
ASICS
SYSTEMS U80 N037-1211
Service Manual Overview AAnalyst Replacement Parts 1-11
Firmware
SYSTEMS U10 N041-8022
FLAME CONTROL U12 N041-8032
MANUAL GAS BOX U23 N041-8081
MOTOR CONTROL U2 N041-8041
Software
WINLAB Upgrade 2.XX N040-0111
IEEE TNT PC BOARD 0940-1061
KIT WITH IEEE N040-0109
Sample Compartment Items

BURNER CHAMBER 0057-0948
END CAP N037-0392
NEBULIZER (WORK HORSE) N037-0394
NEBULIZER (HIGH SENSITIVITY) N037-0393
BURNER DOOR ASSY N040-0057
BURNER DOOR GLASS N040-1231
DRAIN ASSEMBLY
(WITH OUT BOTTLE) N040-0058
FLAME SENSOR 0999-8042
GLOW PLUG 0009-1279
IGNITER ROTARY SOLENOID N041-0096
HOLDER IGNITER TUBE N037-1077
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 0999-8045
SAMPLE TRAY LEFT N040-1169
SAMPLE TRAY RIGHT N040-1043

OPTICAL BASE WINDOW

(SMALL) 0057-2324
OPTICAL BASE WINDOW (LARGE) 0303-5126
NEBULIZER SENSOR N041-0095
BURNER SHIELD N040-1021
Burner Control Items

FLOW METER N040-1179
AIR HOSE 0057-0567
C2H2 HOSE 0057-0559
N2O HOSE 0047-0258
OXIDANT/NEB REGULATOR 0990-7171
PRESSURE SWITCH (40LBS) 0999-8037
PRESSURE SWITCH (20LBS) 0999-8036
PRESSURE SWITCH C2H2 B015-3910
SOLENOID 2-WAY 0990-3681
MANUAL GAS CONTROL N040-0054

(COMPLETE)
AUTO GAS CONTROL N041-0054

(COMPLETE)
QC CONN OX-MALE 0992-0051
QC CONN OX-FEMALE 0992-0022
QC CONN C2H2 MALE 0992-0054
QC CONN C2H2 FEMALE 0992-0052
TUBING R3400 TYGON SOFT 0250-7983
TUBING R2400 TYGON HARD 0250-6515
DRAIN TUBING (by the foot) 0250-7987

INTERNAL FUEL TUBING (BEV-5) 0998-5727
HOSE CLAMP 0990-3004
TRANSDUCER AUX N040-0126
TRANSDUCER FUEL N040-0125
RESTRICTOR FUEL N037-1470
RESTRICTOR AUX N037-1471
Optics
HCL TORROID N040-0081
HCL ROTATING TORROID N041-0080
D2 ELLIPSOID N040-0082
LARGE TORROID N040-0083
SAMPLE TORROID N040-0084
MONO TORROID N040-0085
FLAT N040-0086
BEAM SPLITTER (50%) N040-0087
PMT OPTIC N040-1007
GRATING N037-0102
PARABOLA N037-0107
CHOPPER BLADE N040-1147
CHOPPER LOOKER N041-0087
ROTATING OPTIC LOOKER N041-0086
SLIT/GRATING/TURRET
LOOKER N041-0085
PMT 0997-2324
CHOPPER MOTOR N040-1076

SLIT ASSEMBLY N041-0070
STEPPER MOTOR (ALL) 0999-5130
.250-in. OPTICAL MOUNT BALLS 0990-0991
REPLACEMENT WL DRIVE ASSY N040-0117
Background Corrector Items

D2 FAN N041-0083
D2 LAMP N037-0119
D2 INSTALLATION KIT N040-0096
Harnesses and Cables

KEYBOARD CABLE N041-0063
BURNER INTERFACE CABLE N041-0089
BURNER--GAS BOX PCB HARNESS N041-0088
SYSTEMS PCB-MANUAL GAS

CONTROL CABLE N041-0066
SYSTEMS PCB-AUTO GAS

CONTROL CABLE N041-0065
AUTO GAS CONTROL

MANIFOLD HARNESS N041-0078
MANUAL GAS CONTROL

MANIFOLD HARNESS N041-0079
TURRET HARNESS N041-0062
TRANSFORMER N041-0091
FUSE-SYSTEMS HARNESS N041-0067
FUSE-D2 HARNESS N041-0068
CABLE-STEPPER MOTOR WL N041-0101
CABLE-STEPPER MOTOR
TURRET/SLIT/OPTIC N041-0103
DRAIN BOTTLE HARNESS N041-0058
EDL MODULATION CABLE N041-0100

(EXTERNAL)
SERIAL INTERFACE CABLE N041-0109

(SERVICE)
HARNESS CLAMP 0994-0860
Turret Items
TURRET WHEEL N041-1040
BRASS GEAR N041-1036
WORM GEAR N041-1035
SHAFT N041-1034
DOOR N040-1044
POSITION FLAG N041-1044
HOME FLAG N041-1038
LAMP RETAINING SPRING N041-1057
TURRET INSTALLATION KIT N041-0110
TURRET HARNESS CLAMP 0998-4747
TURRET HARNESS TIE 0998-7114
Alignment (Service) Aids

BACK LIGHT FIXTURE N037-T001
REPLACEMENT HG LAMP N037-0365
AS-72 HALL SENSOR TOOL B300-1415
OPTICAL ALIGNMENT KIT N040-T001
DUAL FLOW METER 0040-1052
PRESSURE GAUGE (0-60 PSI) 0990-7135
ASIC REMOVAL TOOL 0994-0535

.2A NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERS N037-1510
1.0A NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERS N037-1512
2.0A NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERS N037-1513
Miscellaneous Items (including fuses, manuals, and training aids)

HGA 800 115V/60HZ B313-0000
HGA 800 220V/50HZ B313-0066
COOLING SYSTEM 220 V, 50/60HZ B019-8072
AS-72B AUTO SAMPLER B300-1390
HOSE KIT-COOLANT (WITHOUT

COOLER B311-0036
HGA-800 SPARK KIT B313-0067
HGA/AANALYST CONNECTING
PLATE B313-0057
FURNACE RETAINING SCREW B313-0064
HGA-800 SWITCHING P.S. B051-0975
HGA-800 CONTROLLER BD. (NEW) B313-0073
HGA-800 DRIVER B050-8974
HGA-800 CONTROLLER BD. B313-0074

(RE-CYCLED)
"NEW" UNIVERSAL QUARTZ B300-0350

CELL HOLDER
HGA-800 THYRISTOR MODULE B019-4046
3200 SPARK KIT N040-0095
LAMP MOUNT SINGLE N040-0075
LAMP MOUNT SCREWS N040-0105
PMT SOCKET N041-0084
CORCOM POWER MODULE 0996-4568

FAN-ELECTRONICS 0998-0961
ADAPTOR FOR MHS N040-1183
FURNACE THUMBSCREWS B313-0081
DRAIN BOTTLE 0990-4991
WAVELENGTH LEAD SCREW ASSY N040-0091
SLIT WHEEL ASSY N040-0089
#10-32 LOCK NUTS 0990-4246
4-INCH BURNER HEAD N040-0102
N2O BURNER HEAD N040-0100
2-INCH AIR/C2H2 BURNER HEAD N040-0101
3-SLOT BURNER HEAD N040-0103
BURNER-HEAD MAGNETIC STRIP 0992-3322
PARAMETER ENTRY TEMPLATE N041-1063
1A (SB) FUSE 0998-1611
2A (SB) 0998-1614
5A (SB) 0998-1617
.375A (SB) 0998-1619
8A (SB) 0998-1643
10A (SB) 0998-1753
7A (SB) 0998-1757
.031A (SB) 0998-1767
3.0 A SB LINE FUSE FOR 220 V 0998-1626

OPERATION (X1)
3.15 A LINE FUSE FOR 220 V

OPERATION (X2) 0999-1675
6.25 A SB LINE FUSE FOR 115 V

OPERATION 0998-1761
SERVICE MANUAL 0993-6036
ILLUSTRATED PARTS LIST CURRENTLY NOT AVAILABLE
WINLAB SOFTWARE GUIDE 0993-6190
WINLAB SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 0993-6223

(WIN-95)
BACKLIGHT CONVERSION KIT 0993-6202

INSTRUCTIONS
BACKGROUND CORRECTOR 0993-6203

KIT INSTRUCTIONS
HARDWARE GUIDE 0993-6088
INSTALLATION GUIDE 0993-6175
USERS GUIDE (100) 0993-6149
AA COOKBOOK 0303-0152
NEBULIZER MANUAL 0993-6025
WINLAB 2.43 UPGRADE 0993-6299

Metric Hardware
M3X6 MM SEMS 0991-9200
M3X10 MM SEMS 0991-9201
M3X12 MM SEMS 0991-9202
M3X16 MM SEMS 0991-9203
M3X20 MM SEMS 0991-9204
M3X25 MM SEMS 0991-9205
M4X6 MM SEMS 0991-9206
M4X10 MM SEMS 0991-9207
M4X12 MM SEMS 0991-9208
M4X16 MM SEMS 0991-9209

Precautions 2
Introduction
This chapter includes general practices which aid you in safely operating
the AAnalyst and its accessories.
This advice supplements, but does not supersede, the normal safety codes
in the country of operation. This information does not include every safety
procedure the user must practice. Ultimately, maintenance of a safe
laboratory environment is the responsibility of the user and the user's
organization.
Please consult all manuals supplied with the AAnalyst instrument and
any accessories before you start working with the instrument. Carefully read
all the safety information in this and any other manuals supplied. When
setting up the instrument or performing analyses or maintenance procedures,
strictly follow the instructions provided.
Using This Chapter

This safety chapter is divided into sections that cover both general
practices as well as practices related to specific types of atomic absorption
analyses.
We recommend the following approach to using this chapter:
1. Read the first two sections: Laboratory Safety Guidelines and General
Safety Practices. They cover general precautions for all atomic absorption
analyses.
2-2 Precautions Using This Chapter
2. Read the appropriate sections listed below, depending on the types of

analyses you will be performing:
• Flame Analyses Safety Practices

• Furnace Analyses Safety Practices
• Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices.
3. Read the last section, Sample Preparation Safety Practices. This section
describes general precautions related to sample preparation methods as
well as some specific chemical hazards.
Precautions Laboratory Safety Guidelines 2-3
Laboratory Safety Guidelines

This section describes some general laboratory safety guidelines. It
includes precautions for all atomic absorption analyses.
General
For safety reasons and to avoid contaminating samples, be sure that the
instrument and work area are kept scrupulously clean. This is especially
important when working with toxic elements or when measuring trace
amounts of any element. Clean up spilled chemicals immediately and dispose
of them properly.
Do not allow smoking in the work area. Smoking is a source of significant

contamination as well as a potential route for ingesting harmful chemicals.
Food should not be stored, handled, or consumed in the work area.
Environmental Conditions
Do not use the instrument in an area where explosion hazards may exist.
The instrument should be used indoors in a laboratory having the
environmental conditions recommended in Preparing Your Laboratory (# L-
301P).
Handling the Instrument

Contact a Perkin-Elmer service engineer if you feel you need assistance in
installing or moving the system. If you move the system, do so carefully.
In general, the AAnalyst 100 instrument alone weighs 65.3 kg (144 lb)
and the AAnalyst 300 weighs 68 kg (150 lb). Depending on the specific
instrument configuration and the addition of its accessories, the total weight
on the laboratory bench may be as much as 300 kg (661 lb). Make sure that
the bench is capable of sustaining this weight.
Laboratory Ventilation
Toxic combustion products, fumes, vapors, and ozone can be generated by
the system, depending upon the type of analysis. Therefore, an efficient
ventilation system must be provided for your instrument. Specifications for a
recommended ventilation system are described in the section called Exhaust
Vent Requirements in Preparing Your Laboratory.
General Safety Practices

2-4 Precautions General Safety Practices
This section describes potential hazards with any atomic absorption

analysis and recommended safety practices.
Ultraviolet Radiation Safety

Hazardous ultraviolet radiation can be emitted by the flame (especially
the nitrous oxide-acetylene flame) the graphite furnace when it is heated to
incandescence, hollow cathode or electrodeless discharge lamps, and
deuterium background corrector lamps. Prolonged exposure to ultraviolet
radiation can cause serious damage to your eyes.
To avoid any exposure to ultraviolet radiation, always

wear safety glasses when using the instrument. The
safety glasses should be warranted or otherwise certified to
Warning protect the eyes from ultraviolet radiation. Side shields will
provide an extra margin of safety as well as mechanical
protection for your eyes.
Electrical Safety
The instrument has been designed to protect the operator from potential
electrical hazards. This section describes some recommended electrical safety
practices.
To ensure safe operation, servicing of the instrument

should only be performed by a Perkin-Elmer Service
Engineer or similarly authorized and trained person.
Warning
The instrument must be correctly connected to a suitable electrical

supply. The supply must have a correctly installed protective conductor
(earth/ground) and must be installed or checked by a qualified electrician
before you connect the instrument.
When the instrument is connected to line power,

opening instrument covers is likely to expose "live"
components. Lethal voltages are present at certain
Warning areas in the instrument. Even when the Power switch
is turned off, high voltage can be present. Capacitors
can remain charged even if the AAnalyst has been
disconnected from line power.
Any interruption of the protective conductor (earth/ground) inside or

outside the instrument or disconnection of the protective conductor terminal
Precautions General Safety Practices 2-5
is likely to make the instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is

prohibited.
When working with the instrument, observe the following:
• Connect the instrument to a correctly installed line power outlet that has a
protective conductor connection (earth/ground).
• Do not operate the instrument with any covers or internal parts removed.
• Do not attempt to make internal adjustments or replacements except as
directed in the manuals.
• Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources before opening it for any
adjustment, replacement, maintenance, or repair. If afterwards, the opened
instrument must be operated for further adjustment, maintenance, or repair,
this must only be done by a qualified person who is aware of the hazard
involved.
• Use only fuses having the specified current rating and type for replacement.
Do not use makeshift fuses or short circuit the fuse holders.
• Whenever it is possible that the instrument is no longer electrically safe for
use, make the instrument inoperative and secure it against any unauthorized
or unintentional operation. The electrical safety of the instrument is likely to
be impaired if, for example, the instrument shows visible damage, fails to
perform the intended measurement, has been subjected to prolonged storage
under unfavorable conditions, or has been subjected to severe stress during
transportation.
Safe Handling of Gas Cylinders
NOTE: The permanent installation of gas supplies is the
responsibility of the user and should conform to local safety
and building codes.
Listed in this section are some general safety practices for the proper
identification, storage, and handling of gas cylinders. Refer to the
information on specific gases in subsequent sections of this chapter.
Hazards associated with the different gases used in atomic absorption

spectroscopy are described in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1. Summary of gas hazards.

Spontaneous
Decomposition
Gas Suffocation Explosion or Combustion
Air – – –
Argon Ö – –
Nitrogen Ö – –
Acetylene Ö Ö Ö
Nitrous Ö – Ö
Oxide
Contact the gas supplier for a safety data sheet

containing detailed information on the potential
hazards associated with the gas. Carefully use, store, and
Warning handle compressed gases in cylinders. Gas cylinders can be
hazardous if they are mishandled.
Identifying Cylinders
• Legibly mark cylinders to clearly identify the contents and status (full, empty, etc.). Use the
chemical name or commercially accepted name for the gas.
Storing Cylinders
• Store cylinders in accordance with the regulations and standards applicable to your
locality, state, and country.
• When gas cylinders are stored in confined areas, such as a storage room, ventilation
should be adequate to prevent toxic or explosive accumulations. The storage room
should be well ventilated and dry. This is particularly important in small or confined
areas.
• Do not store cylinders near elevators, gangways, or in locations where heavy moving
objects may strike or fall against them.
• Use and store cylinders away from exits and exit routes.
• Locate gas cylinders away from heat sources, including heat lamps. Compressed gas
cylinders should not be subjected to temperatures above 52 °C (125 °F).
• Do not allow ignition sources in the storage area and keep cylinders away from
readily ignitable substances such as gasoline or waste, or combustibles in bulk,
including oil.
• Store all gas cylinders only in a vertical position, with the valve cap in place, and
fastened securely to an immovable bulkhead or a permanent wall.
• If you are storing cylinders outdoors, store them above ground on a suitable floor
where they are protected against temperature extremes (including the direct rays of
the sun).
Handling Cylinders
• Move cylinders with a suitable hand truck after insuring that the valve cap is
securely in place and the cylinder properly fastened to the hand truck.
• Use only approved regulators, tubing, and hose connectors. When connecting
fittings, keep in mind that left-hand thread fittings are used for fuel gas tank
connections (e.g., acetylene), whereas right-hand fittings are used for oxidant and
support gas connections (e.g., nitrous oxide, air).
• Arrange gas hoses where they will not be damaged or stepped on and where things
will not be dropped on them.
• Do not "crack the valve" or open the valve of an acetylene cylinder before attaching a
regulator.
• Do not attempt to refill gas cylinders.
• Check the condition of pipes, hoses, and connectors regularly. Perform periodic gas
leak tests at all joints and seals of the gas system regularly by applying an approved
gas leak detection solution.
• When the equipment is turned off for the day, close all gas cylinder valves tightly at
the tank. Bleed the remainder of the line to the atmosphere before turning the
exhaust vent off.
Safe Handling of Atomizers

Atomizers (e.g., burner head, graphite furnace, quartz cell) become very
hot during use and can present a potential hazard to the user.
To avoid serious burns, be sure the burner head,

graphite furnace, quartz cell, or heating mantle has
cooled to room temperature before you touch it.
Warning
Safe Use of Chemical Reagents

In this paragraph you will find some general safety practices that should
be observed when any chemicals are worked with. Information on specific
chemicals used in mercury/hydride analyses, and in sample preparation, is
covered in other paragraphs.
Some chemicals used with the AAnalyst and its accessories may be
hazardous or may become hazardous after completion of an analysis.
The responsible body (e.g., Lab Manager) must take the necessary
Warning precautions to ensure that the surrounding workplace is safe, and that
instrument operators are not exposed to hazardous levels of toxic
substances (chemical or biological) as defined in the applicable Material
Data Safety Sheets (MSDS) or OSHA, ACGIH or COSHH documents.
Venting for fumes and disposal of waste must be in accordance with all
national, state, and local health and safety regulations and laws.
Protective Equipment
• Wear appropriate eye protection at all times while handling chemicals. Use safety
glasses with side shields, goggles, or full-face shields, depending on the types of
chemicals you will be handling.
• Wear suitable protective clothing, including gloves specifically resistant to the
chemicals being handled.
Reagent Use, Storage, and Disposal
• Use, store, and dispose of chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and regulations applicable to the locality, state, and/or country.
• When preparing chemical solutions, always work in a fume hood that is suitable for
the chemicals you are using.
• Conduct sample preparation away from the instrument to minimize corrosion and
contamination.
• Clean up spills immediately using the appropriate equipment and supplies such as
spill cleanup kits.
• Do not put open containers of solvent near the instrument.
• Store solvents in an approved cabinet (with the appropriate ventilation, as required)
away from the instrument.
Waste Disposal Procedures
In flame, mercury/hydride and flow injection analyses, drain vessel

contents must be disposed of properly. Primary source lamps (hollow cathode
and electrodeless discharge lamps) used for all types of analyses must be
disposed of properly.
Dispose of waste in accordance with the regulations

applicable to your locality, state, and/or country.
Warning
Drain Vessel Contents
• Carefully monitor the collection of effluent in the drain vessel and empty the drain
vessel frequently.
• When switching between organic and aqueous solutions, flush the drain tube
thoroughly and empty and flush out the drain vessel.
• Drain vessels may contain flammable, acidic, caustic, or organic solutions, and small
amounts of the elements analyzed. The collected effluent may have to be disposed of
as hazardous waste. Refer to applicable regulations for proper disposal practices.
Primary Source Lamps
• Hollow cathode lamps and electrodeless discharge lamps contain small quantities of
the element listed on the label. When you dispose of lamps containing toxic
elements, you must regard them as hazardous waste.
• Hollow cathode lamps are maintained under reduced pressure. Handle and dispose
of them correctly to minimize the implosion risk.
2-10 Precautions Flame Analyses Safety Practices
Flame Analyses Safety Practices

This section describes safety practices for the burner gases, provides a list
of safety checks for the burner system, and identifies potential hazards in
running flame analyses.
Safety Interlocks
The burner system has safety interlocks which monitor gas pressure and
check for the proper setup of the burner head, nebulizer and drain system. In
addition, a flame sensor checks for the presence of the flame and a sensor
monitors the temperature of the sample compartment. All interlocks must be
satisfied before you can operate the system.
Do not attempt to defeat the safety interlocks. This

would compromise operator or equipment safety and
could cause a serious explosion.
Warning
Burner Gases (in General)

Hazards and safety practices for acetylene, nitrous oxide, and air are
described next. In addition to this information, in the Installation chapter
(Chapter 3) we discuss the gas supply requirements and specifications for
each gas. We also included information on connecting the gas supplies in that
chapter.
To avoid explosion hazards, carefully maintain the gas

supplies as follows:
Regularly check the condition of pipes, hoses, and
Warning connectors in the gas lines. Apply an approved leak test
solution to all joints and seals. A leak in a gas line, connection,
or gas control system can result in a serious explosion or fire.
Before you turn off the equipment for the day, close all gas
cylinder and regulator valves tightly at the tank. Bleed the
remainder of the line to the atmosphere before turning off the
exhaust system.
Do not allow a customer to service the gas control system.
It must be serviced by a Perkin-Elmer service engineer.
Precautions Flame Analyses Safety Practices 2-11
Air Supply
An air compressor is recommended for the burner system. Cylinders of

compressed air should only be used as an emergency or short-term solution.
Never use oxygen as the oxidant gas. Use of oxygen will

result in a serious explosion.
Warning If using compressed air in cylinders, be sure that the

oxygen content is less than 20%.
Acetylene
This section describes recommended safety practices for acetylene.

hazards associated with acetylene. Use safe handling and
Warning storage procedures. Do not use acetylene that is dissolved in a
solvent other than acetone.
Acetylene is supplied dissolved in acetone to prevent explosive

decomposition. You should not use acetylene that is dissolved in any other
solvent. Experience indicates that these other solvents can be carried through
the regulator with the acetylene and can weaken, to the point of rupture, the
walls of the tubing that carries the acetylene to the burner, causing a
hazardous situation.
Piping, Tubing, and Fittings: Use galvanized iron, steel, or wrought

iron tubing. Never use copper tubing or fittings for acetylene gas
lines. Acetylene may react with copper to form a readily explosive compound.
Joints may be welded or made up of threaded or flanged fittings, typically

stainless steel or aluminum, or brass composed of less than 65% copper.
Rolled, forged, or cast steel or malleable iron fittings may also be used. Cast
iron fittings can not be used safely for acetylene lines.
Storage and Handling: Follow the General Safety Practices given

earlier in this chapter for the Safe Handling of Gas Cylinders discussed there.
In addition:
Store acetylene cylinders in a safe location preferably outside of the lab.

Do not store acetylene cylinders in close proximity to oxygen or oxidizing gases,
including nitrous oxide.
Always store and use acetylene cylinders in a vertical position to prevent acetone
from blocking the cylinder outlet and gauge.
Use an outlet gauge pressure of 85 to 100 kPa (12-14 psig) for acetylene. Never
allow the outlet gauge pressure of the acetylene cylinder to exceed 103 kPa (15 psig).
At higher pressures, acetylene can decompose with explosive force.
Change the acetylene cylinder before the cylinder pressure drops below 600 kPa (85
psig). Failure to do so may cause damage to valves or tubing within the burner gas
control system due to acetone contamination. Such damage can lead to a serious
explosion.
Attach a regulator and proper flow restrictor. Do not attempt to clear the cylinder
valve by opening it slightly before attaching the regulator. This practice, referred to
as "cracking" the valve, should be avoided.
Nitrous Oxide
This section describes recommended safety practices for nitrous oxide.

hazards associated with nitrous oxide. Use safe handling
Warning and storage procedures.
Make sure tubing and fittings carrying nitrous oxide

are free of grease, oil, or other organic material.
Spontaneous combustion may occur if nitrous oxide comes into
Warning contact with these materials.
Do not attempt to adjust the nebulizer while running a

N20/C2H2 flame. Peak the nebulizer before changing to
Warning N20.
Piping, Tubing, and Fittings: Consult the literature for nitrous oxide
piping, tubing, and fittings requirements.

In addition:
Store nitrous oxide cylinders in a well-ventilated area preferably outside the

laboratory. Nitrous oxide is an asphyxiant; it is a potential hazard when stored or
used in a confined space. In addition, nitrous oxide enriched atmospheres may
collect temporarily in confined areas in the event of a gas leakage. In nitrous oxide
enriched atmospheres, ignition of combustible materials may occur more readily,
with combustion proceeding at a faster rate.
Do not store nitrous oxide cylinders in close proximity to flammable gases (e.g.,
acetylene).
Use a heated regulator for nitrous oxide. This will prevent freezing of the
diaphragm, which causes a lack of pressure regulation and can lead to erratic flame
conditions, or in the most extreme cases, a flashback.
Safety Checks Before Ignition

Before igniting the flame, perform the following general safety checks:
The vent is on and drawing properly.

The burner door is closed.
There is sufficient gas in the cylinders for your intended analyses.
A fire extinguisher is located near the instrument.
Use the safety checks that follow to make sure that all
components are properly installed and in good
condition for safe operation. Inadequate inspection or
Warning maintenance of the burner system can cause the escape of fuel,
gas or the fuel/gas mixture, which can cause a serious
explosion or fire.
Burner Head
Be sure that:
The burner head O-ring is in good condition. The O-ring is easily frayed when
burner heads are interchanged and should be replaced when worn.
The proper burner head has been selected based on your flame and sample
conditions. The five-centimeter N2O/C2H2 burner head is required for a nitrous
oxide-acetylene flame.
The burner head slot is clean.
The burner head is fully seated into the burner mixing chamber.
Burner Mixing Chamber and End Cap

Be sure that:
The standard end cap gasket (for aqueous solutions) or an organic-resistant gasket
is properly seated and in good condition.
The end cap is securely tightened.
The fuel and auxiliary oxidant tubing connected to the burner is in good condition
and the fittings have been properly tightened.
Nebulizer
Be sure that:
The nebulizer O-rings that seal to the end cap are in good condition.
The proper nebulizer has been selected based on the type of solutions that will be
aspirated.
The nebulizer is securely clamped in place.
The nebulizer tubing is in good condition and the connection is tight.
The nebulizer tubing is connected to the nebulizer side arm.
The nebulizer interlock is intact.
Drain System
Be sure that:
The drain system has been properly installed.

The drain tubing is securely connected to the front of the burner and in good
condition (i.e., it does not show signs of cracking or discoloration). The drain tubing
should be checked regularly, especially if using organic solvents.
Any waste collected in the drain vessel has been properly disposed of and the vessel
and drain loop refilled as specified for your system.
Be sure to check the Installation chapter (Chapter 3) for more detailed

information regarding the proper drain setup and the Burner Control System
chapter (Chapter 7) for maintenance procedures.
Hazards with Flame Analyses

Potential hazards for both general flame analyses and for analyses with
special sample types are described below.
General Precautions
Never leave the flame unattended.

Do not adjust the nebulizer when using a nitrous oxide-acetylene flame. This can cause erratic
flame conditions or a flashback.
Keep open containers of flammable liquids and solvents away from the flame.
Flashbacks
The seepage of fuel or a fuel gas mixture from the burner chamber may
cause a fire or a flashback. A flashback is an explosion of the premixed gases
in the burner chamber.
It is essential to carefully follow proper procedures and

regularly inspect and maintain the burner system to
avoid flashbacks.
Warning
Should a flashback ever occur:
Thoroughly check the burner and drain system. Refer to Chapter 7, Burner Control
System.
Do not re-ignite the flame until the problem has been corrected.
Ultraviolet Radiation Hazards
The flame, especially the nitrous oxide flame, emits ultraviolet radiation.
Keep the flame door closed while the flame is lit and
never directly view the flame without wearing UV-
absorbing safety glasses. Safety glasses with side shields
Warning will provide extra protection.
High Temperatures
The burner head becomes very hot during use. Flame temperature is over
2000 °C (3600 °F).
To avoid serious burns, let the burner head cool to

room temperature before you touch it.
Warning
Acetone Carryover
Acetylene is dissolved in acetone. As the cylinder pressure falls, the

concentration of acetone in the gas stream rises, increasing the possibility of
acetone carryover which can damage valves or tubing within the gas control
system. Such damage can lead to a serious explosion. Acetone carryover
may also result if tanks are overfilled, improperly filled, or stored on their
sides.
To avoid acetone carryover and explosion hazards,

replace acetylene cylinders when the cylinder pressure
falls below 600 kPa (85 psig).
Warning
Acetylides
When high concentrations of mercury, copper, or silver are aspirated into

the air-acetylene flame, unstable acetylides may form in the burner chamber.
When permitted to dry, these compounds are likely to explode.
To avoid explosion hazards when aspirating high

concentrations of mercury, copper, or silver:
Aspirate solution continuously during the analysis to prevent any
Warning residues from drying.
Thoroughly flush the burner mixing chamber and drain system with
water immediately after the analysis. Visually inspect the chamber to be
sure that all traces of residue have been removed.
Organic Solvents
Some safety precautions for organic solvents are described below.
Take suitable precautions when using volatile organic

solvents. A potentially flammable organic vapor "cloud"
can form around the opening of the sample container.
Warning Feeding the capillary tubing through a small hole in a covered
sample container is one way of reducing the possibility for
ignition.
While running organic solvents, frequently empty the drain vessel.

After aspirating organic solvents, clean the burner mixing chamber and thoroughly
flush the drain tube with water and empty the drain vessel. For more information,
see the Burner Control System chapter (Chapter 7). (Always dispose of hazardous or
corrosive solutions properly.)
Cyanide Solutions
Read the following warning when using cyanide solutions:
When using cyanide solutions, check the pH of the

liquid trap and drain vessel. The liquid must always be
alkaline (pH greater than 10) to prevent highly toxic hydrogen
Warning cyanide gas from forming.
2-18 Precautions Furnace Analyses Safety Practices
Furnace Analyses Safety Practices

Safety Interlocks
The interlocks check that the furnace is properly cooled, monitor argon
pressure, and monitor the temperature of the power supplies. All interlocks
must be satisfied before you can operate the system.
Do not attempt to defeat the safety interlocks, as this

compromises operator and/or equipment safety.
Warning
Inert Gas Supply

The graphite furnace requires a supply of inert gas for flushing the
graphite tube. Perkin-Elmer recommends argon for the inert gas.
Nitrogen is not recommended as the inert gas supply.

At furnace temperatures above 2300 °C (4170°F), nitrogen
combines with carbon to produce toxic cyanogen gas (C2N2).
Warning
Argon
As just mentioned, the graphite furnace requires a supply of inert gas for
flushing the graphite tube. Perkin-Elmer recommends argon for the inert
gas. This section describes recommended safety practices for argon.

hazards associated with argon. Use safe handling and
Warning storage procedures.
The major hazard associated with argon is suffocation. This can occur if
the gas is allowed to escape in an enclosed area and displaces the oxygen in
air. Argon is neither explosive nor combustible.
If liquid argon is used, the gas cylinder must be fitted with an over-
pressure regulator. The over-pressure regulator will vent the cylinder as
necessary to keep the argon cool enough to remain in its liquid state, thus
preventing the cylinder from exploding due to pressure build-up.
Precautions Furnace Analyses Safety Practices 2-19
Gaseous argon tanks do not require venting and consequently can be

stored for extended periods without loss.

Safety Checks
Before starting the analysis, check the following:

If a fume extraction unit device is used for your furnace, be sure it is in place.
The inert gas supply is connected and set to the correct pressure.
The water cooling hoses are connected and the cooling system is turned on.
The autosampler drain bottle is empty.
Hazards with Furnace Analyses

The following additional potential hazards are associated with furnace
analyses.
UV Radiation
The graphite furnace, when it is heated to incandescence, can generate

ultraviolet radiation.
Never directly view the furnace during the atomization

step without wearing UV-absorbing safety glasses.
Safety glasses with side shields will provide extra protection.
Warning
2-20 Precautions Furnace Analyses Safety Practices
High Temperatures
Graphite furnaces can generate temperatures of up to 3000 °C (5432 °F).
Let the graphite furnace and tube cool to room

temperature before you touch it.
Warning Do not attempt to inject a sample into the graphite tube

while the furnace is very hot (i.e., significantly higher
than the boiling temperature of the solvent). You may be
subjected to fumes from the sudden vaporization of the sample,
you may damage the pipette, and you may be burned.
Precautions Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices 2-21
Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices

This section covers mercury/hydride analyses performed with the MHS-10
or with Flow Injection (FIAS).
Inert Gas Supply

Either argon or nitrogen may be used as the inert gas. Follow the
General Safety Practices given earlier in this chapter for the Safe Handling of
Gas Cylinders discussed there.
Quartz Cells
The FIAS accessories require different quartz cells.
To avoid an explosion hazard, never use the wrong size

FIAS quartz cell. A FIAS cell with the wrong diameter will
cause a pressure buildup in the system. This could force the
Warning acidic reaction mixture back into the sodium tetrahydroborate
storage container. Large quantities of hydrogen would be
produced, resulting in an explosion.
Safety Checks
Before starting the analysis, check the following:

The exhaust hose is securely connected to the two outlets of the quartz cell and leads
to the exhaust system.
The exhaust hose and transfer tubing cannot become pinched or kinked. This can
lead to a pressure buildup in the system.
If you are using FIAS, the tubing is properly assembled, in good condition, and all
tubing connections have been finger-tightened.
The drain tubing leads to the waste container and this container is empty.
In addition, if you are using a flame to heat the quartz cell, refer to the safety checks
given previously for flame analyses.
Hazards with M/H Analyses

High temperatures and certain chemical hazards are associated with
mercury/hydride analyses.
2-22 Precautions Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices
High Temperatures
The quartz cell and heating mantle can be heated to temperatures up to
1000 °C (1832 °F).
To avoid serious burns, let the heating mantle and

quartz cell cool to room temperature before you touch
them.
Warning
Sodium Tetrahydroborate (Sodium Borohydride)
Sodium tetrahydroborate (NaBH4) is commonly used as a reducing agent

in mercury/hydride analyses. It is toxic, corrosive, and flammable. During the
course of mercury/hydride analyses, sodium tetrahydroborate comes into
contact with the acidic carrier solution and releases hydrogen. Hydrogen can
form explosive mixtures with air.
The work area must have an adequate exhaust system

to prevent the buildup of explosive hydrogen/air mixtures
Warning
Wear goggles, protective clothing and gloves.

Protect sodium tetrahydroborate solutions from temperature variations. Keep out of
direct sunlight, away from open flames, and in an area with an efficient ventilation
system.
Prepare sodium tetrahydroborate solutions fresh daily. Do not store overnight.
Handle solutions with care since they are corrosive.
Before disposing of any remaining solution, neutralize it with a diluted acid inside a
fume hood.
When using FIAS:
- Make sure that all tubing connections are tight to prevent air from entering the
system.
- Do not loosen or remove any connections while the system is running.
- Never use a concentration greater than 0.5% of sodium tetrahydroborate.
- Pump deionized water through the tubing system at the end of the day to remove all
traces of sodium tetrahydroborate.
Tin (II) Chloride (Stannous Chloride)

Precautions Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices 2-23
Tin (II) chloride (SnCl2) can also be used as the reducing agent in
mercury/hydride analyses. It is toxic and corrosive.
Before using tin (II) chloride, you should be thoroughly

familiar with all hazards and safe handling practices.
Observe the manufacturer's recommendations for use, storage
Warning and disposal.
Wear goggles, protective clothing and gloves.

When preparing solutions, work in a fume hood. Make sure the solid is completely
dissolved and the solution is clear. Use a filter if necessary.
Handle solutions with care since they are corrosive.
When changing from sodium tetrahydroborate, use a separate analyzer assembly or
FIAS tubing assembly.
When using FIAS:
- Make sure that all tubing connections are tight to prevent leaks.
- Do not loosen or remove any connections while the system is running.
- Pump deionized water through the tubing system at the end of the day to
remove all residue.
Hydrofluoric Acid
Hydrofluoric acid (HF) is used to condition the quartz cell. It is toxic and
extremely corrosive. Hydrofluoric acid will readily burn skin, and if the fumes
are inhaled, may also burn lung tissue. Burns may not be immediately
painful or visible. Contact with eyes could result in blindness.
Before using hydrofluoric acid, you should be

thoroughly familiar with all hazards and safe handling
practices. Observe the manufacturer's recommendations for
Warning use, storage and disposal.
Always wear suitable protective equipment, including goggles, a face shield, acid-
resistant gloves, and protective clothing.
Do not breathe HF vapors. Always work in a fume hood.
Do not use a glass beaker. Hydrofluoric acid attacks glass.
Magnesium Perchlorate
2-24 Precautions Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices
Magnesium perchlorate is sometimes used in the drying tube of the

amalgam system accessory. Magnesium perchlorate is toxic and a powerful
oxidizing agent. Magnesium perchlorate presents severe fire and explosion
hazards.
Before using magnesium perchlorate, you should be

thoroughly familiar with all hazards and safe handling
Wear suitable protective clothing, including a face shield.

Always work in a fume hood.
Precautions Sample Preparation Safety Practices 2-25
Sample Preparation Safety Practices

Sample preparation for atomic spectroscopy may require the handling of
organic or corrosive solutions. Dilution of samples and adding dilute acid to a
liquid sample is generally less hazardous than putting a solid sample into
solution. This section will deal specifically with the potential hazards
associated with dissolving solid samples, although the information can be
applied to any sample handling situation. Also, refer to the general safety
practices for handling chemicals described earlier in this chapter, General
Safety Practices - Safe Use of Chemical Reagents.
Solid samples may be put into solution by dissolving the sample in an

organic solvent or acidic solution, digesting the sample, or reacting the
sample with a fusion mixture. Each of these techniques has certain hazards
associated with it.
Always wear appropriate eye protection while

preparing samples. Use safety glasses with side shields,
goggles, or full-face shields, depending on the chemicals you
Warning are handling.
Dissolving Solid Samples in Organics
Always work in a fume hood so that flammable and/or toxic solvents do not
concentrate in the work area.
Wear protective clothing and gloves. Some solvents are readily absorbed through the
skin.
When selecting a solvent, consider the following:
Is the solvent compatible with the equipment?

Aliphatic hydrocarbons, ketones and esters, alcohols, and xylene are the most
frequently used solvents. Make sure that all the equipment that will come into
contact with the solvent is compatible with the solvent (e.g., tubing, sample cups,
storage and waste containers, etc.).
Is the solvent toxic?
Avoid solvents known to be health hazards, such as benzene or methyl isobutyl
ketone (MIBK), which are carcinogenic.
Some solvents, such as the halogenated hydrocarbons, generate toxic gases when
heated.
2-26 Precautions Sample Preparation Safety Practices
Consult the data sheets provided by the manufacturer for information on health
hazards.
Dissolving Solid Samples Using Acids

Dissolving solid samples in aqueous solutions often requires the use of
concentrated acids.
When using acids, observe the following precautions:
Wear protective clothing, including gloves specifically resistant to the acid being
used.
Always work in an acid-resistant fume hood.
Attempt to dissolve the sample in a dilute acid solution before using concentrated
acid.
Add concentrated acid to a sample cautiously. Dissolving a sample in concentrated
acid may provoke a vigorous reaction.
Acid Digestions
Acid digestions, either at atmospheric pressure or at increased pressure,
require special care. Spattering and foaming of the sample/acid mixture may
expose you to a hazard, as well as compromise the sample integrity. A
digested sample containing concentrated acid will react violently with water.
Perchloric acid and hydrofluoric acid are particularly hazardous to work

with.
Perchloric Acid
Perchloric acid (HClO4) is extremely corrosive and a powerful oxidizing

agent. It presents severe fire and explosion hazards.
Before using perchloric acid, you should be thoroughly

familiar with its hazards and safe handling practices.
Observe the manufacturer's recommendations for use, storage
Warning and disposal.
Use hoods, ducts, and other devices for removing vapors specifically designed to
accommodate this kind of fume. There is a severe explosion hazard if a normal hood
is used, or if the hood is not properly used and maintained.
Use goggles and face shields. Wear protective clothing and polyvinyl chloride, not
rubber gloves.
Precautions Sample Preparation Safety Practices 2-27
Hydrofluoric Acid
Hydrofluoric acid (HF) is also used for digestions. It is toxic and extremely
corrosive. Hydrofluoric acid will readily burn skin, and if the fumes are
inhaled, lung tissue. Burns may not be immediately painful or visible.
Contact with eyes could result in blindness.
Before using hydrofluoric acid, you should be

thoroughly familiar with its hazards and safe handling
Always wear suitable protective equipment, including goggles, a face shield, acid-
resistant gloves, and protective clothing when using hydrofluoric acid.
Do not breathe HF vapors. Always work in a fume hood when using hydrofluoric
acid.
Do not use a glass beaker. Hydrofluoric acid attacks glass.
Performing Digestions
When carrying out sample digestions:
Always work in a hood suitable for the chemicals you are using.
Add very small quantities of the acid (drops), while observing the magnitude of the
reaction.
Apply heat to a digestion solution slowly in case a further vigorous reaction is
initiated.
Cool the completed digest before transferring it and diluting it. Add water
cautiously.
2-28 Precautions Sample Preparation Safety Practices
Digestions at Elevated Pressure
Acid digestions in a pressure digestion apparatus require special care at

several points, in addition to the precautions described above:
When using high pressure digestion vessels, consult the

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
particularly regarding organic material and possible
Warning explosive reactions.
Never use perchloric acid in a pressure digestion.

Use only the manufacturer's recommended amounts of sample and acid for the type
of sample you are preparing.
Be sure the apparatus is in good condition and provides safe release of pressure in
the case of excess pressure buildup.
Cool the apparatus to room temperature before attempting to open it.
Open the apparatus in a fume hood to vent the entrapped fumes safely.
Fusion Mixtures
Dissolving a sample by having it react with a fusion-flux mixture is

generally chosen when other techniques for sample dissolution fail. The
fusion-flux mixture should be carefully selected. Knowledge of fusion-flux
mixture/crucible compatibility is essential. Heating the sample-flux mixture
may initiate a vigorous or explosive reaction.
Heat the mixture slowly and intermittently until the system is characterized.
If you use a muffle furnace rather than a flame for heating, make a trial using the
standard amount of flux but with a smaller amount of sample.
Most reacted fusion mixtures are dissolved in acidic solutions. Observe the
precautions described previously for handling acids.
AAnalyst Installation 3
Overview
This chapter contains complete instructions for installing the AAnalyst
100 and 300 Atomic Absorption Spectrometers, including laboratory
preparation, unpacking the instrument, and preliminary testing of the
Aanalyst. The performance tests, which are to be performed when installing
the AAnalyst, are in Chapter 4.
Preparing the Laboratory

Before unpacking the instrument, be sure that the laboratory has been
prepared according to the following guidelines.
Environmental Conditions
The AAnalyst is designed for indoor use. It is not designed to operate in
an explosive environment. It will operate safely in environments that
contain non-conductive foreign matter to Pollution Degree 2 (in IEC 1010-1).
The laboratory environment should provide the following conditions:
• the laboratory must be indoors

• it must be at an altitude of 0 to 2000 meters (sea level to 6,500 feet) for
instrument operation)
• the ideal operating temperature range is between 10 and 35 °C
(50-95 °F) with a maximum rate of change of 2.8 °C (5 °F) per hour.
• the safe operating temperature range is between 5 and 40 °C (45 and
104 °F)
3-2 AAnalyst Installation Preparing the Laboratory
• the relative humidity should be between 20 and 80 %, non condensing

• there must be no existing explosive hazard
• the laboratory must be free of dust, smoke, vibration, and corrosive fumes
• the bench area must be out of direct sunlight and away from radiators
The Storage Area in which the instrument is kept when not in use should
provide the following environmental conditions:
• temperature range: between − 20 and + 60 °C

(− 4 to + 140 °F)
• altitude: 0 to 12 000 meters (sea level to 40,000 feet)
(non-operating)
Bench Space
The bench top or area in which the AAnalyst 100 or 300 is to be installed
should be large enough to accommodate the instrument and all accessories.
The bench area must be out of direct sunlight and away from radiators. The
AAnalyst 300 weighs 68 kg (150 lb); the AAnalyst 100 weighs 63 kg (140 lb).
Six inches should be available on the right side of the instrument to allow for
ventilation; there is a muffin fan expelling warm air on the right side of the
AAnalyst.
In addition, an area of at least 61 cm (2 ft) should be available behind the

instrument for servicing purposes. If this is not possible, the bench on which
the instrument is mounted should be on wheels. See Figure 3-1 for the
dimensions of the AAnalyst 100 and 300.
AAnalyst Installation Preparing the Laboratory 3-3
AAnalyst Dimensions:
Width: 97 cm (38 in.), Height: 51 cm (20 in.), Depth: 87 cm (34 in.)*
* Depth indicated allows for extension of sample trays and rear connectors/cables,
but does not include swing radius of opening burner door.
Figure 3-1. Dimensions of the AAnalyst 100 and 300.
Exhaust Vent
A ventilation system is required to remove combustion fumes and vapors
from the flame or graphite furnace (if used). The exhaust vent should be 76
cm (30 inches) above the bench and provide a flow rate of approximately
5400 - 8400 liters/minute (200 - 300 cubic feet/minute).
An accessory vent kit (P/N 0303-0406) is available from Perkin-Elmer.

The kit fulfills all the exhaust requirements for the AAnalyst. The kit
includes a rotary blower and a vent to be located above the AAnalyst.
Instructions for installing the vent and blower (P/N 0990-9701) are provided
with the kit.
Gases
Air
The permanent installation of gas supplies is the responsibility of the user

and should conform to local safety and building codes. Before installing the
AAnalyst 100 or the AAnalyst 300, make sure that all gas supplies are
correctly installed.
The supply of compressed air should provide a minimum of 28 liters/min

(1 cubic foot/min) at a minimum pressure of 350 kPa (50 psig). The air
3-4 AAnalyst Installation Preparing the Laboratory
supply should also be suitably filtered to remove oil, water, and solid
particles.
Acetylene
The acetylene supply should be atomic absorption or welding grade

(99.6% pure) and provide a pressure of 83-96 kPa (12-14 psig).
Acetylene may react with copper to form a potentially explosive

compound. Never use copper tubing or fittings for acetylene gas
connections.
Warning
Acetylene line pressure from the tank to the instrument should

never exceed 104 kPa (15 psig). At higher pressures acetylene can
spontaneously decompose or explode. A maximum line pressure of
Warning 96 kPa (13.7 psig) is strongly recommended.
Nitrous Oxide
The nitrous oxide supply should be at least 99% pure. A heated regulator
providing 350-520 kPa (51-75 psig) is recommended.
All lines carrying nitrous oxide should be free of grease, oil, and
other organic material that can cause spontaneous combustion.
Warning
Gases for Accessories
If an HGA-800 Graphite Furnace or a mercury/hydride system such as

the MHS-10 is to be used, a tank of argon or nitrogen is required with an
appropriate pressure regulator. For more information, refer to the
installation instructions for the appropriate accessory.
Gas Line Connections
All the hoses necessary for connecting the required gases are shipped with
the AAnalyst 100 and 300. Refer to Table 3-1 and Figure 3-9 for complete
information on gas line connections.
AAnalyst Installation Preparing the Laboratory 3-5
Table 3-1. Gas Line Connections
Hose Assembly Connections

Regulator
Regulator Regulator Connection to
P-E Part to Cylinder Gas Hose P-E Part Connection to Connection to
Gas Number CGA No. Assembly Number Color Regulator Instrument
†
Air 0303-0264 580 or 590 1/4”Swagelok 0057-0567 black 1/4”Swagelok 1/4”Swagelok
Argon 0303-0264 580 or 590 1/4”Swagelok 0057-0567 black 1/4”Swagelok 1/4”Swagelok
Nitrogen 0303-0264 580 or 590 1/4”Swagelok 0057-0567 black 1/4”Swagelok 1/4”Swagelok
†
Nitrous Oxide 0303-0204 320 1/4”N.P.T.* 0047-0258 blue 5/16”Swagelok 5/16”Swagelok
†
Acetylene 0303-0106 510 or 300 9/16”L.H.T.** 0057-0559 red 9/16”L.H.T. 3/8”L.H.T.
* Supplied with 5/16”x 1/4”N.P.T. Swagelok Male connector Body (P/N 0990-3946). N.P.T. = Normal Pipe Thread
** Supplied with Outlet Bushing (P/N 0990-3031) with 1/4”N.P.T. to 9/16”L.H.T. L.H.T. = Left-Hand Thread
†
Fastened to Instrument
Perkin-Elmer Air Compressor (P/N 0303-0313) provides a 1/4”Swagelok fitting.
Perkin-Elmer Air Dryer/Filter Assembly (P/N 0047-0652) provides a 1/4”Swagelok inlet and a 1/4”Swagelok outlet fitting.
Perkin-Elmer Air/Acetylene Filter (P/N N930-1398) provides a 1/4”Swagelok inlet and a 1/4”Swagelok outlet fitting.
Also Available: 1. P/N 0990-3032 Connector for joining two P/N 0057-0559 fuel hose assemblies.
2. P/N 0990-3898 Connector for joining two P/N 0057-0567 air/argon hose assemblies
3. P/N 0990-3196 Adapter, female 1/4”N.P.T. to male 1/4”Swagelok.
4. P/N 0992223 Connector for joining two 0047-0258 nitrous oxide hose assemblies.
Handling Gas Cylinders
While the installation and operation of all gas supplies is the

responsibility of the user, the following safety information concerning the
handling of gas cylinders is included for your reference:
• Keep the cylinders away from heat or ignition sources, including heat
lamps.
• Fasten all gas cylinders securely to an immovable bulkhead or a

permanent wall.
• Make certain gas hoses are not taut, and are positioned where they
cannot be frayed by moving equipment, etc.
• Store all gas cylinders vertically and in a properly ventilated area.
• Make certain gas cylinders are not subject to either very high or very
low temperatures.
3-6 AAnalyst Installation Unpacking the AAnalyst 100 and 300
Electrical Requirements
NOTE: All AAnalyst 100 and 300 Spectrometers are shipped
set for 220 Vac. To change the operating voltage of the
AAnalyst, perform the procedure in the paragraph entitled
"Changing the Operating Voltage" included later in this
Chapter.
The electrical supply should be free of line transients in excess of 50 V

peak, and must be one of the following:
• 100 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60 Hz ±1%
• 120 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60 Hz ±1%
• 220 Vac ±10% @ 50 Hz ±1% or @ 60 Hz ±1%
• 230/240 Vac [230 ±10%, 240 + 6/− 10 %] @ 50 Hz ±1%

or @ 60 Hz ±1%
If the supply voltage produces large AC line voltage fluctuations, install a

voltage regulator between the AC outlet and the instrument.
The rated maximum input power of the AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300
is 248 Volt Amps. The spectrometer requires either a 120 Vac standard 15-
ampere grounded outlet or a 220 Vac outlet.
The AAnalyst is able to withstand transient overvoltage according to

Installation Category II as defined in IEC 1010-1.
Unpacking the AAnalyst 100 and 300

To unpack the Aanalyst 100 or 300, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the top cap from the shipping carton.

2. Remove all spare parts from the tray on the top of the spectrometer, and
then remove the tray.
3. Remove the two pieces of protective foam from the carton.
4. Remove the outer sleeve from the shipping carton.
5. Identify the position on the bench where the instrument is going to be
used.
6. With at least one person helping you, and with that person at the
opposite side of the instrument, lift the instrument off of its pallet using
AAnalyst Installation Unpacking the AAnalyst 100 and 300 3-7
the lip near the instrument base (see Figure 3-2), and place it on the
bench in the position it will be used.
Lift Points at both ends of instrument

(See detail of right-end below.)
Right-End Lift Points

(See text.)
Figure 3-2. Lifting the AAnalyst during Unpacking.
The AAnalyst 300 weighs 68 kg (150 lb). The AAnalyst

100 weighs 63 kg (140 lb).
Warning
7. Return the shipping container to Perkin-Elmer for recycling.

3-8 AAnalyst Installation Installing the AAnalyst 100 and 300
Installing the AAnalyst 100 and 300

Overview
In this section we describe how to perform the following procedures. Be
sure to perform the procedures in the order in which they are presented!
• install the burner components
• connect the gases
• electrical connections
Installing the Burner Components (Flame Only)

Install the following components in the AAnalyst sample compartment:
• burner assembly
• nebulizer
• burner drain system
• sample compartment door
• sample trays
Overview
The burner assembly (see Figure 3-3) is shipped with the burner
chamber, the burner head, and the end cap already installed. After you slide
the burner assembly in the sample compartment tray, install the nebulizer
and the drain assembly to complete the installation of items in the sample
compartment. Then, to complete the installation of the burner components,
install the sample compartment door and the sample trays.
AAnalyst Installation Installing the AAnalyst 100 and 300 3-9
Sample Compartment
Burner Head Atomizer Tray Assembly
Burner Chamber
End Cap
Nebulizer
Nebulizer
Adjustment
Nut
Quick-Disconnect
Release Plate
Interlock
Drain Tube Connector
Mechanical
Interlock Knob
Drain Interlock
Connector
Figure 3-3. Installing the Burner Assembly.
Install the Burner Assembly in the Sample Compartment Tray
To install the burner assembly, refer to Figure 3-3 and perform the
following steps:
NOTE: The mechanical interlock knob must be pressed down

in order to insert the interlock connector in its socket.
1. Begin to slide the burner assembly into the sample compartment tray
assembly as shown in Figure 3-3.
2. Press down on the mechanical interlock knob, and then press the
interlock connector into its socket.
NOTE: In order to remove the interlock connector, you must

first press down on the plastic pad on the latch at the top of the
connector.
3. Continue sliding the burner assembly into the sample compartment tray
until a loud "click" indicates the quick-disconnect gas connections have
been properly made.
NOTE: In order to remove the burner assembly from the

sample compartment tray, you must press down on the large
quick-disconnect release plate at the bottom of the tray (see
Figure 3-3).
Install the GemTip Nebulizer in the Burner End Cap
Install the standard or high-sensitivity nebulizer using the following

procedure:
1. Apply Apiezon grease sparingly onto 1/2 in. of the oxidant tubing exterior
(where the connector passes over the tubing in step 2, below).
2. Remove the connector nut on the nebulizer side arm and place it over the
end of the NEB oxidant tubing (see Figures 3-4 and 3-5).
Nebulizer Side Arm*

Spring Clamp
Nebulizer Interlock Clamp Assembly
Connector Nut* (N037-1485)
Oxidant Tubing
Locking Nut*
(N037-1493)
Drain Clamp Nebulizer Adjustment Nut*

(N037-0391) (N037-1492)
* Part of Nebulizer Drain Tube
Figure 3-4. GemTip Nebulizer Installed in the Burner End Cap.

3. While holding the nebulizer, slide the black oxidant (NEB) tubing over
the ridges on the end of the nebulizer side arm.
NOTE: Carefully tilt the tubing up and down and rotate it

while sliding it over the ridges on the side arm.
4. Screw the connector nut onto the threads on the nebulizer side arm.
Tighten the connector nut so that it covers the side-arm threads.
Caution Excessive tightening could result in damage to the nebulizer when

you remove the nut.
5. Apply a small amount of Apiezon grease on the O-rings (0990-2015). See

Figure 3-5. The nebulizer will then slide easily into the end cap when you
perform step 6, below.
6. Lift the end-cap spring clamp (see Figure 3-4) and insert the nebulizer in
the center of the end cap. Then release the spring clamp. Make sure the
spring clamp slips over the nebulizer flange properly, i.e., make sure
that the nebulizer is held securely in place.
Caution
Be careful if you are installing a high-sensitivity nebulizer. The
impact bead is quite fragile.
O-Rings (2)
(Apply Grease)
Nebulizer Body Assembly
Locking Nut Impact Bead

Structure
(For High
Adjustment Nut Sensitivity Nebulizer)
Interlock Magnet
Ridges
0.6-mm I.D. Sample Nebulizer

Capillary Tubing Side Arm Oxidant
Tubing
Threads
Connector Nut
Figure 3-5. Exploded View of Nebulizer.

Install the Burner Drain System
Connect the drain to the burner end cap by performing the following
procedure:
1. Pour water into the drain tube (approximately 250 mL), until you hear it
start to drip into the waste vessel.
2. Position the waste vessel in a convenient location under the instrument

bench, and screw the large, white cap (retainer ring) onto the waste
vessel.
Never operate the AAnalyst with the waste vessel in an

enclosed cabinet.
Warning
3. Plug the drain interlock cable connector into the connector receptacle in
the burner assembly as shown in Figure 3-6.
4. Clamp the drain tube to the burner end cap to complete the installation of
the burner drain system.
NOTE: See the drain maintenance procedures in Chapter 7.

Procedures are included for flushing the drain system,
replacing the drain tubing, cleaning the drain-trap switch
assembly, and replacing the entire drain assembly (see Figure
3-6.)
Spiral Wrap
Drain Interlock Cable
Connector
Drain Tubing
Retainer Cap
Interlock Cable
Water Line
Trap Switch
Assembly
(Includes Drain Loop.)
Drain Assembly
P/N N040-0058
Replace Drain
Assembly as
a complete unit.
Waste
Vessel
Figure 3-6. Installing the Burner Drain System.

Install the Sample Compartment Door and the Sample Trays
Install the Door
Figure 3-7. Installing the Sample Compartment Door.

Install the Trays
Left-Side
Sample Tray
Right-Side
Sample Tray
Figure 3-8. Installing the Sample Trays.
Connect the Gases

In the "Preparing Your Laboratory" paragraphs earlier in this Chapter
we specified the gases to be used: air, acetylene, and, optionally, nitrous
oxide. We also included warnings and precautions to be taken when using
those gases.
In Table 3-1 (see page 3-4), we include complete information on gas line
connections. In Figure 3-9, below, we illustrate gas line connections.
Figure 3-9. Gas Tank Connections.

Electrical Connections
Checking the Voltage Setting
Look for the power entry module on the right side of the instrument (refer
to Figure 3-10). Look for the white pin protruding through one of the four
holes on the power entry module cover plate (marked 100V, 120V, 220V or
240V).
That pin marks the instrument voltage setting. For example, in the figure
below, the pin is coming through the hole marked 220V. The istrument is set
to run at 220V.
Power Entry Module
Power Entry Module

Cover Plate
Voltage Indicator Hole with White

Plastic Pin in 220V position
Figure 3-10. Location of the Power Entry Module and ON/OFF Switch.
If You Have 220 VAC Mains Power
If your electrical supply voltage is 220 VAC, then your mains supply
matches what the instrument was configured for at the factory. To confirm
that your instrument is set for 220V operation, look for the power entry
module on the right side of the instrument (refer to Figure 3-10). Notice that
the voltage selected on the instrument is 220V. (You’ll see a white plastic pin
protruding through the hole marked 220V.)
Once you have confirmed the above, you’re ready to connect the
instrument to line power. Make sure your instrument is switched OFF.
Then simply plug one end of the 220 VAC line cord into the power entry
module, and plug the other end of the line cord into the 220 VAC power
outlet.
Changing the Instrument Operating Voltage (If you don't have 220
Vac)
If the operating voltage selected on the power entry module does not
match the AC line voltage at the site, you must convert the fuse block, and
then change the setting on the voltage selector board, as explained in the
procedures, below.
Accessing the Fuse Block and Voltage Selector Board
1. Make sure the instrument is switched Off.
2. Disconnect the instrument from the line power.
3. Refer to Figure 3-11, below. Then locate the power entry module on the
right side of the instrument.
4. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver (or similar tool) to carefully pry off the
power entry module cover as shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11. Prying off the Power Entry Module Cover.
Converting the Fuse Block
Note that the inside of the power entry module cover contains the fuses
necessary to use for any of the four possible operating voltages. For 100, 120,
or 220 Vac, arrange the fuse block with the single-fuse side facing up (see
Figure 3-12, below). For 220 and 230/240 Vac, arrange the fuse block with
the dual-fuse side facing up (see Figure 3-12).
Figure 3-12. Orientation of the Fuse Block for 100, 120 and 220 Vac (single
fuse) and for 220 and 230/240 Vac (dual fuse).
Proceed as follows to position the fuse block correctly:
1. Hold the fuse block in the position shown above and remove the Phillips
head screw that holds the fuse block to the cover.
2. Carefully lift the fuse block away from the cover. (If necessary, wiggle the
block to unhook it.)
3. Note which fuse is facing you, then flip the fuse block over so that the
other side is facing you.
4. Carefully place the fuse block assembly back onto the cover, with the new
fuse (or fuses) facing you. Finally, replace the Phillips head screw.
Replacing a Fuse
To replace a fuse, perform steps 1 through 4 of "Changing the

Instrument Voltage". Then perform steps 1 and 2 just above, remove the
blown fuse and insert the new one, and replace the fuse block assembly as
explained in step 4, just above. See Tables 3-2 and 3-3 for the correct fuse to
insert.
Table 3-2. Single-Fuse Configuration Table
Voltage Selector Fuse to be Inserted PE Part Number
100 6.25 amp slow-blow 0998-1761
120 6.25 amp slow-blow 0998-1761
220 3.0 amp slow-blow 0998-1626
Table 3-3. Dual-Fuse Configuration Table
Voltage Selector Fuse to be Inserted PE Part Number
220 3.15 amp slow-blow 0999-1675
230/240 3.15 amp slow-blow 0999-1675
Changing the Voltage Selector Board Setting
Proceed as follows to change the Selector Board setting:

1. Locate the voltage selector board inside the power entry module (see
Figure 3-13).
2. Carefully pull the voltage selector board from the instrument using a
needle-nose pliers or similar tool. Do not scratch the board cladding or
crush the board.
Figure 3-13. Removing the Voltage Selector Board from the Power Entry
Module.
3. Refer to Figure 3-14 and find the voltage on the selector board that
matches the site's mains voltage. The correct position of the pin for each
voltage is shown in the Figure.
4. To set the pin in the correct position, hold the board in the position shown
in Figure 3-14, and grasp the (white) indicator pin with the other hand
Figure 3-14. Orienting the Pin on the Voltage-Selector Board.
5. Then, while pulling the pin away from the board, slide it along the edges
of the board until the pin is in the correct position, i.e., one of the
positions shown in the Figure.
6. Make sure the pin is seated properly in its "notch."

7. Replace the voltage selector board in the power-entry module, making

certain that the side of the board with writing faces the On/Off
switch.
8. Carefully snap the power-entry module into place. Then (see Figure 3-
10), check the white pin protruding through the module cover. Again,
make certain the pin setting matches the site's mains voltage.
Installing the AC Line Cords
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of

equipment. Never operate equipment with the grounding
conductor disconnected. Do not remove or alter the ground pin on
Warning
a three-prong line cord.
The line cord must have the electrical rating and plug appropriate for
your location. See Figure 3-15 for the correct cord.
1. Select the proper line cord for your location.
2. Make certain that the Power switch is OFF. Then insert one end of the
line cord into the instrument receptacle, and the other end into the AC
supply receptacle.
Figure 3-15. Line-cord Plugs for the AAnalyst.

Connecting a Printer
For a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst 100
The standard printer for use with a stand-alone Aanalyst 100 is the
Okidata Microline 320 printer. Connect the cable supplied with the printer
to the PRINTER connector at the back of the spectrometer.
The default printer settings, i.e., the printer settings made at the factory,
are to be used with the exception of Emulation Mode, which should be
changed to Epson Fxe, and Character Set, which should be set to Set 1.
We include below, in Table 3-4, the default settings. If the settings of
your Okidata 320 printer have been changed, e.g., for use with another
instrument, you must reset them using Table 3-4 before using the printer
with your keypad-controlled AAnalyst 100. (Again, Emulation Mode and
Character Set are exceptions.)
For an AAnalyst 300 and a PC-Controlled AAnalyst 100

Use either a HP Inkjet or Laserjet Printer (e.g., the Model 660). The
AAnalyst 300, and PC Controlled AAnalyst 100 electrical connections are
shown in Figure 3-16.
Required printer configurations are listed in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4. Default Settings for Okidata Microline 320 Printer Settings
Group Item Settings

FONT Print Mode Utility
Draft Mode HSD
Pitch 10 CPI
Style Normal
Size Single
GENERAL Emulation Mode IBM PPR*
Graphics Bi-directional
Max Receive Buffer Full
Paper Out Override No
Print Registration 0
Operator Panel Functions Full Operation
Reset Inhibit No
Print Suppress Effective Yes
CPU Compensation Normal
VERTICAL CONTROL Line Spacing 6 LPI
Form Tear-Off Off
Skip Over Perforation No
Auto LF No
Auto CR No
Auto Feed XT Invalid
Page Length 11"
CUT Sheet Page Length 11"
SYMBOL SETS Character Set Epson**
Language Set American
Zero Character Slashed
SERIAL INTERFACE Parity None
Serial Data 7 or 8 Bits 8
Protocol Ready/Busy
Diagnostic Test No
Busy Line SSD-
Baud Rate 9600 BPS
DSR Signal Valid
DTR Signal Ready on Power Up
Busy Time 200 Milliseconds
* Must be changed to Epson Fxe ** Should be changed to Set I
Figure 3-16. Printer Connections for the AAnalyst 300 and Computer
Controlled AAnalyst 100.
Installing the AS-90/91 Autosampler

Refer to Figure 3-17, which illustrates the electrical connections between
the AS-90/91 when it is used as a flame autosampler with the AAnalyst 100
or 300. The address DIP switches are located at the rear of the Autosampler
Controller.
The IEEE-488 address for the AS-90/91 Autosampler must be set to

binary 3. The address for the AS-90/91 in the software configuration file
(with AA WinLab rev. 2.2 or higher) is included in Table 3-5, below.
Table 3-5. Address Settings for the AS-90/91
System IEEE Dip Switch Dip Switch

Component Address 1 setting 2 setting Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8
AS-90/91 3 on on off off off off off on
NOTE: A performance check of the AS-90/91, when it is used

with the FIAS, is included in Chapter 3B. You can easily adapt
that test for flame.
Figure 3-17. Electrical Connections between the AS-90/91 Autosampler

Controller and the AAnalyst 100 or 300.
Installing an External Analog Recorder

Connect the recorder to line power and to pins 3 and 4 of the REMOTE
connector at the rear of the AAnalyst. There is 1 V full scale across pins 3
and 4.
Figure 3-18. Electrical Connections for an External Recorder.
Aligning the Burner Head in the Beam

After installing the AAnalyst and before proceeding to the performance
tests, adjust the burner head in the beam as follows:
1. Turn the spectrometer on, but do not light the flame.
2. Press CONT to display absorbance. Then press A/Z to zero the displayed
count.
3. Refer to Figure 3-19, and raise the burner assembly by turning the large
vertical-adjustment knob counterclockwise until you obtain a non-zero
absorbance reading.
4. Lower the burner assembly by turning the vertical-adjustment knob

clockwise until the displayed absorbance reading is 0.000.
5. Then turn the vertical-adjustment knob an additional ¼ turn clockwise.
6. Align the burner-head slot with the sample beam as follows:
a. Use an index card or piece of cardboard to locate the beam.
b. Turn the rotational- and horizontal-adjustment knobs (see

Figure 3-13) until the beam is centered over the burner-head slot.
Flame Sensor Notch
Interlock
Connector
Mechanical
Interlock
Knob
Vertical Adjustment
Rotational Adjustment
Horizontal Adjustment
Figure 3-19. Burner-Position Adjustment Controls.
Adjusting the Gas Flows and Lighting the Flame

After you adjust the gas flows, you can light the flame. Proceed as
follows:
1. Set the gas-cylinder pressure regulators as follows:
• air regulator: 345 - 448 kPa (50 - 65 psig)
• acetylene cylinder: 83 - 96 kPa (12 - 14 psig)
• nitrous oxide cylinder: 345 - 518 kPa (50 - 75 psig)
2. Press the Gases On/Off button to turn on the gases. Then adjust the
FUEL flowmeter knob for an indication of 2 on the fuel flowmeter, and
adjust the OXIDANT flowmeter knob for an indication of 4 on the oxidant
flowmeter.
NOTE: The fuel and oxidant flows may be adjusted for 18

seconds after pressing the Gases On/Off button.
3. Press the Flame On/Off button to light the flame.
Checking the Flame Sensor
When the flame sensor does not detect a flame, the flame will go out.
Verify that the flame does go out by performing the following steps:
1. Refer to Figure 3-19 and locate the flame sensor notch.
2. Block the flame sensor by placing an index card in front of the flame-
sensor notch. The flame will go out if the sensor is functioning.
Never use your finger to block the beam.
Warning
3. Then check that the gases go off (as required) by turning the gases on
without igniting the flame. After 18 seconds, the balls in the FUEL and
OXIDANT flowmeters will drop to zero if the flame is not ignited.
3-32 AAnalyst Installation Installing the Automatic Turret Assembly
Installing the Automatic Turret Assembly

In this procedure you replace the manual lamp holder with a 6-lamp
automatic Turret. The turret installation and alignment procedure includes
the following major tasks:
• Install the rotating toroid (M1), the toroid motor, and the four-motor
motor P.C. board.
• Install the turret shaft and looker wheel bracket assembly, which
includes the turret shaft, the turret looker assembly, and the
turret-motor worm gear and turret-shaft brass gear.
• Install the floating wheel, the turret assembly, and the turret
assembly cables.
• Align the turret assembly and the rotating toroid.
The parts included in Table 1, below, are required to install a 6-position

turret in the AAnalyst 100:
AAnalyst Installation Installing the Automatic Turret Assembly 3-33
Table 1. Parts Required to Install a 6-position Turret.
PART OR ASSY PE PART NO. QUANTITY
Turret P.C. Bd. Assy. N041-9090 1

Turret High-Voltage N041-0062 1
Cable
Turret Looker Flex N041-0061 1
Cable
Four-Motor P.C. Board N041-9040 1
Assy.
Turret Shaft, Motor, N041-???? 1
Gear, and Looker
Bracket Assy.
Rotating Optic (HCL N041-???? 1
Toroid M1) Bonded
Assy
Rotating Optic (M1) 0999-5121 1
Motor Assy
Rotating Optic (M1) N041-0086 1
Looker Assy
Floating Wheel ? 1
Six-Position Turret ? 1
Flat Washer (for turret 0993-xxxx 2
shaft)
Spring Washer (for 0993-xxxx 2
turret shaft)
E Clamp ? 2
Cable Tie 0993-xxxx ?
Preliminary Steps
Before proceeding with the four major steps outlined above and given in
detail below, get the spectrometer ready for the alignment by disconnecting it
from line power, and placing it where you can conveniently get at both its
front and rear.
Then open the instrument cover and remove the photometer cover before
proceeding with step 1 "Install Rotating Toroid (M1) and its Motor".
Install Rotating Toroid (M1) and its Motor

With the instrument disconnected from line power, and after removing
the photometer cover, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the four (4) screws and two harnesses which secure the single-
lamp mount and remove the mount.
2. Remove the installed (stationary) HCL toroid (M1) after loosening the one
screw securing the mirror mount to the optical base. Remove the (3) ball
bearings from the optical base; they will not be used with the rotating
optic which is to be installed.
3. Remove the P.C. Board support shown in Fig. 3-1 after removing the
single screw securing it.
4. Refer to Figure 3-1 and remove the HCL/PMT/D2 (WU) power supply
board (P/N N041-9050), and the two-motor control board (N041-9024),
from the system control board. Remove the high voltage cable attached to
the WU board from the spectrometer transformer.
NOTE: You will replace the two-motor motor control board

N041-9020 with four-motor motor control board N041-9040
after you install the toroid motor (motors for the rotating toroid
and the turret are to be installed.). The WU board N041-9050
will be re-installed (along with its high-voltage cable); the W.U.
board is only removed to provide access at the underside of the
optical base when installing the rotating toroid's motor.
5. Secure the toroid's motor to the underside of the optical base by carefully
inserting and tightening only the right-side motor screw at this
time (see Figure 3-2).
NOTE: The second (left side) screw will be installed after the
turret is installed; the second screw will also be used to hold a
tie wrap for holding the high-voltage cable from the turret P.C.
board.
6. Install the rotating-optic looker assembly using the two # ?? Phillips

screws supplied, and using the two holes provided for the looker in the
optical base (see Figure 3-3).
7. Install the rotating optic (M1) assembly so that the looker flag on the
optic's mount passes through the looker without contacting it as shown in
Figure 3-3. It may be necessary to loosen the thumbscrew on the mount
which secures the optic to the shaft and adjust its (vertical) position on
the shaft so that the looker flag passes through the looker assembly
properly. Then tighten the thumbscrew to secure the optic to its shaft.
10. Plug the connector on the optic (M1) motor cable into connector J17 on
the system control board.
11. Secure the looker cable to the existing harness with the tie wraps
supplied, and insert the looker-cable connector into J23 on the system
control board.
12. Replace the two boards now??
Install the Turret Shaft and Looker-Wheel Bracket Assembly

1. Refer to Figures 1 and 3 and prepare the gear and shaft assembly for
installation by removing the shoulder screw from the shaft (shown in
Figure 1) and putting it aside for replacement later.
2. Remove the looker-flag wheel, loosen the brass-gear locking screw, and
the two small collars (clamps, bushings??-see Figure 3) on the sides of
the large bracket (casting??).
3. With a clamp, spring washer and flat washer positioned on the shaft as
shown in Figure 3, insert the shaft (which is attached to the looker and
gear bracket assembly) through the hole in the housing behind the turret
area.
4. With all three grooves on the turret shaft visible, secure the large shaft
assembly bracket to the housing loosely using the bottom right screw
(see Figure 3).
5. Place an "E" ring, a flatwasher and a springwasher onto the third groove
of the shaft and press it into the bushing in the instrument housing.
6. While pushing the front of the instrument housing to compress the

springwasher, push the previously installed collar (clamp), to compress
the springwasher against the "E" ring installed in step 5.
7. Tighten the screw (bottom, right) installed loosely in step 4, above.
8. Slightly compress each spring washer in the two small collars (clamps??)
and tighten them to the shaft.
9. Place an "E" ring and then the "floating wheel" on the shaft (see Figure
1). Then snap the "E" ring into the last shaft groove (see Figure 3).
10. Re-install the shoulder screw on the turret shaft.
11. Install the turret while pressing firmly on the shoulder. Secure it??
with?????
8. Loosen the screw which secures the brass shaft gear to the turret shaft.
Then use the motor-worm gear to rotate the brass gear to its
counterclockwise stop.
10. Install the looker wheel and tighten it onto the shaft in the position
shown in detail a of Figure 3-5.
10. Place two "E" rings on the shaft, and then place the floating wheel on the
shaft. Snap an "E" ring into each side of the hub of the floating wheel as
sshown in Figure 3-5.
11. Connect the turret motor to power by connecting it to J?? of the systems
board. The motor will initialize.
12. Make certain that the position 1 flag wheel is in the positionb looker as
shown in detail B of Figure 3-5.
13. Add another "E" ring onto the turret shaft and press it into the floating
wheel hub.
14. Install the shoulder screw on the turret shaft.
15. Connect the looker-flex/lamp high-voltage cable assembly to the turret

board and, making sure the shrink tubing of the cable assembly protects
the cable when it enterws the flloating wheel, pass it ............
Wrapping the Turret Harness

1. Initialize the turret, and verify that the turret has been aligned. See
Aligning the Turret.
2. Make certain that there are no lamps the turret. Then, if necessary, use
a small Phillips screwdriver to remove the six, 36??mm (4-cm??) screws
that secure the turret board assembly to the turret. (Support the
assembly when you remove the sixth screw.)
3. Decouple the brass gear from the turret shaft, but don't shift the gear's
position on the shaft.
4. Rotate the turret so that position 5 is in the beam, i.e., the "6" engraved
on the turret is at the top of the turret.
5. Take the shrink-wrapped turret harness assembly (P/N N041-YYYY) and

pass it through the hole (near the center of the turret) that is in the 3:00
o'clock position (see Figure T2).
NOTE: Make certain that the flat cable (inside the wrapped
assembly) is at the bottom of the assembly when you pass it
through the turret.
6. Rotate the turret assembly clokwise (looking from the front of the
spectrometer) until you reach the end of the cable (approximately three
full turret revolutions).
7. Then rotate the turret counterclockwise until lamp position 1 is in the

beam.
NOTE: To make certain that there is a smooth turret rotation

between positions 1 and 6 (the extremes), rotate the turret
clockwise to position 6 and then counterclockwise back to
position 1 several times.
8. Recouple the brass gear to the turret shaft after making certain that the
turret is in position 1. The position flag must be in position 1 as shown
in Figure ??.
9. Perform the alignment procedure as described on pages xx through yy.
10. Secure the cables (in the shrink-wrap cable assy) tothe turret board
assembly and to the system control board etc, etc, etc.
Install the 6-Position Turret

1. Place a flat washer, supplied, on the turret shaft and install the turret to
the optical base using the holes provided in the optical base partitions
(see Figure ??).
2. Then place a flat washer and a spring washer on the end of the shaft.
3. Connect the turret lamp (high-voltage) cable and the turret flex cable to
Jacks J19 and J8, respectively, on the system control board (see
schematic N041-9000 at the back of Chapter 7 "Servicing the Electrical
System").
Install the Turret Motor, Gear, and Looker Assembly

1. Lift the turret-motor, gear, and looker assembly and position it onto the
end of the turret shaft. The "D" receptacle on the motor and looker
assembly accepts the "D" (1/2) shaft at the end of the turret shaft in only
one way.
2. Secure the turret-motor and looker assembly to the optical base using the
three posidrive screws supplied.
3. Tighten the ???? screws on the "D" receptacle on the motor and looker
assembly so that the turret shaft is secured to the turret motor and looker
assembly.
4. Connect the motor cable connector to connector J16 of the system control
board.
5. Connect the cable originating at the home looker (one-flag looker??) to

connector J25 of the system control board. Connect the cable originating
at the position looker (six-flag looker??) to connector J24 on the system
control PC board.
Align the Turret Assembly
Turret-Drive Alignment
1. Turn the spectrometer off and remove the PMT. Install the backlight
fixture as explained in Chapter 5 "Servicing the Optical System". Then
turn the spectrometer back on and scan to 546.1 nm. (The turret
assembly is initialized at position 1.)
2. Insert the lamp-target fixture (P/N N040-T003) in turret position 1 as

shown in Figure Z??.
Rotating Optic M1 Alignment (Firmware Procedure)
3. Re-initialize the turret drive motor??.
4. Rotate mirror M1 so that its unpolished side is facing the optic-motor

looker.
5. Verify that the optic-motor looker is as far to the rear of the spectrometer
as possible, i.e., that it can't be pushed further back on its mount.
7. Re-initialize the rotating optic (mirror M1) motor.
8. Select menu 67, i.e. optic motor calibrate, when using the keypad, or
select [calibrate optic] when using IEEE diagnostics.
NOTE: Whenever you see brackets along with a keypad entry

(3210 only), the IEEE diagnostics entry (3230 only)
corresponding to the keypad entry will be inside the brackets.
9. Press Y on the (menu 67) keypad to set up the calibration

[optic cal setup].
10. Place a white card in front of the chopper.
11. Note the current "counts" reading in Menu 67 (or using IEEE diagnostics)
while noting the approximate coincidence of the beam and its reflection
(from mirror M1) on the card.
12. Increase or decrease the number of "counts" (by approximately 30??),

using menu 67, (or IEEE diagnostics) and note the coincidence of the
image and its reflection. (Increasing the number of counts moves the
reflected image towards the front of the instrument, while decreasing the
number of counts moves the image back.) Continue this procedure until
the coincidence of the image and its reflection can only be improved
minimally.
13. When coincidence is achieved (see Figure ??), press Y [calibrate optic].
The offset needed to correctly position M1, i.e. to set it 45 °to the beam, is
then calibrated.
14. Verify that the image/reflection coincidence in front of the chopper is still
correct. (It does not have to be precise - it need only be close.)
15. Return to the optic-motor offset menu [optic motor offset] and note the
number of counts.
16. Then reinitialize optic motor M1 to complete the firmware alignment

procedure of the rotating optic.
Final Turret-Assembly Alignment
NOTE: The firmware routine described above (steps 3 through

16 must be performed completely in order for this alignment to
be completed correctly.
17. Check the position of the image on the lamp-target fixture. If it is above
or below the horizontal line of the fixture, use menu 65 [or calibrate
turret] and increase or decrease the number of counts [Offset Counts]
until the image is centered vertically (is not above or below the horizontal
line on the fixture). Reinitialize the turret motor [Init Turret] each
time you make a counts entry.
18. If the image is to the right or left of the vertical line, use menu 67 [or
calibrate optic] and edit the offset counts. Enter less counts [Offset
Counts] to move the image towards the left on the lamp-target fixture.
Increase or decrease the number of counts [Offset Counts] until the image
is centered horizontally (not to the right or left of the vertical line on the
fixture.) Reinitialize the optic motor [Init Optic] each time you
make a counts entry.
19. Send the turret to each position and check the image horizontal and
vertical positions with the lamp-target fixture. If there is proper
alignment at all positions, the turret alignment is complete (proceed to
step 20?).
CAUTION: Make certain that the high-voltage lamp cable and

the turret flex cable are not turning with the turret shaft. See
Figure ??.
20. Write the counts values?? at which both vertical and horizontal alignment
was achieved on the sticker, supplied (see Figure I??). Apply the sticker
over the sticker currently in place.
AAnalyst Installation Turret-Installation Outline 3-41
21. Remove the lamp-target fixture and backlight fixture, and replace the
PMT.
If the System Control pc board (N041-9000) is exchanged, transfer the

BRAM from the board being replaced, or key in the offsets for (list motors??).
Turret-Installation Outline
Rotating Toroid and Toroid Motor
1. Remove the single-lamp mount after removing the four (4) screws and two
harnesses which secure it.
2. When removing the HCL/PMT/D2 (WU) board, remove the high-voltage

cable form the board. (The high-voltage cable connects the transformer
with the WU board.) Replace the boards after you install the turret
shaft (and after you replace the turret??)
3. Secure the M1 motor to the underside of the optical base by first using
one Philips-Head screw (P/N XXXX-YYYY). Refer to Figure X-Y.
?. Tie-wrap the turret high-voltage cable using the second (Philips-Head)

motor -mount screw. (Move to when inserting the turret High
Voltage cable through the floating wheel.)
Turret Motor, Gear, and Looker Assy

The turret shaft is now shipped asssembled to the gear/bracket assy. and
looker-and-flag assembly.
[The gear/bracket assembly includes the motor worm gear and

the brass shaft gear.]
NOTE: The HOME looker cable connects to J24 of the System

Control board. The FLAG looker cable connects to J25 on the
System Control board.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the shoulder (notch) screw and any other loose hardware that
may be shipped on the turret shaft from the shaft. Leave the large "C"
clamp on the shaft.
3-42 AAnalyst Installation Turret-Installation Outline
2. Place a spring washer and a flat washer over end of the shaft, and slide
the shaft into the instrument housing from the back of the instrument.
3. Place an "E" clamp, and a flat washer, on the end of the shaft, and then
press the "E" clamp into the cutout in the housing where the shaft
emerges from the housing.
4. Loosen the screw securing the looker flag wheel at the end of the shaft
extension (behind the shaft gear and bracket).
5. Manually rotate the motor worm gear until the screws on the brass shaft
gear, the motor worm gear, and the looker flag clamp are visible.
6.
4. Install the "floating wheel" over the shaft; then place a flat washer over
the shaft and bring it down to the wheel hub.
6. Install an "E" clamp on the first notch in front of the floating wheel (and
flat washer), and snap the "E" clamp in place.
6a. Replace the shoulder (notch) screw
7. Install TURRET (and then other E clamps).
4. Press the "E" clamp into the ??

Furnace Installation and
Alignment 3A
Installing and Aligning the Furnace
Use the procedure below to install the HGA-800 Graphite Furnace in a
flame AAnalyst 100 or 300. The furnace could have been purchased as an
accessory by a customer with a flame AAnalyst, or could have been shipped
along with a flame instrument as an option.
Once the furnace has been installed, the furnace arm can be slid easily
into and out of the sample compartment. It can then be used alternately with
the burner assembly for alternate furnace and flame operation.
Furnace alignment is included in this section. The furnace must be

aligned when it is first installed. It should also be aligned if results are
inconsistent.
Removing the Transport Locking Plate

Remove the transport locking plate, which has been installed to prevent
Furnace damage during shipment.
1. Refer to Figure 3A-1 and note the location of the transport locking plate.
2. Rotate the Furnace vertical adjustment knob clockwise to free the plate.
3. Slide the plate towards you (and away from the vertical adjustment
knob), and remove it from the Furnace.
4. Save the locking plate !

3A-2 Furnace Installation and Alignment Installing and Aligning the Furnace
Caution Before transporting the furnace to another location, reinstall the

locking plate.
Figure 3A-1. Location of Transport Locking Plate and Furnace-arm Fixing

Screw.
Furnace Installation and Alignment Installing and Aligning the Furnace 3A-3
Remove the Furnace-Arm Fixing Screw

Remove the Furnace-arm fixing screw and standoff, which prevent the
furnace arm from moving during shipment, as follows:
1. Refer to Figure 3A-1 and note the location of the arm-fixing screw (P/N
B008-0953) and standoff.
2. Using a 5-mm Allen wrench, remove the Allen (arm-fixing) screw which
secures the Furnace arm to the standoff.
3. Back the Furnace arm out of the arm-storage area so that you can remove
the standoff from the Furnace casting.
4. Unscrew the standoff (P/N B042-9338) from the Furnace casting.
5. Save the arm-fixing screw and the standoff !
Caution Before transporting the furnace to another location, reinstall

the arm-fixing screw and standoff .
Setting the Furnace IEEE Address

Set the IEEE Furnace address to "2" as follows:
1. If the Furnace cover is in place, remove the 8 screws securing the Furnace
cover and remove the cover.
2. Refer to Figure 3A-2 and note the position of the address switches on the
Furnace PC board; the last (backmost) switch is not an address switch.
3. Make certain that only the second address switch is in the ON position
(i.e., the address is 2).
4. Then check the position of jumper SP3 on the Furnace PC board (see
Figure 3A-2). The jumper must be in positions 2 and 3 (as shown in the
Figure) when using an AS-72B autosampler. When NOT using an AS-
72B Autosampler, the jumper must be in positions 1 and 2.
Figure 3A-2. Furnace P.C. Board.

Tapping the Furnace Transformer

When you receive the Furnace, its transformer will be tapped for 220 Vac.
If the voltage in your region is not 220 Vac, you must tap the Furnace
transformer to agree with your region's line voltage. To tap the Furnace
transformer, proceed as follows:
1. If the Furnace cover is in place, remove the 8 screws securing the Furnace
cover and remove the cover.
NOTE: When you replace the Furnace cover after completing

the Furnace temperature alignment in this Chapter, do not
attempt to replace the (inner-most) cover screw, which will not
be accessible because of the proximity of the AAnalyst.
High Voltages exist beneath the Furnace cover, especially in the

transformer vicinity. Make sure the line cord is disconnected from
line power before you remove the Furnace cover.
Warning
2. Refer to Figure 3A-3 and note the transformer taps.
Figure 3A-3. Tapping the Transformer.

For 220 Vac Line Voltage
The transformer has been tapped for 220 Vac at the factory.
a. For a line voltage of 209 Vac, remove the lead from the 220 Vac
tap (the fourth connector counting towards the inside of the
Furnace as shown in Figure 3A-3)
b. Then connect the lead to the 209 Vac tap ( the fifth connector as
shown in Figure 3A-3).
NOTE: You may find it difficult to remove the Fast-on

connectors from the transformer taps. It may help to move the
connector from side-to-side before removing the connector from
the tap.
a. For a line voltage of 240 Vac, remove the lead from the 220 Vac
connector (the fourth connector counting towards the inside of the
Furnace as shown in Figure 3A-3).
b. Then connect the lead to the 240 Vac tap (the third connector as
shown in Figure 3A-3).
NOTE: You may find it difficult to remove the Fast-on

connectors from the transformer taps. It may help to move the
connector from side-to-side before removing the connector from
the tap.
3. Do not replace the Furnace cover at this time. The Furnace temperature
alignment procedure included in this Chapter requires that the cover be
off. Also, never replace the Furnace-cover screw which is
inaccessible when the furnace is connected to the AAnalyst.
Coupling the HGA-800 and the AAnalyst

Most of the parts required to "tie together" the Furnace and the AAnalyst
are included in the Accessory Kit B313-0034, which is shipped with the
Furnace (see Table 3A-1). After unpacking the Furnace, using the
instructions supplied with the Furnace, proceed to connect the Furnace to the
AAnalyst as described in the instructions below.
The following tools are required:

• 5-mm Allen wrench
• Torx wrench for removing the Furnace cover
• True RMS Voltmeter (for Furnace temperature alignment procedure)
Table 3A-1- HGA-800 Fixed Accessory Kit B313-0034
ITEM FIGURE REFERENCE QUANTITY P-E PART NUMBER
Furnace/AAnalyst
Connector Plate 4 1 B313-0057
Retaining Screw
4 1 B313-0064
Left Mounting Bracket

5 1 B313-0039
Left Nut Plate

5 1 B313-0085
Right Mounting Bracket

5 1 B313-0040
Screw/Washer (connector
plate&brackets) 4&5 7 B016-0561
Gas Tubing Tee

6 1 0992-0179
1/4-in Flexible Gas

Tubing 6 10 m (30") B050-8264
Read Cable
7&8 1 B310-0220
IEEE Cable
7&8 1 B051-0293
Replacement Fuse Kit

− 1 B310-0203
Replacement Filter for

Fan (Blower) − 1 B050-2706
Tube-adjust Tool
− 1 B008-0112
Contact Tool
− 1 B009-8258
Hose Kit (for water

connections) − 1 B311-0036
Cleaning Swabs (10)

− 1 B050-5368
2-pole Terminal Block

− 1 B016-6859
Graphite Contacts Set

− 1 B012-8258
HGA Std. Conds. Sheet

− 1 B019-1755
5 Coated Tubes with

Integrated Platform − 1 B300-1260
Figure 3A-4. Connecting the Furnace to the AAnalyst.

Proceed as follows to connect the Furnace:
1. Remove the burner door and the burner mount from the AAnalyst sample
compartment as described in Chapter 3. (The door should be removed
when it is about ½ way open, not fully open.)
2. Make certain the AAnalyst and Furnace are disconnected from line
power.
3. Move the left (sample compartment) side of the AAnalyst until it hangs
about 5 inches over the edge of the bench.
Make certain that the AAnalyst is stable.
Warning
4. Refer to Figure 3A-4 and note the positions of the three threaded bosses
that will be used to attach connector plate B313-0057 beneath the
AAnalyst.
5. Remove the two screws holding them, and then remove the two exposed
rubber feet on the bottom of the spectrometer. Discard the large washers
which are beneath the feet; the thickness of the connector plate will
compensate for the washers' thickness. The small washers must be
replaced.
6. Holding the plate against the bottom of the spectrometer, and referring to
Figure 3A-4, secure the mounting plate to the bottom of the AAnalyst
with three of the screws/washers (B016-0561), supplied.
7. Secure the two rubber feet with the screws removed in Step 5, and the
small washers, NOT the large washers; the screws removed in step 5 now
pass through cutouts in the connector plate.
8. Move the AAnalyst to the position on the bench where it is going to be

used once the Furnace has been secured, and align the front of the
AAnalyst with the front of the bench. (The sample-tray drain hole will
then be properly located in front of (i.e., off) the bench as required.) If it
has not been done already, remove the eight screws securing the
Furnace cover and remove the cover.
NOTE: You must get someone to help you with the next step.
9. Carefully slide the furnace assembly alongside the spectrometer and,

referring to Figure 3A-4, align the locating tabs of the plate which was
installed beneath the AAnalyst in step 6, above, with the slots in the
casting extending from the right side of the furnace.
10. Using a 7-mm spanner or nut driver, carefully install the retaining screw
(P/N B313-0064) through the aligned holes in the furnace casting, and the
hole in the lip of the connector plate installed beneath the AAnalyst.
NOTE: It may be necessary to raise the Furnace or the

AAnalyst slightly, using a long screwdriver, to get good
alignment between the hole in the Furnace casting and the
hole in the lip of the connector plate.
The furnace assembly and the spectrometer are now "joined

together."
Do NOT move the AAnalyst/Furnace when they are joined together.

Caution
Mechanical damage could occur.
Installing the Furnace Arm in the Sample Compartment

Once the HGA-800 Furnace has been installed alongside the AAnalyst,
the furnace arm will slide easily into and out of the AAnalyst sampling area.
In order to secure the arm, two brackets must be installed on the guide struts
of the quick-change mount in the sampling area. To prepare the AAnalyst
sampling area for the Furnace arm, proceed as follows:
1. If necessary, remove the burner assembly from the sample compartment

as described earlier in this Chapter.
2. Refer to Figure 3A-5 and, using two of the screws/washers B016-0561

supplied in the Furnace Accessory Kit, loosely secure the right arm-
mounting brackets to the guide strut of the quick-change mount in the
sampling area. Using two of the M4 x 12 screws secure the right arm
mount bracket and the nut plate to the guide strut of the quick change
mount in the sampling area. The left arm-mounting bracket is the
shorter of the two brackets.
NOTE: The screws must not be tightened at this time to let

some "play" (movement) of the brackets occur when securing
the Furnace arm in the sampling area in step 5, below.
3. Pull the furnace arm forward to its stop, and then rotate it in order to
position it in front of the spectrometer sampling area.
Figure 3A-5. Preparing the AAnalyst's Sample Area for the Furnace Arm.
4. Gently push the arm into the sampling area until it hits a stop.
5. Screw the thumb screws on the left- and right-side of the furnace arm into
the threaded holes in the brackets (installed loosely in step 2, above) on
the guide struts of the quick-change mount. Adjust the positions of the
brackets as necessary (as they have been installed only loosely), to get the
Furnace-arm thumb screws to properly and completely screw into the
threaded holes in the brackets.
6. When you are certain the Furnace arm is positioned properly, and is
secured properly by the arm-mounting brackets, firmly tighten the
bracket-securing screws.
Proceed to install the furnace gases and the cooling water, and to
make the electrical connections.
Gas Connections
The gas-connection unions are located on the lower half of the front of the
furnace assembly (see Figure 3A-6). To access the unions, remove the panel
at the lower front of the furnace assembly by simply pulling it from the
assembly.
To connect a tube to a union, simply push it into the union fitting. To

remove a tube from a union, press up on the ring around the top of the fitting
and pull the tube from the union.
The furnace can be operated only when a gas inlet pressure of 300 to 450
Kpa (43 - 65 psig) is applied to both unions. If an alternate (special) gas is
not required, use the tubing tee after cutting two four-inch pieces of tubing
from the 10 meter (30-foot) length of tubing supplied. If an alternate gas is
required, connect the standard inert gas (argon) to the NORMAL GAS
(ARGON) union, and connect the alternate gas to the SPECIAL GAS union.
To make the tubing connections at the regulator, use a ¼ -in Swagelok

adapter, ¼ -in front and rear ferrules, and a ¼ -in nut.
Figure 3A-6. Front of Furnace, shown with Cooling System.

Connecting the Water Supply

We strongly recommend that you use Recirculator Cooling System [P/N
B019-8072 (220 V, 50/60 Hz)] as the source of cooling water for the AAnalyst.
The water inlet and outlet unions are located on the lower half of the
front of the furnace assembly, to the left of the gas-connection unions (see
Figure 3A-6). To access the water-inlet unions, simply pull the panel at the
lower front of the furnace assembly from the furnace assembly.
In the event that the Recirculator Cooling System is not used, the cooling
water should meet the following specifications:
• sediment free
• ≥ 20 °C
• flow rate ≥ 2 L/min
• pressure ≥ 2.5 bar, ≤ 4.5 bar
• pH ≥ 6.5, ≤ 7.5
• water hardness-medium soft, ≤ 14 odH (100 ppm)
The water unions are made to accept quick-disconnect fittings. To secure

a hose fitting to the unions, simply press the hose with the quick-disconnect
fitting into the union. To remove the hose, simply pull down on the brass
ring around the hose fitting and pull the hose from the union. Both fittings
are self-securing and should not leak.
After accessing the water inlet and outlet unions, proceed as follows to
make the water-supply connections:
When Using a Furnace (Recirculatory) Cooling System
1. Connect the hoses secured to the recirculator to the WATER IN and

WATER OUT unions on the furnace assembly.
2. Connect the hose which is labeled WATER IN to the furnace union

labeled WATER IN, and connect the hose which is labeled WATER OUT
to the furnace union labeled WATER OUT.
(See the instructions supplied with the recirculator.)

When Using Any Other Suitable Supply (When ordering the HGA-800 without a
Recirculatory Cooling System)
1. Connect the hose supplied with the Hose Kit (P/N B311-0036) to the
furnace union labeled WATER IN.
2. Connect the other end of the hose to a suitable water supply (see the
water specifications on the previous page).
3. Connect the other hose, supplied, to the furnace union labeled WATER
OUT. Place the other end of the hose in a suitable drain.
NOTE: See the furnace instruction manual for the definition

of a suitable drain.
Making the Electrical Connections

Make the electrical connections between the furnace, the AAnalyst, and
the computer (if applicable) as follows; refer to Figure 3A-7 and 8.
1. Connect the Read cable (P/N B310-0220) between the INSTRUMENT

connector on the rear panel of the HGA 800 and the REMOTE connector
on the back of the AAnalyst. Wire the black lead on the AAnalyst end of
the Read cable to pin 1 of the REMOTE connector; wire the red lead to
pin 2 of the connector.
2. If a recirculator cooling system is being used, connect the recirculator

cable to the COOLING SYSTEM connector at the back of the HGA-800.
3. Connect IEEE cable P/N B051-0293 between the IEEE connector at the
back of the HGA 800, and the IEEE connector at the back of the
AAnalyst.
4. If a PC controller is being used, connect cable 0999-1355 "piggybacked" on

the IEEE connector at the rear of the AAnalyst, and to the IEEE
connector at the rear of the computer (see Figure 3A-7).
5. If a PC is being used, connect the printer cable from the computer to the
printer. If a PC is not being used, connect the printer cable between the
printer and the PRINTER connector at the rear of the AAnalyst.
Figure 3A-7. Furnace Electrical Connections (AAnalyst 300).
Figure 3A-8. Furnace Electrical Connections (AAnalyst 100).

Installing the AS-72B Autosampler

1. Refer to Figure 3A-9 and place the AS-72B over the part of the furnace
arm that extends out from the sample compartment.
2. Insert the studs beneath the AS-72 mount into the "U" brackets in the
furnace arm and near the front of the sample compartment. Then tighten
down the thumb screws in the "U" brackets to secure the AS-72 to the
furnace arm.
3. Attach and lock the cable beneath the furnace arm to the connector
beneath the AS-72B.
4. Check the position of jumper SP3 on the Furnace PC board (see Figure
3A-2). The jumper must be in positions 2 and 3 (as shown in the Figure)
when using an AS-72B autosampler. When NOT using an AS-72B
Autosampler, the jumper must be in positions 1 and 2.
Figure 3A-9. AS 72B Autosampler Installed with HGA-800.

Turning On and Configuring the HGA-800

Turn on the furnace and the AAnalyst power switches. If you are using
the WinLab software, configure the Furnace, and autosampler if so
equipped, into the system during WinLab startup. If you are installing a
Furnace after the WinLab startup, use the reconfigure icon to "tell" the
system the Furnace (and autosampler if so equipped) is installed.
NOTE: If you have not already done so, reset the IEEE
Furnace Address to "2" (see Figure 3A-2).
If you have a keypad, configure the AAnalyst for PC control or non-PC

control as follows:
1. With both the AAnalyst and the HGA-800 Power switches on, press the
Energy key.
2. Type 488.
3. Press the Parameter key.
4. From the screen that appears, you will be able to select 1 (for PC control)
or 0 (for non-PC control). Type either 1 or 0 and press Enter.
Furnace Temperature Alignment
With PC (Computer) Control
1. Install a Cu lamp.
2. Open WinLabs.
3. Choose the Furnace Technique and click on Menus and Toolbars.
4. Then click on File ⇒ New Method.
5. Enter Cu as the element to be determined, then click on "ok."
6. Give the method a name, e.g., furn.
7. Click on File ⇒ Save ⇒ Method ⇒ Name (furn); then click on "ok."
8. Click on Align Lamps, and set up the standard conditions for Cu.
9. Close Align Lamps.
10. Then click on Tools ⇒ Cont Graphics ⇒ AZ.

11. Close Continuous Graphics.
12. Click on Furnace, Open/Close, and then install a graphite tube.
13. Click on Open/Close again to close the Furnace.
14. Connect a true RMS voltmeter across the Furnace-head halves.
15. Type 1200 for the Cleanout temperature entry of the Furnace Control
window.
16. Click on the Start button and wait at least 30 seconds.
17. Then refer to Figure 3A-2 and use potentiometer R52 to adjust the
voltage across the Furnace to 2.900 VRMS .
18. Then click on Start to terminate the test and close Furnace control.
19. Adjust the reference for the phase control by: grounding a scope at the
ground point of inductor L10 (see Figure 3A-2), placing the scope probe on
pin 10 of IC 66 (AC couple/line sync), and adjusting R101 for a saw tooth
of 9.5 V(p-p) ± .1V.
20. Disable electronic tapping by: connecting one end of a voltmeter to the
ground point of inductor L10 (see Figure 3A-2), connecting the other lead
of the voltmeter to pin 7 of IC 97, and adjusting R238 for 0.5 V ± .5 V, i.e.,
from 0- to 1 VDC.
21. (Invert-Offset) Place a DVM between Pin 6 of IC 60 and GND. Adjust

R69 for minimum reading. (R69 may then be fully clockwise.)
22. (TC Offset) Place the voltmeter at the junction of R137 and C157. Then
adjust R128 for 0-V ± 1 mV.
23. Autozero and check the position of the beam as it enters the Furnace with
a card, such as a business card.
24. Click on Tools ⇒ Cont Graphics.
25. Remove the Furnace from the optical path and Autozero.
26. Replace the Furnace in the optical path.
27. Refer to the Furnace instruction manual, unlock the Furnace-head

position lever, and use all three positioning knobs to center the beam in
the Furnace.
28. Align the Furnace by performing the following procedure for each of the
three adjustments while monitoring the displayed absorbance:
a. Set the adjustment for minimum absorbance.
b. Find the range of the "dead band" for the adjustment, i.e., where
the absorbance doesn't change.
c. Set the adjustment at the center of the "dead band."
29. If the absorbance is less than 0.085 A, the Furnace alignment is

complete.
30. If the absorbance is not less than 0.085 A:
a. Refer to Figure 3A-10 and note the position of the Furnace-head

lock and the four furnace-head securing screws.
b. Open the lock and loosen the four screws; when the screws are
loose, you can rotate (slightly) the Furnace head.
c. Rotate the Furnace head a few degrees, lightly tighten the four
screws, and check the absorbance.
Figure 3A-10. Furnace head lock and securing screws.
31. Repeat steps 27 to 29 until you obtain less than 0.085 Absorbance.
32. Tighten the four Furnace-head securing screws, and re-lock the
Furnace head.
33. Replace the Furnace cover. At least one of the eight screws which were
removed cannot be replaced.
Now that an acceptable absorbance has been achieved (i.e., the Furnace
temperature alignment is correct), go back to the Align Lamps window, enter
0 current, and click on Set Midscale, to turn off the lamp.
Without PC Control (Using the Keypad)
1. Apply power to both the AAnalyst and the Furnace.
2. Press the Energy key and type 488.
3. Press the Parameter key.
4. From the screen that appears, type 0 for Non-PC Control and press
Enter.
5. After the AAnalyst initializes and Recall Method Y/N appears, press
Enter to accept the default (N). Then press Option ⇒ Furnace.
6. Press Option ⇒ Valve and install the graphite tube.
7. Press Option ⇒ Valve again.
8. Connect a true RMS voltmeter across both Furnace-head halves.
9. Press Option ⇒ Temp.
10. Key in 1200 °(as the Furnace temperature) and press Enter.
11. Then refer to Figure 3A-3 and, after the Furnace temperature stabilizes,
use potentiometer R52 to adjust the voltage across the Furnace to 2.900
VRMS .
12. Press CE to terminate the test.
13. Adjust the reference for the phase control by: grounding a scope at the
ground point of inductor L10 (see Figure 3A-2), placing the scope probe on
pin 10 of IC 66 (AC couple/line sync), and adjusting R101 for a saw tooth
of 9.5 V(p-p) ± .1V.
14. Disable electronic tapping by: connecting one end of a voltmeter to the
ground point of inductor L10 (see Figure 3A-2), connecting the other lead
of the voltmeter to pin 7 of IC 97, and adjusting R238 for 0.5 V ± .5 V, i.e.,
from 0- to 1 VDC.
15. (Invert-Offset) Place a DVM between Pin 6 of IC 60 and GND. Adjust

R69 for minimum reading. (R69 may then be fully clockwise.)
16. (TC Offset) Place the voltmeter at the junction of R137 and C157. Then
adjust R128 for 0-V ± 1 mV.
17. When Recall Method Y/N appears, press Enter to accept the default (N).
18. Setup the Aanalyst for Cu standard conditions.
19. Press Continuous, autozero, and check the position of the beam as it
enters the Furnace with a card such as a business card.
20. Remove the Furnace from the optical path and Autozero.
21. Replace the Furnace in the optical path.
22. Refer to the Furnace instruction manual, unlock the Furnace-head

position lever, and use all three positioning knobs to center the beam in
the Furnace.
23. Align the Furnace by performing the following procedure for each of the
three adjustments while monitoring the displayed absorbance:
a. Set the adjustment for minimum absorbance.
b. Find the range of the "dead band" for the adjustment, i.e., where
the absorbance doesn't change.
c. Set the adjustment at the center of the "dead band".
24. If the absorbance is less than 0.085 A, the Furnace alignment is complete.
If the absorbance is not less than 0.085 A, do the following:
a. Refer to Figure 3A-10 and note the position of the Furnace-head

lock and four furnace-head securing screws.
b. Open the lock and loosen the four screws; when the screws are
loose, you can rotate (slightly) the Furnace head.
c. Rotate the Furnace head a few degrees, lightly tighten the four
screws, and check the absorbance.
25. Repeat steps 22 through 24 until you obtain less than 0.085 A.
26. Tighten the four Furnace-head securing screws, and re-lock the Furnace
head.
27. Replace the Furnace cover. At least one of the eight screws which were
removed cannot be replaced.
Installing Flame
Accessories 3B
About This Chapter
This chapter includes checklists and performance tests for the MHS-10
Mercury/Hydride System and the FIAS 100/400 Flow Injection System. It
also includes a performance test for the AS-90/91 Autosampler when it is
used with the FIAS.
This chapter also includes AS-90/91 connections, and instructions for a

performance test when the Autosampler is used with a flame AAnalyst .
Finally, we refresh your memory on configuring printers other than the
Okidata, and on configuring for IEEE control.
Configuring a Printer and for IEEE
Printer (AAnalyst 100 only)
To configure the AAnalyst 100 for a printer other than the Okidata 320,
(e.g., to configure an Epson LQ 850):
1. Apply power to the printer and allow it to set up.
2. Then apply power to the AAnalyst and allow it to initialize.
3. Press Energy.
4. Type 320.
3B-2 Installing Flame Accessories AS-90/91 Flame Autosampler
5. Press Param Entry.
You can then configure a printer other than the Okidata by substituting 1
(for other) in place of the default value of 2 (for the Okidata 320), and by
pressing Enter.
NOTE: You can only use an Epson-compatible printer.
IEEE-488 (AAnalyst 100 only)
To configure an AAnalyst 100 for IEEE-488 control:
1. Press Energy,
2. Type 488.
You can then configure for IEEE by choosing 1 (yes) when the "488"
screen, i.e. the "PC Remote Control" screen, gives you the choice of 0 (no),
which is the default, and yes (PC Remote Control). Finally, press Enter.
NOTE: You must choose "no" if control of an accessory from

the keypad is required.
AS-90/91 Flame Autosampler

Refer to Figure 3B-1, which illustrates the electrical connections between
the AS-90/91 when it is used as a flame autosampler with the AAnalyst 100
or 300. Locate, in the Figure, the address DIP switches at the rear of the
Autosampler Controller.
The IEEE-488 address for the AS-90/91 Autosampler must be set to

binary 3. The address for the AS -90/91 in the software configuration file
(with AA WinLab rev. 2.2 or higher) is included in Table 3B-1 on page 3B-9.
Perform the AS-90/91 check, which is the third performance test

in the functional testing of the FIAS accessory. The performance test
instructions begin on page 3B-14.
However, since you are performing the test without the FIAS, you must:
• connect the AS 90/91 (with the tray) to the Autosampler connector at

the rear of the Autosampler Controller (see Figure 3B-1).
Installing Flame Accessories Mercury/Hydride Systems 3B-3
• select Flame from the Technique window, rather than selecting FI-
Flame, which you must select when using the autosampler with the
FIAS.
The remaining steps in that procedure apply to using the AS-90/91 with
either the Flame or FIAS technique.
Figure 3B-1. Electrical Connections between the AS-90/91 Autosampler

Controller and the AAnalyst 100 or 300.
Mercury/Hydride Systems
The MHS-10 mercury/hydride system includes a quartz cell, which is in
the light path of the spectrometer, and which rests in a cell holder that is
mounted onto the single-slot burner head.
The quartz cell is heated by the burner. The hydride gas, from the
hydride-forming element in the reaction vessel (reagent reservoir) is
dissociated into free atoms in the quartz cell.
NOTE: When mercury is being determined, the sample is

heated in the quartz cell by a heat lamp (not the flame) to
prevent condensation of water vapor.
3B-4 Installing Flame Accessories Mercury/Hydride Systems
The FIAS 100/400 can also be used as a fully automated mercury/hydride

system. See the discussion of the flow injection system included later in this
chapter.
MHS-10 Installation Checklist

Installation instructions are included in the manual supplied with the
MHS-10 mercury hydride system. Use the following checklist to make sure
that the installation is complete:
1. The quartz cell holder and the quartz cell have been installed on the
burner assembly. See the procedures which follow this checklist.
2. The analyzer assembly has been installed.
3. A supply of inert gas is connected to the analyzer assembly.
4. The transfer hose is connected from the back of the analyzer assembly to
the quartz cell.
5. Adequate venting has been provided.
The MHS-10 does not require any electrical connections to the

spectrometer.
Installing the Quartz Cell Holder

Install the quartz cell holder on the burner head as follows:
Figure 3B-2. Installing the Quartz Cell Holder.

Installing Flame Accessories Mercury/Hydride Systems 3B-5
1. Extinguish the flame, if necessary, and allow adequate time for the
burner head to cool.
2. Refer to Figure 3B-2, and, after making sure the two adjusting screws in
each clamp are loose, place the securing clamps of the cell holder over the
ends of the burner head.
3. Refer to Figure 3B-3, and align the "V" in the cell holder with the slot in
the burner head.
4. Tighten the four clamp-adjusting screws.
Figure 3B-3. Adjusting the Position of the Cell-holder Bracket.
Installing the Quartz Cell

After installing the cell holder, refer to Figures 3B-3 and 3B-4, and install
the quartz cell as follows:
1. Rotate the cell-holder bracket to the "up" position.
2. Place the quartz cell in the cell holder as shown in Figure 3B-4.
3B-6 Installing Flame Accessories Mercury/Hydride Systems
Never use the FIAS quartz cell for MHS-10 operation. The
FIAS quartz cell has a smaller bore than the MHS-10 cell.
Warning
When the FIAS cell is used for MHS operation, increased
backpressure could cause the reaction mixture to be forced
back into the sodium tetrahydroborate container.
3. Carefully lower the cell-holder bracket to the "down" position.
Be certain that the transfer hose (Fig 3B-4) cannot

become pinched or kinked in any way. A restriction in the
Warning
hose may lead to a pressure buildup in the system which can
cause an explosion.
Figure 3B-4. Quartz Cell Installed in the Cell Holde. (The FIAS cell has a
smaller bore than the MHS-10 cell - see the Warning above
the Figure.)
Installing Flame Accessories Flow Injection System 3B-7
Flow Injection System

Installation Checklist
Installation instructions for the FIAS-100/400 Flow Injection System are
detailed in the manuals supplied with the accessory. Use the following
checklist to make sure that the installation is complete:
1. A supply of inert gas is connected to the FIAS-100/400.
2. The appropriate tubing is installed for your analysis.
3. For mercury/hydride analysis, the heating mantle and the quartz cell are
installed.
4. Adequate venting has been provided.
NOTE: The heating mantle is not shipped with the FIAS-100.

(It can be ordered separately.) The heating mantle is typically
shipped with the FIAS-400.
Connections to the AAnalyst

Refer to Figure 3B-5 for the electrical connections between the accessory
and the AAnalyst.
• Make certain that the IEEE-488 cable (P/N B051-0293) is connected

to the back of the FIAS 100/400 and to the back of the AAnalyst as
shown in the figure.
• Make certain that the READ cable (P/N N812-0133) is connected to

the back of the FIAS-100/400 (see the FIAS instruction manual), and
to the REMOTES connector at the rear of the AAnalyst as shown in
the detail in Figure 3B-5. (Polarity is not a consideration.)
Connecting the AS-90/91 Autosampler

Refer to Figure 3B-5 and connect the cable from the AS-90/91
(P/N B018-6274) to the Autosampler connector at the rear of the
FIAS-100/400.
3B-8 Installing Flame Accessories Flow Injection System
Figure 3B-5. Electrical Connections between Electrically-heated FIAS Cell Holder and the
AAnalyst.
IEEE-488 Address
Refer to Figure 3B-5 and locate the address DIP switches at the rear of
the FIAS-100/400. The IEEE-488 address for the FIAS 100/400 and for the
AS-90/91 Autosampler must be set to binary 3. The address for the FIAS
100/400, and for the AS-90/91, in the software configuration file (with AA
WinLab Rev. 2.0 or higher), is included in Table 3B-1, below.
Table 3B-1. Address Settings for the FIAS-100/400 and the AS-90/91
System IEEE Dip Switch Dip Switch

Component Address 1 setting 2 setting Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8
FIAS 3 on on off off off off off on
AS-90/91 3 on on off off off off off on
Starting up the AAnalyst and Accessories

Once you have made all the connections listed earlier and have set the
IEEE-488 address of the FIAS and the autosampler, you will have to connect
the FIAS to line power and start the system. The system consists of the
AAnalyst, the FIAS, and the Autosampler.
Make the connections to line power and start up the system as follows:
1. Make certain that the power switches of the AAnalyst and the accessories
are turned off.
2. Refer to the FIAS instruction manual and connect the FIAS to an

electrical supply line which matches the voltage and frequency specified.
NOTE: For the FIAS 100/400 and the AS-90/91, the correct
(appropriate) line voltage must be selected at the rear panel of
the accessory. The correct fuse must also be in the line.
All power cords must be properly grounded to ensure safe

operation. Always connect the AAnalyst, the FIAS, and the
Autosampler to correctly installed electrical outlets that have a
Warning
protective conductor connection (earth/ground).
3. If the FIAS or the AS-90/91 is not installed by a PE Service Engineer,

check that the plug on the power cord is wired for the electrical outlet
being used. Again, be sure to refer to the accessory instruction manual.
4. Turn on the power switches of the AAnalyst, the FIAS, the Autosampler,
and, if necessary, the computer. Refer to the AAnalyst instruction
manual (the AA WinLab Software Guide if using a computer), and the
accessory manuals, to operate the System.
Performance Tests
Procedures are given below for basic functional testing of the FIAS
100/400 Accessory with both a keypad instrument (AAnalyst 100) and a
computer-controlled AAnalyst. A procedure for testing the AS-90/91
Autosampler is also included. Before beginning the tests, do the following:
NOTE: The FIAS is normally shipped pre-plumbed, and can

be tested for leaks the way it is shipped. You could test it the
way it is plumbed in Figure 3B-6 if the FIAS has been re-
plumbed.
1. Plumb the FIAS 100/400 as shown in Figure 3B-6.
2. If a printer is being used, turn it on before turning the AAnalyst on.
Then continue with the exercises given below for the AAnalyst 100 and
300, and for the AS-90/91 Autosampler.
Figure 3B-6. Plumbing the FIAS for Performance Testing.
Keypad Instrument (AAnalyst 100)
Run the following test (exercise) to make certain that the AAnalyst 100,
the FIAS 100/400, and the AS-91 Autosampler are operating properly:
1. Power-on the AAnalyst, the FIAS and the Autosampler, and allow the
Aanalyst time to complete its self test.
2. Press the Option and Flow Inj keys to enter the FIAS operating mode.
3. The last FIAS entry display will be FIAS PROGRAM 0 - 11. (Those are
the 12 fixed methods stored in the FIAS.)
NOTE: The FIAS users manual (P/N B050-9903) describes 10

methods. Method (binary) zero and 1 are test methods;
therefore they are not mentioned in the users manual.
4. To access any one of the methods, enter the method number, e.g. 4, and
press Enter.
5. To run the method, press the Data key and the Sampler Start/Stop
keys.
NOTE 1: To stop the method when it is in progress, press the

Read key.
NOTE 2: Press Option and Read to run the FIAS method

without the AS-91 Autosampler.
6. While the run is progressing, check for proper and leak-free operation of
the FIAS valve and the two FIAS pumps.
Computer-Controlled AAnalyst
Run the following test (exercise) to make sure that the FIAS 100/400,
and the AS-91 Autosampler are operating properly with a computer-
controlled AAnalyst. The second test makes certain that MHS-FIAS
technique is performing properly.
FI-Flame Technique
1. Start up WinLabs and select FI-Flame from the Technique menu.
2. Then click on the "File" main-menu item; "New" then appears.
3. Click on New ⇒ Method.
4. Select Cu from the Create New Method window as the element to be

determined. Then click on OK to select the recommended values.
5. Name the method and then close the window.
6. Click on the Lamps main menu item.
7. When the Align Lamps window appears, make one of the lamp elements
Cu (if necessary).
8. Close the Align Lamps window.

9. Click on the FIAS menu item.
10. Then click on the FIAS On/Off icon to start the run. While the run is
progressing, check for proper and leak-free operation of the FIAS valve
and the two FIAS pumps.
11. Finally, close the FIAS Control window.
FI-MHS Technique
1. Check for proper operation of the (flame-heated or electrically heated) cell

assembly, after installing it in the sample compartment per the
instructions in the FIAS instruction manual.
2. Start up WinLabs and select FI-MHS from the Technique menu.
3. Click on the File main-menu item; "New" appears.
4. Click on New ⇒ Method.
5. Select Bi using the Create New Method window as the element to be

determined; then click on OK to select the recommended values.
6. Name the method and then close the window.
7. Click on the Lamps main-menu item.
8. When the Align Lamps window appears, make the "Lamp 1" element Bi
(if necessary).
10. Click on the FIAS main menu item.
11. Click on the Cell On/Off icon and make certain that the "current default
temperature" (900 °C) is reached, as seen in the FIAS-Control window.
12. If 900 °C (or the current value) is attained and there are no problems,
click the Cell On/Off icon to turn the cell off.
13. Finally, close the FIAS control window.

3B-14 Installing Flame Accessories Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position
AS-90/91 Autosampler Check
Proceed as follows to check the Autosampler:
1. Turn the Autosampler power off, refer to Figure 3B-5, and if it is not
already connected, connect the AS-90/91 (with the tray) to the
Autosampler connector at the rear of the FIAS. Use cable P/N B018-
6274.
2. Start WinLab, configure the AAnalyst for the AS-90/91, and select
FI-Flame from the technique menu.
3. After clicking on FIAS (control) on the main menu, click on "Meth Ed".
4. Start a new method with Cu as the element to be determined.
5. Using the Automated Analysis window, click "print Log " to Off. Then
click on "Analyze."
6. Click on the "Reset" box above the Autosampler Control icons. The probe
should move to position 0.
7. Then use the Autosampler Control icons "Select Location" and "Move
Probe up or down" to see whether the autosampler operates smoothly and
whether the sampling probe enters the tray holes as close to their centers
as possible when it is instructed to do so.
8. Make any necessary fine adjustments to the sample probe that are
necessary (so that the probe enters the tray holes properly) by adjusting
the Hall sensor under the Autosampler cover (left to right adjustment) or
adjusting the flag on the sampling probe arm assembly (front to back
adjustment). A procedure for making those adjustments is included at
the end of this Chapter.
NOTE: There is no "up and down" adjustment, which would

change the depth the probe reaches in the tray holes.
9. If any fine adjustment(s) are made, click on the "Reset" box above
"Autosampler Control" before giving the probe new instructions.
NOTE: If additional information about the Autosampler

Control page is needed, refer to the AA WinLab Software Guide
(P/N 0993-6190), which is supplied with the AAnalyst 300.
Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position

Installing Flame Accessories Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position 3B-15
If the probe does not enter the tray holes properly, adjust the position of
the Hall sensor on the AS-90/91 PC board (for left to right adjustment) or
adjust the flag position on the sampling probe arm assembly (for front to
back adjustment). The adjustment procedures are given in the next two
paragraphs.
Left-to-Right Position Adjustment (see Figure 3B-7)

Proceed as follows to adjust the left-to-right position of the sampling
probe in the tray holes. Since the Hall sensor is attached to the autosampler
PC board, you will move the board to adjust the position of the sensor:
1. Disconnect the AS-90/91 cable from the FIAS.
2. Remove the tray from the Autosampler and then remove the Autosampler
cover. The cover is held by four screws.
Make certain the autosampler cable is disconnected from the FIAS

before touching the P.C. board bracket.
Warning
3. Loosen the two screws securing the PC board bracket to the base of the
Autosampler (see Figure 3B-7).
4. Move the P.C. board slightly (1 or 2 mm) to the right or left and
(temporarily) tighten the two screws securing the bracket.
NOTE: If the bracket is moved too far, you may have trouble
replacing the autosampler cover.
5. Temporarily replace the Autosampler cover and tray, and replace the
autosampler cable in the FIAS Autosampler connector. Then send the
probe to a tray hole position.
If the left to right positioning has improved, repeat steps 1 through 4. If
the positioning has gotten worse, repeat steps 1 through 4 but move the
P.C. board in the opposite direction.
6. When you are satisfied with the left to right positioning of the probe in
the tray holes, tighten the two screws securing the P.C. board bracket,
and tighten the autosampler cover screws.
3B-16 Installing Flame Accessories Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position
Figure 3B-7. Adjusting the AS-90/91 left-to-right Probe Location
Front-to-Back Positioning (see Figure 3B-8)

Proceed as follows to adjust the forward and back position of the sampling
probe in the tray holes. This adjustment is made by adjusting the position of
the looker flag on the sampling arm.
1. Loosen the screw securing the looker flag of the sampling probe assembly
to the sampling arm.
2. Move the looker flag a few millimeters forward or back on the sampling
arm (as required).
3. Temporarily tighten the looker-flag securing screw to the sampling arm,

and send the sampling probe to a tray hole position.
Installing Flame Accessories Adjusting the Sampling Probe Position 3B-17
4. Repeat the steps above until the forward and back position is correct.
Then permanently secure the looker-flag securing screw.
Figure 3B-8. Adjusting the AS-90/91 front-to-back Probe Location.

3B-18 Installing Flame Accessories Running Hydride Analyses
Running Hydride Analyses

If the customer is planning to run hydride analysis, plumb the FIAS for
hydride analysis after referring to the FIAS-100/400 operators manual. If
the user has a problem with the analytical results from an MHS-FIAS
analysis, refer him/her to a Product/Application Specialist. Table 3B-2,
below, includes problems which can occur when running hydride analysis,
and possible solutions.
Table 3B-2. Some Problems which occur when running Hydride Analysis, and
Recommendations (Possible Solutions)
Problem Recommendation
1. Low Sensitivity a. Prepare fresh NaBH4
b. Check for moisture in the hydride

transfer line
c. Adjust tension on the waste tubing

from the G/L separator.
d. Optimize flow rates of carrier and

reductant
e. Check for blockage of chemifold
f. Make certain that there are no leaks

in tubing connections.
g. Increase the quartz cell temperature.
h. Clean the gas/liquid separator with

1:1 HCl
i. Reactivate or condition the quartz cell
j. Replace any worn tubing
2. All replicates which follow the first a. Increase the fill-step time
reading yield low sensitivity
Installing Flame Accessories Running Hydride Analyses 3B-19
Problem Recommendation
3. The first replicate in a series is low a. Increase the time in the pre-fill step
b. Shorten the tubing lengths
4. There is baseline shift in the peak a. Check for leaks in the tubing
profile connections
5. There is a double peak in the peak a. Sample concentration is too high;

display dilute it
b. Increase the cell temperature
c. Check for tubing-connection leaks
6. The flow rate of the carrier and the a. Make certain the tubing is positioned
reductant are not the values expected properly in the magazine
b. Adjust the pump-tubing tension
c. Replace any worn tubing
7. The pump heads stop rotating a. Reduce the tension on the magazine
3B-20 Installing Flame Accessories
Performance Tests 4
Overview
NOTE: Before any tests can be performed, you must prepare
the internal surface of the burner drain tube by aspirating a
50/50 solution of water and methanol for approximately five
minutes.
This chapter contains two kinds of performance checks:

• the performance tests required upon installation of the AAnalyst
(the first group of tests in this chapter)
• tests to be performed at the discretion of the Service Engineer
(called additional tests - they begin on page 4-12)
Two versions of each grouping of tests is given:
• one for keypad instruments (most AAnalyst 100's)
• one for PC controlled instruments (all AAnalyst 300's)
The procedure for adjusting the arsenic to potassium wavelength span is
included after the "additional" tests.
Tests Which Should be Performed at Installation

This first set of tests includes the performance checks required upon
installation of the AAnalyst. The test procedures are first given for keypad-
controlled instruments, then for PC controlled instruments (using WinLab
software-see page 4-7).
4-2 Performance Tests Tests Which Should be Performed at Installation
Using the Keypad
Log Linearity Test
1. Install a Cu Lamp.
2. Turn on the instrument, and press Enter when the following screen
appears:
RECALL METHOD Y/N
N (default)
3. Enter the copper standard conditions.
a. If the lamp is coded, you only need choose the default conditions
for the lamp parameters.
b. If the lamp is not coded, make the following entries as the screens
appear (when you enter the value in the previous screen):
To avoid any exposure to ultraviolet radiation, always wear

safety glasses when using the instrument.
Warning
LAMP CURRENT (0 - 50 Ma)
15 Ma (default)
SLIT HEIGHT
0.7 (default)
SLIT FULL HEIGHT
Y (default)
WAVELENGTH
324.7 nm (default)
INT. TIME
0.1 (default value)

Performance Tests Tests Which Should be Performed at Installation 4-3
AA Mode
After performing steps 1-3 on the previous page, proceed as follows:
1. Press the ENERGY key and peak the lamp (when the AAnalyst has a
single lamp holder). The lamp will peak automatically when a turret is
installed.
2. Press CONTinuous and AZ.
You will see the following screen:
CONTINUOUS
ABS - VALUE
3. Block the beam. The value you read should be approximately 3.1 or
greater. If it isn't, perform the Lin/Log electrical alignment procedure
given in Chapter 5, Optical/Electrical Alignment, of this manual.
4. Insert the following (3) neutral density filters in the beam. You must
obtain the absorbances given in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 - Neutral density filters used in the Installation

Performance Tests.
Neutral Density Filter Absorbance Part Number

2A 2.0 ± .2A N037-1513
1A 1.0 ± .1A N037-1512
0.2 A 0.2 ± 0.02A N037-1510
AA-BG mode
After performing steps 1-3 on the previous page, proceed as follows:
1. Press AA-BG, and then press the AZ key.
2. Place the 1 A neutral density filter in the beam (see Table 4-1).
3. You will see the following:
AA - BG
ABS - VALUE
The value you read must be no greater than 0.010 ABS. If you obtain a
greater value, check the deuterium lamp and the deuterium lamp alignment.
Double Beam Test
With the Cu lamp installed, and the instrument still on, continue with the
double-beam test as follows:
1. Press AA.
3. Enter the default values for each of the parameters that appear until you
get to:
INT(egration) TIME
Enter .3
4. Then when you get to:
REPLICATES:
Enter 5
5. Press EXPAND, then type 10 and press Enter.
6. Press CONTinuous, then press AZ.
7. Press DATA and then READ.
8. Note the (mean) value, e.g., 0.001.
9. Press the Param Entry key, and reduce the lamp current from 15 to 10
mA.
10. Then press the DATA and READ keys again. The (mean) value you
obtain must be within ±0.040 of the value obtained in step 8, above.
If the two values are not within ±0.040, re-peak the copper lamp and try
again. If it is still not within spec, check the chopper alignment given in
Chapter 5.
11. Return the lamp current to 15 mA.
Sensitivity and Precision Checks
1. Set up the standard conditions and align the burner as described in the
AAnalyst hardware manual.
2. Lower the burner head to make certain it is below the beam. (See the
burner adjustment control descriptions and Figure 3-19 in Chapter 3.)
3. Press the CONTinuous and the AZ keys.
4. Raise the burner (using the vertical adjustment knob) until you obtain
"some" counts on the display (i.e., until you "break" zero).
5. Lower the burner until you obtain Zero counts again, and then lower it an
additional small amount by turning the vertical adjustment knob
approximately ¼ turn clockwise.
6. Set up the gas flows for ignition by pressing the Gases On/Off switch,
and then adjusting the fuel flow valve for an indication of 2 on the fuel
flowmeter. Then adjust the oxidant flow valve for an indication of 4 on
the oxidant flowmeter.
NOTE: There is a 9-second window after pressing the Gases

On/Off switch within which you can use the fuel and oxidant
needle valves to adjust the flows.
7. After allowing sufficient time for the acetylene to dissipate, press the
Flame/On-Off button to light the flame.
Sensitivity Check
1. Aspirate distilled water and press the AZ key.
2. Aspirate a 5 ppm Cu solution.
3. Slowly turn the nebulizer adjustment nut counterclockwise until you see
bubbles in the Cu solution.
4. Then turn the nebulizer adjustment nut clockwise until the absorbance
goes to a maximum and begins to decrease.
5. Finally, slowly turn the adjustment nut clockwise and counterclockwise

until you find maximum absorbance.
6. Refer to Chapter 3, Installation, and use the forward and back

(horizontal) burner adjustment (see Figure 3-19) to maximize absorbance.
7. Use the rotational burner adjustment to maximize absorbance.
8. The minimum acceptable absorbance is ≥ 0.300.

Precision Test
NOTE: It has been found that aspirating hot coffee or Triton-

X will "wet" the sample-introduction components and increase
precision.
1. Still in CONTinuous, and with the Cu standard conditions, aspirate

distilled water.
2. Press Param Entry and enter an INTegration time of 10 seconds, and

enter 10 for replicates.
3. Aspirate the 5 ppm Cu solution.
4. Press DATA and READ.
5. After 100 seconds, you should obtain a mean ABS ≥ .300 and a precision
(RSD) of less than 0.26.
Wavelength Accuracy Test
Check the wavelength accuracy for copper, arsenic, and potassium. Each
of the wavelengths you obtain should be within ± .3 nm of the actual
wavelength.
Perform the keypad test as follows:
1. Install a coded Cu lamp; the instrument firmware will set up the

standard conditions for copper.
2. Enter the Diagnostic Mode (see Chapter 8).
3. Press Energy, type 71, and press Param Entry.
4. The wavelength displayed must be within ± 0.3 nm of 324.7 nm.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above for a coded arsenic lamp. The wavelength

displayed must be within ± 0.3 nm of 193.7 nm.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above for a coded potassium lamp. The wavelength

displayed must be within ± 0.3 nm of 766.5 nm.
Using WinLab
Log Linearity Test
1. Install a copper lamp.

2. Turn on the instrument, and wait until it is initialized.
3. Start up WinLabs and select "Flame" from the Technique menu.
4. Click on Menus and Toolbar. Then click on the Lamps icon to bring up the
Align Lamps window.
5. Set up the copper lamp by clicking on the Cu button in the Align Lamps
window. When the Cu lamp button has turned green, the slit,
wavelength, rotating optic and turret have been set up for copper
standard conditions.
7. Initiate the Cu sensitivity service-test method as follows:
a. Click on File ⇒ Open ⇒ Method.
b. In the "Open Method" window, click on Library.
c. Then, in the "Select Library" window, click on "aauser ⇒ service ⇒

OK".
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_SENS.
e. Then click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.
f. Finally, click on Tools ⇒ Continuous Graphics and, in the

Continuous Graphics window, click on the Autozero icon.
8. Block the beam. The value you read must be 3.1 or greater. If it isn't,
perform the Lin/Log electrical alignment procedure given in Chapter 5 of
this manual.
9. Insert the three neutral density filters in the beam (see Table 4-1). You
must obtain the absorbances given in the table.
AA - BG Test
1. Perform steps 1- 6 of the log-linearity test, given just above.
2. Initiate the Cu AA − BG baseline noise test method as follows:

OK."
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_AABG.
3. Then click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.
4. Click on Tools ⇒ Continuous Graphics and, in the Continuous Graphics

window, click on the Autozero icon.
5. Insert the 1A Neutral Density Filter (P/N N037-1512) in the sample beam
in the sample compartment. The absorbance must be less than 0.010A.
Double Beaming Test
1. Perform steps 1- 6 of the log-linearity test, given above.
2. Initiate the Cu Double-Beaming test as follows:

OK."
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_DB.
4. Then click on Analyses ⇒ Set Fixed Expansion
5. In the Set Fixed Expansion window, click on Expansion [0.01 - 100X].
6. Type in a 10.00 expansion, and click on OK.

7. Click on the Manual icon. Reduce the size, and relocate the manual
Analyses window so that the Analyze Sample icon is visible when the
Results window is opened in the next step.
8. Open the Results window, and make certain that the Analyze Sample
icon is still visible.
9. Click on Analysis ⇒ Autozero Signal.
10. Enable (click on) the Analyze Sample icon in the Manual Analysis
window. Record the Mean ABS value you find in the Results window.
11. Click on Lamps, and reduce the Copper Lamp Current to 10 mA (using
the Align Lamps window. Then click on the Set Mid Scale icon in that
window.
13. Click on the Analyze Sample icon in the Manual Analysis window. Then
record the Mean ABS value you find in the Results window
14. The mean absorbance you see in this step must be within ± 0.040 of what
you recorded in step 10.
Return fixed expansion to 1, and close the remaining open windows.
Copper Sensitivity Test
1. Perform steps 1- 7f of the log-linearity test, given above.
2. Align the burner as described in the AAnalyst hardware manual.
3. Lower the burner head to make certain it is below the beam. (See the
burner adjustment controls in Chapter 3.)
4. Raise the burner (using the vertical adjustment knob) until you obtain
"some" counts on the display (i.e., until you "break" zero).
5. Lower the burner until you obtain Zero counts again, and then lower it an
additional small amount by turning the vertical adjustment knob
approximately ¼ turn clockwise.
6. Click on Flame. When the Flame Control window opens, make sure the
(default) flow settings are 3 for fuel and 10 for oxidant. Set them for 3
and 10 if they are not.
7. After allowing sufficient time for the acetylene to dissipate, click on the
Flame On/Off icon to light the flame.
8. Aspirate distilled water and press the AZ key.
9. Aspirate a 5 ppm Cu solution.
10. Slowly turn the nebulizer adjustment nut counterclockwise until you see
bubbles in the Cu solution or until ABS goes to zero.
11. Then turn the nebulizer adjustment nut clockwise until the absorbance
goes to a maximum and begins to decrease.
12. Finally, slowly turn the adjustment nut clockwise and counterclockwise
until you find maximum absorbance.
13. Refer to Chapter 3 and use the forward and back (horizontal) burner
adjustment to maximize absorbance.
14. Use the rotational burner adjustment to maximize absorbance. The

minimum acceptable absorbance is ≥ 0.300.
15. Close the Continuous Graphics window. The Flame Control window will
remain open. Continue with the Copper precision test.
Copper Precision Test
1. Click on File ⇒ Open ⇒ Method, and select the CU_PREC test using the
Open Method window.
2. Click on Analysis ⇒ Autozero Signal.
3. Click on the Results icon.
4. Click on the Manual icon and aspirate distilled water.
5. Click on Analysis ⇒ Autozero Signal and aspirate a 5 ppm Cu solution.
6. Enable (click on) the Analyze Sample icon in the Manual Analysis
window. Then close the Manual Analysis window.
7. Check the values, in the Results window, of the Mean ABS and of the
precision. The Mean ABS must be > 0.300 ABS and the precision
must be < 0.26
8. Click on Flame On/Off to turn off the flame.
9. Finally, close the Flame Control and Results windows.

Wavelength Accuracy Test
Check the wavelength accuracy for copper, arsenic, and potassium. Each
of the wavelengths you obtain should be within ± .3 nm of the actual
wavelength.
Perform the WinLab wavelength accuracy test as follows:
1. Install a coded Cu lamp; the instrument firmware will set up the

standard conditions for copper.
2. Enter the WinLab Service Diagnostics Mode (see Chapter 8).
3. Click on Tools ⇒ Wavelength Scan
4. Perform the scan and note the peak-wavelength location. It must be

within ± 0.3 nm of 324.7 nm.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above for a coded arsenic lamp. The peak wavelength
must be within ± 0.3 nm of 193.7 nm.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above for a coded potassium lamp. The wavelength

peak must be within ± 0.3 nm of 766.5 nm.
4-12 Performance Tests Additional Performance Tests
Additional Performance Tests

This set of tests is to be performed at the discretion of the Service
Engineer. As for the mandatory tests, the test procedures are first given for
keypad-controlled instruments, then for PC controlled instruments.
Using the Keypad
AA Baseline Noise Test
NOTE: A lamp warm-up time of 30 minutes is recommended

before performing this test.
1. Set up the standard conditions for copper with the following exceptions:
INTegration time = 3 seconds
REPlicates = 20
2. Press EXPand. Then type 50 and press Enter.
3. Press CONTinuous, then the AZ key.
4. Press DATA, then press READ. Twenty readings will be displayed at

three-second intervals. Record the resulting STD DEV displayed.
5. Press READ four more times. Record the value of STD DEV that
appears in the display each time.
6. Average the five readings. The pooled standard deviation must be less
than .0055.
AA - BG Baseline Noise Test
NOTE: A lamp warm-up time of 30 minutes is recommended

before performing this test.
1. Set up the standard conditions for copper with the following exceptions:
INTegration time = 3 seconds
REPlicates = 20
2. Press ENERGY. Then peak the wavelength (324.7).
3. Then press the AA-BG key.

Performance Tests Additional Performance Tests 4-13
4. Press EXPand. Then type 50 and press Enter.
5. Press CONTinuous, then the AZ key.
6. Press DATA, then press READ. Twenty readings will be displayed at

three-second intervals. Record the resulting STD DEV displayed.
7. Press READ four more times. Record the value of STD DEV that
appears in the display each time.
8. Average the five readings. The pooled standard deviation must be less
than .011
Emission Check
1. With a copper lamp installed and the instrument turned on, press the EM
key.
2. Set up the standard conditions for copper.
3. Press PARAM ENTRY, type a value of 1000 for STD 1, then press
Enter.
4. Press CONTinuous, block the beam, and then press AZ.
5. Unblock the beam, press DATA and then press CALIB. You should see a
reading of 1000 ±1 on the display. (The reading will only appear briefly.)
6. Insert a 0.2 A neutral density filter and press READ. You should see a
reading of 630 ±50.
7. Remove the 0.2 A neutral density filter and insert a 1.0 A neutral density
filter. Then press READ. The reading should be 100 ±50.
8. Remove the 1.0 A neutral density filter and insert a 2 A neutral density
filter. The reading should be 10 ±10.
Using Winlab
AA Baseline Noise Test
Align Lamps window.
5. Set up the copper lamp by typing Cu, if necessary, and then clicking on
the (Cu) Lamp button.
7. Initiate the AA Baseline Noise service-test method as follows:
b. In the "Open Method" window, click on the Library icon.

OK".
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_AA.
9. Click on Analyses ⇒ Set Fixed Expansion; set expansion to 50.00 and

click on OK.
10. Click on Results.
11. Click on Manual.
NOTE: In order to have the Analyze Sample button visible at

the same time the Results window is displayed, you must
decrease the size of the Manual Analysis window and move it
towards the right of the screen. You can then move the
Analyze Sample button into view by using the right-arrow (⇒ )
at the bottom of the reduced Manual Analysis window.
12. Click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.
13. Click on (enable) the Analyze Sample button.

14. Record the SD (standard deviation) as it appears in the Results window.
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 four more times and take the average of the 5
SDs.
The Pooled standard deviation must be less than (<) 0.0055
16. Close the Results and the Manual Analysis windows.

AA-BG Baseline Noise Test
NOTE: A lamp warm-up time of thirty minutes is

recommended before performing this test.
Align Lamps window.
7. Initiate the AA-BG Baseline Noise service-test method as follows:

OK".
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_AABG.
9. Click on Analyses ⇒ Set Fixed Expansion; if necessary, set expansion to

50.00. Then click on OK.
NOTE: In order to have the Analyze Sample button visible at

the same time the Results window is displayed, you must
decrease the size of the Manual Analysis window and move it
towards the right of the screen. You can then move the
Analyze Sample button into view by using the right-arrow (⇒ )
at the bottom of the reduced Manual Analysis window.
12. Click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.

13. Click on the Lamps icon and check for good AA and BG energy.
15. Click on (enable) the Analyze Sample button.
16. Record the SD (standard deviation) as it appears in the Results window.
17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 four more times, and take the average of the 5
SDs.
The Pooled standard deviation must be less than (<) 0.011.
18. Close the Results and Manual Analyses windows.
19. Click on Analyses ⇒ Set Fixed Expansion; reset expansion to 1 and click
on OK.
Emission Check
Align Lamps window.
7. Initiate the Emission service-test method as follows:

OK".
d. Again in the "Open Method" window, click on CU_EM.
9. Click OK on the Suggestions window. (It may be necessary to click a

second time.)
NOTE: In order to have the Analyze Sample or Standard

button visible at the same time the Results are visible, you
must decrease the size of the Manual Analysis window and
move it towards the right of the screen. You can then move the
Analyze Sample or Standard button into view by using the
arrows (⇒ ) at the bottom of the reduced Manual Analysis
window.
12. Block the beam, then click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.

13. Click OK on the Suggestions window if necessary.
14. Click on the Lamps icon to bring up the Align Lamps window.
15. Click on the (Cu) Lamp button.
16. Set the energy to midscale.
18. Block the beam, then click on Analyses ⇒ Autozero Signal.
19. Click OK on the Suggestions window (if necessary).
20. Using the "arrow" at the bottom of the Manual window (if necessary),
make the Analyze Standard button visible and enable it. Note that 1000
is applied as STD 1.
21. Using the ""arrow" at the bottom of the Manual window, make the
Analyze Sample button visible and enable it. The Results window should
display approximately 1000.
22. Insert a 0.2A filter (P/N N037-1510) and again enable the Analyze
Sample button. The Results window should display 630 ± 50.
23. Insert a 1.0A filter (P/N N037-1512) and enable the Analyze Sample
button. The Results window should display 100 ± 50
24. Insert a 2.0A filter (P/N N037-1513) and enable the Analyze Sample
button again. The Results window should display 10 ± 10.
25. Close the Results and Manual Analyses windows.

4-20 Performance Tests Adjusting the As to K Wavelength Span
Adjusting the As to K Wavelength Span

Overview
NOTE: This procedure is an alternative to the grating-span
adjustment procedure in Chapter 5 (pg. 5-12). Backlighting
the monochromator is required in that procedure, but not in
the procedure given below.
If there is a problem obtaining energy, e.g., a Cu lamp is installed and the

AAnalyst will not peak at 324.7 nm, and if the problem is calibration related,
the following sequence will correct the energy problem at all wavelengths.
• checking the wavelengths the Spectrometer sees at the default

parameters for As and K
• adjusting the wavelengths to what they should be
• checking and correcting the nanometer difference (wavelength

span) between As and K.
To correct the wavelength span, you must remove the monochromator

cover, turn the grating wavelength adjust screw (see Figure 5-4), and change
the grating offset as follows:
a. Turn the grating wavelength adjust screw CCW if the span is too large.
For each "small increment" you turn the grating screw counterclockwise,
you must add 200 counts to the grating offset.
b. Turn the screw CW if the span is too small. For each "small increment"
you turn the grating screw clockwise, you must subtract 200 counts from
the grating offset.
NOTE: You must increase the number of grating offset counts

by 25 for each 0.1 nm you lower, and decrease the number of
grating offset counts by 25 for each 0.1 nm you increase, the
wavelength. (Use menu item 65 of the service diagnostics-see
Table 8-1 in Chapter 8 "Diagnostics").
Procedure for a keypad Instrument
Check AS
1. Set up Arsenic standard conditions, i.e., enter the default parameters (λ =

193.7 nm).
Performance Tests Adjusting the As to K Wavelength Span 4-21
2. Press ENERGY, enter the service diagnostics, and select menu item 71.
a. If the wavelength you are actually at is within ± 0.3 nm of 193.7

nm, go to the Check K pareagraph, below, and set up the parameters
for K.
b. If the wavelength you are actually at is not within ± 0.3 nm of

193.7 nm, proceed to step 3.
3. Using Menu item 71, change the wavelength by ± 0.5 nm.
4. Repeat step 3 until you are within ± .3 nm of 193.7 nm with maximum

energy and counts.
5. Record the wavelength.
6. Proceed to check K.
Check K
1. Set up Potassium standard conditions, i.e., enter the default parameters

(λ = 766.5 nm).
2. Press ENERGY and select menu item 71.
3. If the wavelength you are actually at is within ± 0.3 nm of 766.5 nm, and
it is within spec, no adjustment is necessary. If it is not, using Menu item
71, change the wavelength by ± 0.3 nm.
4. Repeat step 3 until you are within ±0.3 nm of 766.5 nm.
5. Record the wavelength.
6. Proceed to "Adjust the Span."
Adjust the Span
You now have both the wavelength of As and the wavelength of K

accurately located. In order to give you an example to illustrate the span
adjustment, we assume you have attained the following wavelengths for As
and K:
As = 193.625 nm
K = 766.326 nm
The span you have is 572.701
The wavelengths you should be peaking at are:
As = 193.7
K = 766.5
The "correct " span is 766.5 - 193.7 = 572.800
Therefore your span is 572.800 - 572.701 ≈ 0.1 nm too short (or low).
NOTE: If the span is correct and the wavelength error is

linear, only the offset needs to be reset.
Proceed as follows to correct the span:
1. Go to the Energy mode, i.e., press the Energy key.
2. Enter 250 for the PMT voltage; this prevents the light which will enter
when you remove the monochromator cover to cause excessive detector
current.
3. Remove the monochromator cover.
4. Rotate the grating wavelength adjust screw (see Figure 5-5 of this
manual) one "increment " clockwise. (This "increment " should be, at
first, the smallest amount you can rotate the screw to increase the span.)
NOTE: If the span was too LARGE, you would rotate the
wavelength adjust screw counterclockwise and add counts.
NOTE: For every nm the span is "out," you rotate the

wavelength screw one increment and add or subtract 200
counts per increment.
5. Replace the monochromator cover.
6. Press Energy, enter service diagnostics, and access Menu Item 65. Then
LOWER the grating offset counts by 200 and reinitialize. (You raise the
counts by 200 for every increment when you rotate the wavelength screw
counterclockwise.)
7. Access Menu Item 71 and enter 193.7 to find, and then peak on (item 75),
the arsenic wavelength.
8. Record where you actually "are."

9. Enter 766.5 to find, and then peak on (item 75) the potassium
wavelength. Again check where you "are."
10. Check the span you now have, and repeat the procedure as necessary.
11. When the span is correct within ±0.1 nm of 572.800, you have corrected
the problem. The spectrometer should peak correctly at the wavelength
for Cu (324.7) and for every other lamp.
Procedure When Using WinLab

The wavelength span adjustment will now be made using the Winlab
service diagnostics. (Refer to Chapter 8, Diagnostics, of this manual when
necessary.)
1. With the system initialized, and with the icon for service diagnostics
visible, click on the X100/300 icon. (See the procedure for accessing
WinLab service diagnostics on page 8-6 of this manual.)
2. Install arsenic and potassium lamps in the turret.
Check As
1. Click on Tools ⇒ Align Lamps (see figure 8-1).
2. As is done in steps 1 - 5 of the baseline noise test on page 4-14 for the
copper lamp, set up the As lamp. The slit, wavelength, lamp current,
turret and optic positions will be set up for As.
4. Click on Tools ⇒ Wavelength Scan. (See the Scan diagnostic screen on

page 8-11 of this manual.)
5. Assuming you are fairly close to having the wavelength calibrated

correctly, choose the wavelength to be scanned to be from 192.5 to 195
nm.
6. Click on the Scan On/Off icon.
7. When the scan has been completed, record the peak wavelength.
NOTES: 1) If the scan saturated at the top, or showed too

little PMT voltage, increase or decrease the Energy value.
(Decrease the value to increase the PMT voltage.)
2) Increase the Points Per Run value if greater resolution is
required.
8. Close the Scan window.
9. If it is necessary to change the wavelength offset, click on Tools ⇒ Optical

Control (see Figure 8-1).
10. See the Optical Control window on page 8-8. Change the offset value by
0.5 nm. (I.e., add or subtract 200 counts from the offset value.) Then click
on the Init Grating icon.
11. Close the Optical Control window.
12. Repeat steps 4 through 11 until you are within ±0.3 nm of 193.7.
Check K
Repeat steps 1-12 above for the K (potassium) lamp. You must scan
between 765 and 767 nm for K (see step 5 of the As procedure). You must be
within ±0.3 nm of 766.5 nm. Repeat steps 4 to 11 until you are within ±0.3
nm of 766.5 nm.
Adjust the Span
You now have both the wavelength of As and the wavelength of K

accurately located. In order to give you an example to illustrate the span
adjustment, we assume you have attained the following wavelengths for As
and K:
As = 193.625 nm
K = 766.326 nm.
The span you have is 572.701
The wavelengths you should be peaking at are:
As = 193.7
K = 766.5
The "correct " span is 766.5 - 193.7 = 572.800
Therefore your span is 572.800 - 572.701 ≈ 0.1 nm too short (or low).
NOTE: If the span is correct and the wavelength error is

linear, only the offset needs to be reset.
Proceed as follows to correct the span:

1. Remaining in WinLab service diagnostics, and with the arsenic and

potassium lamps still in the turret, click on Tools ⇒ Instrument Control
(see figure 8-1).
2. Type 250 in the PMT Voltage box of the Instrument Control page and
click on Set. Doing this prevents ligh which enters the monochromator
when you remove the cover to produce excessive detector current.
3. Remove the monochromator cover.
4. Rotate the grating wavelength adjust screw (see Figure 5-4 of this
manual) one "increment " clockwise. The "increment " should be, at first,
the smallest amount you can rotate the screw to increase the span.
NOTE: If the span was too LARGE, you would rotate the
wavelength adjust screw counterclockwise, and add counts in
step 7 below.
NOTE: As a general reminder, for every nm the span is "out,"

you rotate the wavelength screw one increment and add or
subtract 200 counts per increment.
5. Replace the monochromator cover.
6. Click on the AGC/AIC box of the Instrument Control diagnostics page to

reset the PMT voltage. Then close the Instrument Control window.
7. Click on Tools ⇒ Optical Control, then LOWER the grating offset counts
by 200 and reinitialize. (You would (alternatively) raise the counts by 200
for every increment when you rotate the wavelength screw
counterclockwise.)
8. Click on the Init Grating box in the Optical Control window. Then close
the Optical Control window.
9. Click on Tools ⇒ Align Lamps. Re-set up the As lamp, and then close the
Align Lamps window.
10. Click on Tools ⇒ Wavelength Scan.
11. Repeat the procedure as necessary. When the span is correct within ±0.2
nm of 572.800, you have corrected the problem. The spectrometer should
peak correctly at the wavelength for Cu (324.7) and for every other lamp.
12. When the problem has been corrected, close service diagnostics
Optical/Electrical
Alignment 5
Optical/Electrical Alignment Summary (Outline)
1. Preparing to Align the Spectrometer
General
Alignment Kit
Hardware Needed
2. Aligning the Monochromator

Setting the Slit Height
Aligning the Mercury Lamp (Backlight Fixture)
Height and Side-to-Side Adjustment of the Paraboloid (M5)
Grating Adjustments
Tilt and Angle Adjustment
Span Adjustment
3. Aligning the Photometer

Aligning Toroid M4 and Flat M7
Aligning first the Turret, and then Rotating Optic M1 [with turret installed]
4. Aligning the Chopper (Phasing)

5. Phasing the Chopper (LED Alignment)
5-2 Optical/Electrical Alignment Preparing for the Alignment
6. Electronic Calibration (Alignment)

7. Final Peaking and Adjustments
Peaking the HCL with a final check of sample flat M7
Deutrium Lamp Adjustment
Preparing for the Alignment

Who is to Align the AAnalyst?
The alignment procedures in this chapter should be performed only by a
Perkin-Elmer Service Engineer.
Accessing the Optics

After turning off the instrument power, raise and remove the large,
hinged instrument looks cover. Then remove the four screws securing the
instrument back panel and remove the panel.
Remove the two screws securing both the monochromator and photometer
covers, and (carefully) remove the covers.
Use extreme care when working near the optics, as just touching a mirror
surface can destroy the optic or reduce its performance at low-UV
wavelengths. (It is recommended that you wear gloves when aligning the
AAnalyst.) Use extra care when working near the chopper (optic M3 in
Figure 5-1), especially when power is applied.
Always wear safety glasses when aligning the Aanalyst, or you risk
exposing you eyes to harmful ultraviolet radiation.
Preparing to Align the AAnalyst

Before you align the AAnalyst, you should have a working knowledge of
the instrument firmware and software. You should be familiar with the
AAnalyst IEEE diagnostics offset program and, when aligning an AAnalyst
100, you need to be familiar with its keypad. Carefully review this service
manual and the AAnalyst Hardware Guide (P/N 0993-6088).
To perform a successful alignment, a functional understanding of the

3200 AA optical system is essential. Carefully read the overview of the
optical system of the spectrometer, which is in Chapter 1 of this manual. It
is also essential that you have the tools and fixtures listed in Table 1, below.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Preparing for the Alignment 5-3
An optical schematic of the AAnalyst 100/300 is included as Figure 5-1.

Use it to identify the optics, fixtures, fixture positions, etc.
NOTE: Before beginning the optical/electrical alignment,

allow the instrument to warm up for approximately 15
minutes.
In many of these alignment procedures, you must access the diagnostic

offsets. Refer to Chapter 8 (Diagnostics) for a list of the parameter entry
codes, and for the procedure for accessing and changing the default offset
values.
Alignment Kit and Hardware Required.

In order to align the Model 3200, alignment kit P/N N040-T001 is
required. The parts supplied in the Kit are listed in Table 5-1, below.
Table 5-1. Items Supplied in Alignment Kit P/N N040-T001
Turret Target Fixture N040-T003
Chopper Target Fixture N040-T004
Toroid Target Fixture N040-T011

(small)
Toroid Target Fixture N040-T005

(large)
Slit Magnification Tool N040-T007
Optical Square 0168-9007
Backlight (Mercury-
Lamp) Fixture N040-T010
Conversion Kit*
* Mercury lamp fixture N037-T001 is required but not supplied.
Any additional hardware you need to align the AAnalyst 100 or 300
would normally be carried in your tool kit.
5-4 Optical/Electrical Alignment Preparing for the Alignment
Figure 5-1. Optical Schematic of the AAnalyst 100/300 including

Adjustments and Fixture Positions.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Preparing for the Alignment 5-5
Default Offset Entries for Slit, Turret, Optic, and Grating
Stand-Alone (Keypad) AAnalyst 100
If the stand-alone AAnalyst 100 spectrometer alignment specifications

appear very different from what you normally experience, enter the default
offset values for Slit, Turret, Optic, and Grating listed below:
default offset for slit = 22
default offset for turret = 800
default offset for optic (M1) = 250
default offset for grating = 5000.
To be able to make these entries, using the parameter entry codes, refer
to Chapter 8, "Diagnostics." In the paragraph "Accessing the Parameter
Entry Codes," following the paragraph "Using Service Diagnostics with a
Keypad AAnalyst," the procedure for making parameter entries is spelled
out. The parameter entry codes are tabulated in Table 8-1.
Always record the final offset values in the Instrument History

Log.
Computer-Controlled AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300
If the computer-controlled AAnalyst alignment specifications are not what

you normally experience, see the paragraph above and enter the default
offset values for Slit, Turret, Optic, and Grating listed there.
To make those entries using WinLab, refer to Chapter 8, "Diagnostics,"

and follow the procedure given in the paragraph "Using Service Diagnostics
with WinLab."
NOTE 1: When replacing a System Control Board (P/N N041-

9004), transfer the "Personality Device" from J21 (see Figure 5-
13) of the old board to J21 of the new board. For a detailed
discussion of the System Control Board, see Chapter 6, "The
Electrical System."
NOTE 2: After installing the personality device on the new

(replacement) board, enter the four offsets (slit, turret, optic,
and grating) from the History Log as described in the previous
paragraph.
5-6 Optical/Electrical Alignment Monochromator Alignment
Monochromator Alignment
Set the Slit Height
Perform this procedure when installing or adjusting the slit assembly.
Proceed as follows:
1. Turn the instrument power off.
2. Having allowed ample time for the instrument to cool, remove the PMT
top cover from the (black) cylindrical photomultiplier enclosure, remove
the magnetic shield, and remove the PMT tube. (Be careful when
removing the tube, and store it in a safe place.)
Caution Never touch the front, glass surface of the photomultiplier tube
with bare fingers. Operation of the photomultiplier could be
impaired.
3. Rotate the slit wheel and make sure it is not hitting the optical-base wall.
The wheel should be as close to the wall as possible without touching it
(see Figure 5-2).
4. Unlock the slit assembly by loosening its spring-loaded locking screw.
5. Make certain that the slit assembly is at the proper height by using a
3/32" Allen key to set the distance between the slit bracket and the
optical base to be a uniform 3/32".
6. Install the slit-magnification tool (P/N N040-T007) in the empty (black)

PMT cylindrical enclosure. Then use a pen light to illuminate the slit
assembly.
7. Apply power to the spectrometer and verify that the slit offset is set at 22.
(See the discussion of default offset entries beginning on page 5-5.)
8. Set the slit width to 0.7 nm high.

Optical/Electrical Alignment Monochromator Alignment 5-7
Figure 5-2. Adjustment Screws on the Slit-Mounting Bracket.
9. Shine the penlight straight down from the top of the slit assembly to
illuminate the slit. The focus-adjusting screw (see Figure 5-2) can be
turned 1/8 of a turn CCW to allow more light to shine on the slit.
10. Check to see if the slit image is in the center of the PMT aperture as
11. If necessary, adjust the tilt-adjusting setscrews to bring the slit image to
the center of the viewed aperture.
NOTE: The final focus adjustment will be made when you

perform the focus adjustment of paraboloid M5 (see
Figure 5-1).
12. Repeat steps 3 and 11 as necessary to make certain that the slit wheel is
not hitting the optical-base wall, and that the slit image is in the center of
the aperture.
13. Tighten the spring-loaded locking screw on the slit mounting bracket, and
remove the slit magnification tool.
The slit position has now been properly set.

Mercury Lamp Alignment

Install and align the mercury lamp (backlight fixture) as follows:
NOTE: The Backlight Fixture for the Model 3100 and Model
3300 (P/N N037-T001) must be adapted for the AAnalyst with
Conversion Kit N040-T010.
1. Make certain that the PMT tube was removed as dictated in step 2 of the
procedure for setting the slit height, above.
NOTE: Use safety glasses whenever using the backlight
fixture.
2. Install the modified backlight (mercury-lamp) fixture in the PMT

enclosure.
3. Connect the backlight fixture to the fixture transformer, then connect the
transformer to line power.
NOTE: To avoid having the transformer wires interfere with

the alignment, drape the transformer wires between paraboloid
M5 and toroid M8, and then over the back of the spectrometer.
4. Switch on the transformer assembly and allow several minutes for the
mercury lamp to warm up.
5. Select the 0.7-nm high slit (the default slit).

Paraboloid (M5) Height and Side-to-Side Adjustment

Perform the angular (side-to-side) alignment and height adjustment of
the paraboloid as follows:
1. Make certain that the 0.7-nm wide, high slit has been selected and that
the paraboloid (M5) is flooded with light from the backlight fixture (from
the exit slit).
NOTE: This is only a rough adjustment of the paraboloid.

The final paraboloid focus adjustment will be made after
"Grating Adjustments" and before "Photometer Adjustment."
2. Use a 3/32-in. Allen key and loosen the two paraboloid-focus locking set
screws on the paraboloid mount (see Figure 5-3).
3. Rotate the paraboloid until the index mark on the mirror is in the 3:00
position as shown in the figure.
4. Move the mirror forward and backward in its mount until the back of the
metal shaft which holds the optic is approximately 4 mm from the back of
the mirror mount; a 4-mm Allen wrench can be used as a gauge. Then
tighten the two paraboloid-focus locking set screws.
5. Place the optical square (P/N 0168-9007) between the grating and the
paraboloid (see Figure 5-1) so that its reflecting surface reflects the light
from the mercury lamp back to the paraboloid. Then, by slowly rotating
the optical square about its vertical axis, center the light from the
backlight fixture (exit slit) to the entrance slit.
NOTE: When using the optical square, always replace it in the

same position, as the optical base is not precisely flat.
6. Adjust the height of the slit image over the entrance slit by using the
paraboloid-height adjust screw, which is located at the 12:00 position at
the rear of the paraboloid mount (see Figure 5-3). "Tweak" the screw
using a 3-mm Allen key until the slit image is centered vertically over
the entrance slit. Then remove the optical square.
7. Using a 7/16-in. wrench, loosen the locking nut which secures the side-to-
side adjusting screw.
8. Using a 3-mm Allen key, carefully rotate the side-to-side adjusting screw
until the light which is flooding the paraboloid is centered horizontally
over the grating-baffle opening (see Figure 5-1).
NOTE: Darkening the room could be helpful when centering

the light around the baffle.
9. Tighten the locking nut of the side-to-side adjusting screw to maintain the
correct side-to-side alignment. Make certain that the paraboloid doesn't
move when you tighten the nut.
10. Replace the optical square and note the height of the exit slit image on
the entrance slit. If it is no longer centered vertically over the entrance
slit, repeat step 6. (See the NOTE following step 5.)
11. Remove the optical square. The procedure for adjusting the side-to-side
alignment and height adjustment of the paraboloid has been completed.
Figure 5-3. Paraboloid (M5) Adjustments.

Grating Adjustments
The grating adjustments made in this paragraph are:
• grating tilt and angle adjustment (including parabola focus)

• grating span adjustment
Perform the grating adjustment procedures as described below:
Grating Tilt and Angle Adjustment (including parabola focus)
1. Initialize the grating. Enable diagnostics. Setup for white light.
2. Select the 0.7-nm wide, high slit and use the grating-wavelength adjust
screw (see Figure 5-4) to bring the horizontal image back to the exit slit.
If the height of the image on the slit (S2) is not centered vertically over
the slit, adjust the grating-height adjust screw for white light to center
the image vertically over the slit.
3. Refer to Figure 5-1 and place an index card between toroid M4 and the
entrance slit.
4. Then select the 0.2-nm high slit, and adjust the grating-wavelength
adjust screw (see Figure 5-4) so that the exit slit (white-light) image on
the index card is as bright as you can make it. If the image doesn't flash
on and off evenly (i.e. seems to move from side-to-side or top-to-bottom
while moving the image across the slit), proceed with step 5, below. If the
image flashes on and off evenly, proceed to step 6.
5. If the image did not collapse evenly in step 4, drive to 546.1 nm and
proceed to fine-tune the paraboloid focus as follows:
a. Power down the instrument. Check the image movement on the index
card by manually turning the wavelength drive shaft (see Figure 5-4).
b. Loosen the two paraboloid-focus locking screws (see Figure 5-3).
c. If the image in steps 4 and 5a was moving up and down, slowly

rotate the paraboloid until the up-and-down image movement stops.
d. If the image in steps 4 and 5a was moving from side-to-side, move

the paraboloid in and out until the side-to-side image movement stops.
The image should now flash on and off evenly. (See step 4, above.) If
it does, tighten the two paraboloid-focus locking screws. Recheck the
image after tightening the screws.
e. Restore power to the spectrometer.

f. Recheck the parabola height by positioning the optical square between

the parabola and the grating.
g. Adjust the height of the slit image over the entrance slit using the
paraboloid-height adjust screw. Then remove the optical square.
6. Adjust the grating-height adjust screw for white light (see Figure 5-4) so
that the exit-slit image is centered over the entrance slit.
7. Scan to 546.1 nm (green) and, if necessary, turn the grating-wavelength

adjust screw to center the image horizontally over the entrance slit.. If it
is not centered vertically over the slit, adjust the tilt of the grating using
the grating-tilt adjustment screw for green light (see Figure 5-4) so that
the image is centered vertically over the entrance slit.
8. Scan to zero nm (white) and, if necessary, use the grating-wavelength

adjust screw to center the image horizontally over the entrance slit.
9. Adjust the grating-height adjust screw for white light to vertically center
the image over the entrance slit.
10. Then repeat steps 7 through 9 until both the white and green lines are
centered vertically over the entrance slit. Then proceed to the grating-
span adjustment.
Grating Span Adjustment
The grating span adjustment makes certain that the wavelength change
(interval) you scan (as determined by the readout) is the actual wavelength
interval scanned as determined by the position of the slit image. Proceed as
follows:
1. Re-initialize the grating.
2. Select the 0.2-nm-high slit and adjust the wavelength screw to make the
white-light image on the index card as bright as you can.
3. Scan to 546.1 nm. If the (green) slit image goes past the slit as you scan,
the "span" is too large (see Step 3a, below). If the slit image does not
reach the slit, the "span" is too small (see Step 3b, below.) If the entrance
slit image is horizontally centered over the slit when you reach 546.1 nm,
the span is correct. Proceed to step 4, below
a. If the span was found to be too large (i.e. the image passed the slit or
you had to turn the wavelength adjust screw CCW to brighten the
image), decrease the number of grating offset counts. (See the
discussion of offset entries beginning on page 5-5) Then proceed to

Step 4.
b. If the span was found to be too small (i.e. the image did not reach the
slit or you had to turnthe wavelength adjust screw CW to brighten the
image), increase the number of grating offset counts. (See the
discussion of offset entries beginning on page 5-4) Then proceed to
step 4.
4. Reinitialize the grating, and continue with the procedure while still using
the 0.2-nm-high slit.
5. Adjust the grating-wavelength adjust screw (see Figure 5-4) so that the
exit slit (white-light) image on the index card is as bright as you can
make it.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until the exit slit image is horizontally centered
over the entrance slit for both the white and green wavelengths.
7. Scan back to 546.1 nm.
8. Adjust the grating-wavelength adjust screw (see Figure 5-4) to verify

that the exit slit (green-light) image on the index card is as bright as you
can make it. If it isn't, repeat steps 2 to 5, above, as necessary.
All the grating adjustments have now been completed. Proceed to

"Photometer Alignment."
Figure 5-4. Grating Angle and Tilt Adjustments.

5-14 Optical/Electrical Alignment Photometer Alignment
Photometer Alignment
The photometer must be aligned when performing the overall optical
alignment.
The photometer alignment includes alignment of toroid M4 and flat M7.
NOTE: HCL toroid M1 is aligned after the turret alignment is
performed.
Toroid M4 and Flat M7 Alignment

To align toroid M4 and flat M7, proceed as follows:
1. Power-down the spectrometer and remove the spectrometer line cord.

2. Remove the chopper assembly from the optical base by removing the
three screws that secure it. Unplug the chopper connector (P30) from the
fuse-connector PCB located at the bottom of the lamp compartment.
NOTE: To remove the connector from J30, remove the plate
at the bottom of the lamp compartment. To remove the plate,
remove the two screws securing it, and use a pencil (or similar
object) to lift it.
3. Then power-up and clear the chopper error. (When powering-up, the slit
will initialize with the 0.7-nm, high slit.)
4. Make certain that you are using the 0.7-nm wide, high slit, and scan to
546.1 nm.
5. Install the three alignment fixtures listed :
• chopper-target fixture (N040-T004 - see Figure 5-5) on the chopper
pivot pin from which the chopper assembly was removed.
Figure 5-5. Chopper Target Fixture (N040-T004).

Optical/Electrical Alignment Photometer Alignment 5-15
• small toroid-target fixture (N040-T011 - see Figure 5-6) in the tooling hole
located between the chopper fixture and toroid M6, located near the exit
window of the sample compartment.
Figure 5-6. Small Toroid Fixture (N040-T011).
• large toroid - target fixture (N040-T005 - see Figure 5-7) in the tooling
hole between the chopper fixture and toroid M1 (the HCL toroid).
Figure 5-7. Large Toroid Fixture (N040-T005).
6. Loosen the spring-loaded locking screw on the mounts of both mirrors M4

sand M7. See Figure 5-8.
7. Align toroid M4, using the image-height and side-to-side adjust screws
(see Figure 5-8) on the mount of M4 to "center" the image through the
hole in the chopper fixture.
Figure 5-8. Adjusting Toroid M4 and Flat M7.
8. Then check the image upon the small toroid fixture. If it is to the left of
the center of the toroid fixture, rotate the image-aperture adjust screw on
the mount of M4 (see Figure 5-8) CLOCKWISE. If it is to the right of
center, rotate the image-aperture adjust screw on the mount of M4
COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
9. Re-adjust toroid M4, using the image height and side-to-side adjust
screws on the mount of M4, to center the image through the hole in the
chopper fixture.
10. Then again check the image on the small toroid fixture. Repeat steps 7
through 9 until the beam is centered "through" the chopper fixture and on
the small toroid target fixture.
11. Tighten the spring-loaded locking screw on the mount of mirror M4.
12. Align flat M7, using the image-height and side-to-side adjust screws on
the mount of M7 (see Figure 5-8), to center the image through the hole in
the chopper fixture.
13. Check the image on the large toroid fixture. If it is to the left of center of
the fixture, rotate the image-aperture adjust screw on the mount of M7
(see Figure 5-8) COUNTERCLOCKWISE. If it is to the right of center,
rotate the image-aperture adjust screw of M7 CLOCKWISE.
NOTE: There is only minor height adjustment for the image

on the large toroid fixture.
14. Align flat M7, using the image-height and side-to-side adjust screws on
the mount of M7, to center the image through the hole in the chopper
fixture.
15. Then again check the image on the large toroid fixture. Repeat steps 12
through 14 until the beam is centered through the chopper and on the
large toroid target fixture.
16. Tighten the spring-loaded locking screw on the mount of mirror M7.
If aligning an instrument that does not have a turret, proceed to

Align the Chopper, otherwise proceed with Align Rotating Optic (M1)
followed by aligning the turret.
Aligning the AAnalyst Turret and (Rotating) Optic M1
Aligning the Turret
Align the turret as instructed below:
1. Power down the instrument.
2. Loosen the two screws securing the flag-wheel assembly to the turret
shaft (see Figure 5-9).
3. Rotate the brass shaft gear to its mechanical stop by turning the motor
worm gear clockwise (when facing the shaft end). The pin on the brass
shaft gear should be to the right of the stop on the bracket when you look
towards the back of the instrument (i.e., towards the flat side of the
looker wheel assembly as shown in Figure 5-9).
4. Position the HOME flag (of the flag wheel) in its looker as shown in detail
1 of Figure 5-9. Then tighten the two screws securing the flag wheel
assembly onto the turret shaft. (This is done to block the beam in the
optical looker before the brass shaft gear hits its mechanical stop.)
5. Initialize the spectrometer.
6. Increase or decrease the Turret Offset value until you observe the
Position 1 flag of the flag wheel extending the same amount above and
below the position looker (see detail 2 of Figure 5-9). Entering offset
values is described beginning on page 5-5 of this chapter.
NOTE: Every time you add or subtract counts to or from the

Turret Offset value, you must reinitialize the turret motor.
7. Loosen the screws securing the flag wheel and the brass shaft gear to the
turret shaft (see Figure 5-9).
8a. If a backlight is being used, install the turret target fixture (P/N N040-
T003) in turret position 1, and rotate the turret so that the backlight
image is centered on the horizontal center line of the turret target fixture.
8b. If a backlight is not being used, and the turret is the only assembly that
needs adjusting, manually rotate the turret until you obtain maximum
energy in turret position 1.
9. Tighten the screw securing the brass shaft gear to the turret shaft.
10. With the position 1 flag extending equally above and below the looker as
shown in detail 2 of Figure 5-9, tighten the screws securing the flag wheel
to the turret shaft.
11. Power up the instrument and reinitialize the turret. If a backlight is

being used, check for the correct image on the turret target fixture. If
necessary, reset the turret offset to place the image on the horizontal
center line of the target.
12. Check the gear mesh as outlined in the next procedure.
NOTE: We recommend that you check the gear mesh as

described below when installing the turret cables as well as
when aligning the turret. The procedure for replacing the
turret cables is given later in this chapter in the paragraph
"Wrapping the Turret Harness."
Checking the Gear Mesh
Check the gear mesh as described below
1. Power down the spectrometer.
2. Loosen the motor (worm) gear securing setscrew, the brass, shaft-gear
securing setscrew, and one of the turret motor-mount screws (see Figure
5-9).
3. Set the brass (shaft) gear directly beneath the motor worm gear. Move it
from side-to-side only (do not rotate it).
4. Seat the worm gear by gently rotating the turret motor around the
secured motor-mount screw and pressing the worm gear into the brass
gear. Check that the gears appear to be properly meshed, i.e., that there
is little or no backlash.
5. Tighten the turret motor-mount screw loosened in step 2, above.
6. Tighten the brass gear securing screw.
7. After checking the mesh carefully, tighten the motor worm-gear screw.
8. Check the mesh one final time by rotating the motor worm gear manually
through all six lamp positions while checking for any rough or high spots
on the brass (shaft) gear. The gear mesh should be re-adjusted at the
worst rough or high spot.
9. After completing the alignment procedure and checking the gear mesh,
send the turret to other positions and check the alignment at those
positions by using a standard copper lamp in those positions to make

basic energy tests. (If the backlight fixture is still installed, you can use
the turret target fixture to check the alignment at those positions.)
Aligning Rotating Optic M1
NOTE: This procedure pertains only to AAnalysts with a

turret installed.
Perform the procedure below to align the HCL toroid (see Figure 5-1):
1. Turn off the spectrometer and remove the PMT.
2. If the chopper is installed, disconnect it from the fuse PCB, and make
certain that the chopper blade is not blocking the beam.
3. Install the backlight fixture, then turn the spectrometer on and scan to
546.1 nm (green). (The turret drive motor and the rotating HCL optic
(M1) motor will initialize.).
4. Install the turret target fixture in position 1 of the turret.
5. Check the image on the fixture. Change the optic-offset counts to center
the image on the vertical center line of the HCL target fixture. (Entering
offset values is discussed beginning on page 5-4 of this chapter.)
NOTE: Every time a value is entered, the motor must be

reinitialized.
Figure 5-9. Turret Motor Worm Gear, Turret Shaft Gear, and Turret Flag
Wheel.
5-22 Optical/Electrical Alignment Aligning the Chopper
Aligning the Chopper
Caution We strongly recommend that you wear cotton or rubber gloves

when aligning the chopper to avoid damage to the surface of the
chopper blade.
1. Turn the instrument power off and install the backlight fixture (see Table
5-1) if it is not already installed.
2. Remove the chopper LED bracket (assembly) from the top of the chopper
assembly after removing the spring-loaded screw securing it (see Figure
5-10).
3. Make sure the large toroid target fixture (see Figure 5-1) is in place, and,
if necessary, remove the chopper target fixture and install the chopper
assembly loosely to the optical base. Make certain that the chopper
cable has been disconnected from J30 of the fuse PC board-or
remove the chopper fuse[F2]-(see the note after step 2 of the "Photometer
Alignment" procedure).
4. If the chopper blade is being replaced or is loose, temporarily (nominally)

position the chopper by sliding the blade along the chopper motor shaft
until the mirror surface of the chopper blade bisects the hole which the
pin beneath the chopper shaft sits in when the blade is rotated to the
12:00 (vertical) position. Then (slightly) tighten the three blade-securing
setscrews (see Figure 5-10).
5. Turn the instrument power on and clear any chopper error.
6. Select the 0.2-nm-wide low slit and set the wavelength at 546.1 nm
(green).
7. Then rotate the chopper blade to the 12:00 position (i.e., make it vertical).
The image from the entrance slit (see Figure 5-1) is then reflected
towards the HCL toroid (M1).
8. Make certain that the three chopper-assembly mounting screws are

inserted loosely, and rotate the chopper assembly about its pivot pin to
center the slit image on the large toroid-target fixture N040-T005, which
is in front of HCL toroid M1.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Aligning the Chopper 5-23
Figure 5-10. Chopper Assembly.
9. When the slit image is centered on the large toroid target fixture, tighten
the three chopper-assembly mounting screws.
10a.If the six-position lamp turret is installed, check that both the (rotating)
HCL toroid M1 and the turret have been initialized. Then place the
turret-target fixture (P/N N040-T003) in lamp receptacle 1 of the turret.
10b.If a single lamp holder is installed, place the turret-target fixture in the
single lamp holder so that the stop on the fixture rests against the step on
the single-lamp holder (i.e., so that it is inserted in the holder as far as
possible). Also adjust the lamp-holder adjusting screws so that the lamp-
holder mount is level.
11. Use the back (soft eraser) of a pencil, and rotate the chopper blade, while
checking the coincidence of the sample and reference beams at the turret-
target fixture, as follows:
a. Note the coincidence (or lack of coincidence) of the position of the

reference beam (i.e., the beam reflected by the chopper) with the
sample beam on the turret-target fixture.
5-24 Optical/Electrical Alignment Aligning the Chopper
b. If both beams coincide on the target fixture crosshairs, the chopper is

aligned. If the beams are not coincident on the target crosshairs,
perform step 12 through 14 to "tweak up" the position of the chopper
blade along the chopper motor shaft.
12. Using a 1.5-mm Allen wrench, loosen the three setscrews securing the
chopper blade to the chopper-motor shaft (see Figure 5-10) and move it
slightly in or out. Moving the blade out will move the image to the left.
Then temporarily secure the blade to the chopper motor shaft with one of
the set screws, and recheck the coincidence of the sample and reference
beams.
13. When the beams are coincident, tighten the three setscrews which secure
the chopper blade to the chopper motor shaft.
14. Secure all loose parts: tighten the three screws which secure the chopper-
assembly to the optical base, reconnect the chopper power cable to
connector J30 on the fuse-connector P.C. board, and replace and secure
the plate at the bottom of the lamp compartment.
15. As a final check, power up the instrument and monitor the image on the
turret target fixture. Alternately block and unblock the sample beam to
check the coincidence of the sample and reference beams.
NOTE: Minor height adjustment to the sample beam can be

made with mirror M7 as necessary (see Figures 5-1 and 5-8).
16. Remove the backlight accessory and all target fixtures.
17. Replace the chopper LED bracket (assembly) over the top of the chopper
assembly, and secure it with its spring-loaded screw (see Figure 5-10).
18. Finally, replace the PMT tube and the magnetic shield.
Then proceed with the chopper LED alignment (phasing)

procedure which follows.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Chopper LED Alignment (Phasing) 5-25
Chopper LED Alignment (Phasing)

The chopper-LED phasing must be performed after performing the
chopper alignment, or if the preamplifier signal is "distorted" (i.e., shows
little similarity to the appearance of the preamplifier signal in Figure 5-12).
To adjust the chopper LED phasing, you must adjust the relative
positions of the integrator signal and the preamplifier signal. Proceed as
follows (use a dual-channel analog oscilloscope):
1. Access the test points behind the fan on the right side panel of the
spectrometer as follows:
a. Refer to Figure 5-11 and, with a 1/8-in. Allen wrench, open the fan
assembly latch.
b. Let the fan assembly rest on its hinges, as shown in the figure. All
the test points you need are readily accessible.
Figure 5-11. Accessing the Test Points.

5-26 Optical/Electrical Alignment Chopper LED Alignment (Phasing)
2. Using a copper HCL, set up the spectrometer for copper standard

conditions.
3. Set up channels 1 and 2 of the oscilloscope for a vertical gain of 0.5 V per
division and a time base of 0.2 ms per division.
4. Refer to Figure 5-11 and to sheet 7 of the System Control Board

schematic and connect channel 1 of the scope to TP70 (INTEGRATOR).
Then connect channel 1 ground to TP 79 (GND_A). Observe the
appearance of the integrator reference signal on the scope (see Figure 5-
12).
5. Connect channel 2 of the scope between TP 71 (PREAMP) and TP 79

(GND_A). Observe the appearance of the preamplifier reference signal on
the scope.
Figure 5-12. Appearance of Integrator and Preamplifier Signals with

Proper Chopper Phasing.
6. Trigger the scope to line voltage.
7. Refer to Figure 5-12. If the PREAMP and INTEGRATOR signals do not

appear as in the Figure (i.e. with the integrator reference signal at the
shoulder of the preamplifier reference signal as shown), adjust the
Optical/Electrical Alignment Chopper LED Alignment (Phasing) 5-27
chopper LED adjustment screw on the chopper LED bracket (see Figure
5-10) until they do.
8. When the PREAMP and INTEGRATOR signals appear as shown in

Figure 5-12, proceed with the electronic calibration (alignment) which
follows this procedure.
Pay strict attention to the positions of the refractive looker

Caution
and the chopper blade. They must not touch.
5-28 Optical/Electrical Alignment Electronic Calibration (Alignment)
Electronic Calibration (Alignment)

Overview
Perform this electrical calibration procedure to effectively eliminate the
DC offset of the signal processing circuitry, which includes the preamplifier,
the emission clamp circuit, the integrator, and the lin/log generator. (See
sheet 7 of the Main Systems board (System Controller) schematic, P/N N041-
9000).
Perform the electronic calibration using a dual-channel analog

oscilloscope.
Preparing for the Alignment

Remove the AAnalyst cover and the back panel (four screws), and then
remove the protective (component) cover (also four screws) to easily access
the test points and potentiometers which are to be adjusted (see Figure 5-13).
Also refer to sheet 7 of the system control board schematic (P/N N041-9000)
when performing the electronic alignment.
NOTE: It is possible, but somewhat difficult and not

recommended, to access the test points by removing the fan
assembly from the spectrometer side panel, as shown in Figure
5-11.
CHANGING PARAMETERS: When you must make

parameter settings or choose the spectrometer mode, you can
utilize the keyboard for an instrument so equipped, or the
IEEE commands.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Electronic Calibration (Alignment) 5-29
Figure 5-13. Test Points and Potentiometers used in the Electronic

Alignment.
Alignment Procedure
Before beginning the step-by step offset adjustment (alignment)
procedure, place the spectrometer in the AA− BG mode and set it up with Cu
standard conditions.
Also remove the PMT (photomultiplier) cable from J7-1 on the system
control board (see figure 7-1). Then proceed to perform the electrical
alignment (steps 1- 20, below).
NOTE: If noisy signals are obtained, there could be a poor motor ground.
1. Make certain that the D2 lamp is aligned; if it isn't, perform the D2

alignment procedure, which is also included in this chapter.
2. Set up channel 1 of the oscilloscope for a vertical gain of 5 mV per division

and a time base of 1 msec/division.
3. Connect channel 1 of the scope to TP71 (PREAMP) − see Figure 5-13.
Connect channel 1 ground to TP 79 (GND_A) .
4. Set up channel 2 of the scope for 2 V per division. Then connect channel 2
of the scope between TP77 (EMISSION CLAMP) and TP79 (GND_A).
5. Refer to Figures 5-14 and 5-15. Then adjust potentiometer R728, the
Emission Clamp potentiometer (see Figure 5-13) until the preamplifier
signal (over the emission clamp) is brought down to zero, i.e. until the
preamplifier signal appears as in Figure 5-15.
6. Adjust R709, the Preamp Offset potentiometer, so that the sample and
reference signals are at the same level, as shown in Figure 5-16.
7. Connect channel 1 of the scope to TP70 (INTEG).
8. Set up channel 1 of the scope for a vertical gain of 5 mV per division. (Do
not change the time base of 1 msec/division.)
9. Adjust R719, the Integrator Skew potentiometer, for minimal slope*.
Figure 5-17 shows what the slope could be before adjustment, and Figure
5-18a illustrates what the slope should be after adjustment (of
potentiometer R719).
10. Adjust potentiometer R706 , the Integrator Offset potentiometer, for zero
offset at the dark time (emission clamp). Figure 5-18b illustrates what
the offset should be after adjustment of potentiometer R706.
11. Reconnect the photomultiplier cable to J7-1, and set the standard
conditions for copper at 324.8 nm.
12. Go into the BG mode.
13. Then press the Continuous key (absorbance is continuously updated) and
autozero.
14. Block the beam and adjust potentiometer R734 for an absorbance value of
3.0 +0.1A.
15. Insert a 2.0 A neutral-density filter (P/N N037-1513) in the beam.
16. Adjust Lin/Log potentiometer R734 until you obtain the absorbance
specified on the filter to appear on the computer screen (or the AAnalyst
display).
*If the sample and reference beam slopes are not zero, adjust the
sample beam slope for zero.
17. Insert a 1A, and then a 0.2A neutral-density filter in the beam. You
should obtain 1.0 ±.1A for the 1A neutral-density filter, and 0.2 ±.02A for
the 0.2 neutral-density filter.
18. With no neutral-density filter in the beam, go into the AA mode and
autozero.
19. Reinsert the neutral-density filters. The values you obtain in the AA
mode should be the same values you obtained in the BG mode within
0.040 A.
20. Go into the AA− BG mode and insert the 1.0A neutral-density filter into
the beam. You should get less than 10 counts. (10 counts =.010A)
If the specs above have been met, the electronic alignment has been
completed.
FIigure 5-14. Preamp Signal Before Adjusting Emission-clamp Pot R728.

Figure 5-15. Preamp Signal After Adjusting Pot R728.
Figure 5-16. Reference and Sample Signals seen on the same level After
Adjusting Pot R709.
Figure 5-17.. Slope of the Integrator Signal Before Adjusting Pot R719
(skew pot) or R706 (offset pot).
Figure 5-18a. Slope of Integrator signal after Adjusting Pot R719.

Figure 5-18b. (Correct) Slope of Integrator Signal after Adjusting Pot R706.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Peaking the HCL and D2 Lamp Signals (Lamp Orientation) 5-35
Peaking the HCL and D2 Lamp Signals (Lamp

Orientation)
NOTE 1: The procedure for peaking (maximizing) the HCL
lamp orientation only applies to aligning a spectrometer with a
single lamp holder. The six-lamp turret of the System 100/300
is self -adjusting.
The procedure for maximizing the D2 sample signal applies to
all AAnalyst 100/300 alignments.
NOTE 2: A second (alternative) method for peaking the HCL

is given on Page 5-36.
Peaking the HCL

1. Install a lead (Pb) hollow cathode lamp. Turn the AAnalyst power on; it
will initialize with Pb standard conditions.
2. With the oscilloscope connected between TP71 (PREAMP) and TP79
(GND) of the system control board, and with the spectrometer in the AA-
BG mode, note the appearance of the AA sample and reference signal on
the scope.
3. Adjust the horizontal and vertical HCL lamp-mount adjustment knobs
(see Figure 3-13) until you maximize the reference-beam portion of the
AA signal.
4. Refer to Figures 5-1 and 5-8 and tweak the height and side-to-side
adjustment screws of sample flat M7 to see if any improvement can be
made in the amplitude of the sample-beam portion of the AA signal
(see Figure 5-19). If the sample beam portion of the signal was already
maximized, you will not be able to improve the alignment of sample flat
M7.
Figure 5-19. Peaking the Sample-Beam Portion of the AA Signal.

5-36 Optical/Electrical Alignment Peaking the HCL and D2 Lamp Signals (Lamp Orientation)
Alternative Method for Peaking the HCL

1. Install a lead (Pb) hollow cathode lamp. Turn the AAnalyst power on and
allow it to initialize with Pb standard conditions.
2. Change the AAnalyst mode from absorbance to emission.
3. Turn the (Pb) lamp back on.
4. Monitor the system energy.
5. Raise the instrument cover and remove the photometer cover.
6. Locate Flat M7 in Figure 5-1, and tweak the height and side-to-side
adjustment screws of M7 (see Figure 5-8) for maximum energy and
counts.
Caution Use extreme care when working near the optics, as just touching a
mirror surface can destroy the optic or reduce its performance at
low-UV wavelengths. (It is strongly recommended that you wear
gloves when installing the optics).
Use extra care when working near the chopper (optic M3 in Figure
5-1 of the Service Manual), especially when power is applied.
Warning
7. As a final check that the HCL has been peaked:

• Change the AAnalyst's mode back to absorbance.
• Make certain that the AAnalyst is initialized with lead (Pb) standard
conditions.
• Cover the monochromator entrance baffle (the one shown just above
the chopper in Figure 5-1) with a white card.
• Check for coincidence of the sample and reference beams (images) by
slowly blocking (and unblocking) the beam path in the sample
compartment.
8. Remove the card from the baffle, and replace the photometer and
instrument covers.
Peaking the Deuterium (D2) Lamp

NOTE: Before proceeding with this alignment, lift the
spectrometer cover and remove the deuterium lamp assembly
(see Figure 5-20). Then make certain that the distance
between the top plate of the lamp assembly, and the plate of
the bracket assembly that secures the lamp, is approximately
1/8 inch. If it isn't 1/8 inch, use screws X, Y, and Z to make it
approximately 1/8 inch. Then replace the deuterium lamp
assembly and begin the procedure, below.
Caution When you replace the lamp assembly, make certain that you
position the lamp wires in the cutout beneath the large plate of the
lamp assembly. If you don't, the wiring can become frayed,
resulting in damage.
NOTE: The procedure for replacing the deuterium lamp is

included in Chapter 5 of the Hardware Manual, P/N 0993-
6088.
1. Set up the standard conditions for copper (including slit).
2. Go to BG mode, and after warming the lamp for several minutes, press
Energy.
3. Adjust the X, Y, and Z alignment screws (see Figure 5-20) to obtain

maximum energy/counts as described in the paragraph, below.
Obtaining Maximum Energy
a. Tweak screws X and Y to obtain the maximum energy.
b. Rotate screw Z (which raises and lowers the lamp) 1/4 turn either
clockwise or counterclockwise.
c. Rotate screw X to obtain maximum energy.
d. Rotate screw Y to "tweak up" the energy.
e. Again observe the counts/energy. If you have a higher number of

counts than you did before you rotated screw Z, repeat steps b, c, and
d, rotating screw Z another 1/4 turn in the same direction.
NOTE: If you have less energy than you did before you first
rotated screw Z 1/4 turn, rotate screw Z 1/2 turn in the
opposite direction, and repeat steps c, d, and e.
5-38 Optical/Electrical Alignment Peaking the HCL and D2 Lamp Signals (Lamp Orientation)
Figure 5-20. Adjusting the Deuterium Lamp Position.

f. Repeat steps b, c, and d until the energy/counts begins to decrease.

Then turn screw Z a slight amount (∼ 1/8 turn) in the opposite
direction that you used to maximize counts/energy.
g. Place a white card in the center of the sample compartment and note
the positions of the D2 and HCL beams. To complete the peaking
procedure, if the beams are not coincident, tweak screws X, Y and
Z to center the D2 beam in the HCL beam. Figure 5-21 illustrates
the "ideal" appearance of the coincident beams with the D2 lamp
properly peaked.
Figure 5-21. Ideal Appearance of Coincident HCL and D2 Beams.

5-40 Optical/Electrical Alignment Replacing the Turret Harness (P/N N041-0062)
Replacing the Turret Harness (P/N N041-0062)

Replacement Procedure
1. If possible, initialize the turret, and verify that the turret has been
aligned. See "Aligning the Turret" earlier in this chapter.
If it is not possible to initialize the turret, manually rotate the turret
motor until lamp position 1 is in the beam.
2. Power down the AAnalyst and disconnect it from line power.
There could be high voltage present on the turret board.
Warning
3. Lift and remove the large instrument cover, and remove the instrument's
rear cover.
4. Make certain that there are no lamps in the turret. Then use a small
Phillips screwdriver to remove the six screws that secure the turret board
assembly to the turret. (See Figure 5-22.) Support the assembly when you
remove the sixth screw.
5. Remove the high-voltage and flex-cable connectors from the turret board
and remove the board assembly.
6. Remove the two stick-on cable clamps and the cable tie securing the cable
assembly (see Figure 5-22), and pass the cable assembly out through the
turret assembly. Unplug the cable assembly from the System-Control
board and discard the defective assembly.
7. Remove the gearing cover (see Figure 5-23) and decouple the brass gear
from the turret shaft (see Figure 5-24). Don't shift the gear's position
on the shaft.
8. Rotate the turret counter clockwise so that position 5 is in the beam, i.e.,
the "6" engraved on the turret is at the top of the turret.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Replacing the Turret Harness (P/N N041-0062) 5-41
9. Pass the (replacement) turret harness assembly (P/N N041-0062) through

the hole (near the center of the turret) that is in the 3:00 o'clock position
(see Figure 5-12).
NOTE: Make certain that the flat cable (inside the wrapped
assembly) is routed under the optical base when you pass it
through the turret.
10. Position the tie (P/N 0998-7114) under the optic motor screw (as shown in
Figure 5-22), and secure the replacement cable assembly with the tie.
Then secure the replacement cable to the transformer bracket with two
cable clamps (P/N 0998-4747) as shown in Figure 5-22.
11. Rotate the turret assembly clockwise (looking from the front of the
spectrometer) until you reach the end of the cable (approximately three
full turret revolutions).
12. Connect the high-voltage (P7) and flex cable (P8) connectors of the
replacement cable to the turret-board assembly.
NOTE: To make certain that there is a smooth turret rotation

between positions 1 and 6 (the extremes), rotate the turret
clockwise to position 6 and then counterclockwise back to
position 1 several times.
13. Then rotate the turret counterclockwise until lamp position 1 is in the
beam.
14. Reinstall the turret board assembly onto the turret. Make sure to align
the board “keys” (see Figure 5-22) in the turret slots.
15. Connect the two free connectors of the cable assembly to J8 and J19 of
the System-Control board.
16. Re-couple the brass gear to the turret shaft after making certain that the
turret is still in position 1. The position flag must be in position 1 as
shown in detail 2 of Figure 5-24.
17. Replace the gearing (See Figure 5-23), the instrument cover and the back
cover, lower the instrument cover. Then replace the instrument power
connector in the wall receptacle.
18. Power up the instrument and check that the turret initializes correctly.
Then let the AAnalyst set up lamps in position 1 and 6. If it doesn’t set
them up correctly, perform the turret alignment procedure described
earlier in this chapter.
Turret Board Assembly Securing Screw (1 of 6)
J8 J7
Keys (3)
Turret-to-Shaft Securing Screw

Slot to Engage Shoulder Screw on Turret Shaft
Turret
(Rear View)
Pos
P7 Pos 5
6
Turret Board
P8
Assembly
Pos Turret Shaft
4
Shoulder
Pos Screw
1
Shrink Tubing Pos
to protect cables Pos 3
passed through selected 2
Turret Feed-Through Hole
Hi-Voltage
Cable
Tie (P/N 0998-7114) Looker Flex (Flat) Cable
Floating Wheel Floating

Wheel
Shrink Tubing Tie

protecting cables (P/N 0998-7114)
Shrink Tubing passed through secured by Motor-
protecting cables Floating-Wheel Mounting Screw
passed through Shrink Tubing (See Detail)
Floating-Wheel protecting cables
Left-side, secured in tie-wrap
Shrink Tubing Optic-Motor Optic Motor
protecting cables Mounting Screw
secured in tie-wrap
Cable Clamp (2)
Detail (P/N 0998-4747)
Hi-Voltage Cable and Looker Flex (Flat) Cable
Figure 5-22. Removing the Turret Board Assy. And the Turret Cable Assy.
Optical/Electrical Alignment Replacing the Turret Harness (P/N N041-0062) 5-43
Gearing Cover
(P/N N041-1061)
Screw (2)
(P/N 0991-9201)
Figure 5-23. Removing the Turret Gearing Cover.

Rear View of Turret Stepper Motor Turret Stepper Motor

Motor Worm-Gear
Securing Setscrew
Motor Worm Gear
Motor Mount Screw (1 of 2)

Position Looker
Home Looker
Spring Washer
Floating-Wheel Bushings Bushings Looker and
(Hub) Flag-Wheel
Clamps Assembly
Flag-Wheel
Assembly
Securing
Setscrew
(1 of 2)
Spring
Washer
E-Ring Clamp
Flat Washers
Flat Washer Spring Washer
Shaft Gear-
Securing Screw Flat Washer
Shaft Gear Shaft- Housing
(Brass) Gear Pin Stop
Detail 1 Detail 2 Position 1 Flag

2 in Looker
3 2
3
4 1
Position
4 Looker
6
Home
Looker 5 6
5
Actual Block
Turret Shaft Point
Position 5 Flag Home Flag
Home Flag with Shaft Gear Correct Flag-Wheel Positions

Fully CCW (at stop) after Initialization
Figure 5-24. Turret Gearing, Lookers and Flag Wheel.

PC Board Electronics 6
Overview
In this chapter, we include circuit descriptions for all the PC boards in the
AAnalyst 100/300 Spectrometers, with the exceptions of the fuse board (P/N
N041-9074) and the keyboard/display board (P/N N040-1054). For those
boards we include only drawings, which is all that is needed to service them.
The AAnalyst 100/300 PC board schematics and board layouts have been
included in Chapter 9. Most of the schematics have more than one sheet.
The components on a sheet are numbered so that the sheet on which they
appear is immediately apparent when you see the designation of the
component in the circuit description (e.g., resistor R102 appears on sheet 1,
while TP305 is a test point shown on sheet 3. The first numeral of the
component designation is the sheet number.)
When a signal is directed from one sheet of a PC board schematic to

another, the sheet number that the signal is directed to is included alongside
the signal designation. Alongside the connector pins are the labels for the
device the connector is to contact.
NOTE: We include in Chapter 5 (Optical/Electrical Alignment)

the analog-offset adjustment procedures (which eliminate offset
from the output of the signal-processing circuitry).
Also included in Chapter 5 is the procedure for the chopper
LED alignment (phasing).
6-2 PC Board Electronics Overview
Both the AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300 Spectrometers contain seven
circuit boards. Four of the boards are common to both the AAnalyst 300 and
the AAnalyst 100; there are three which are used only on the AAnalyst 300,
and three are used only on the AAnalyst 100. The names of the (tested)
circuit boards and their part numbers are given in the next paragraph.
Figure 6-1 is an electrical block diagram of the AAnalyst 100/300; the boards
for both AAnalyst 100 and 300 and some of their interconnections are shown
in the figure.
Included with the schematics and board layouts in Chapter 9 are the
AAnalyst 300 Interconnect Drawing N041-0010 and the AAnalyst 100
Drawing N040-0010; they include the inputs and outputs from-and-to each
PC board.
Boards Common to the AAnalyst 100 and the AAnalyst 300
• system control board (N041-9004)
• HCL/PMT/D2 WU board (N041-9054)
• burner interface board (N041-9064)
• fuse board (N041-9074)

Boards used only on the AAnalyst 300
• flame control board (N041-9014)
• motor control board - four-channel (N041-9044)
• turret board (N041-9094)

Boards used only on the AAnalyst 100
• manual gas-control board (N041-9084)
• motor control board - two-channel (N041-9124)
• keyboard/display board (N040-1054)

PC Board Electronics Overview 6-3
6-4 PC Board Electronics System Control Board (N041 - 9004)
System Control Board (N041 - 9004)

General Design Principles
NOTE: The single-point ground for the system control board is
not shown on the schematic drawing (N041-9000). Refer to
sheet 2. The GND_D, GND_A and the chassis ground on J3-5
and J12-12 are connected together at a single point on the
system control board. The point is at a board-mounting hole,
where the ground bar for the spectrometer is picked up. (The
mounting hole is in the middle of the system control board,
towards the front of the spectrometer, and behind the lamp
(WU) board (P/N N041-9054).)
The GND_D and GND_A grounds are on the inner layers of the
board, and are connected at the mounting hole mentioned
above.
The chasssis ground on the System Control board includes:
1) the mounting pins for the connectors located at the rear of
the spectrometer, and 2) the standoffs for the shield
surrounding the signal-processing circuitry (see sheet 7 of
schematic N041-9000).
The chassis ground can be used when checking digital
signals and power supplies, but not when checking
analog signals. There are many points specified on the
schematic which are tied to the analog ground (which must be
used when monitoring analog signals).
The system-control board circuitry has been designed with emphasis on:
• allowing one board to be used for both the automatic (AAnalyst 300) and
manual (AAnalyst 100) instruments
• taking advantage of the new surface-mount technology while maintaining

compatibility with existing AA system controllers (i.e., so previously
tested circuitry and firmware can still be utilized).
• the board serving as the interconnect and power-distribution circuit for

the lamp(s) and motor drivers. (The lamp (WU) and motor-driver boards
plug directly into this system control board using DIN connectors, thereby
reducing the amount of system harnessing required.)
PC Board Electronics System Control Board (N041 - 9004) 6-5
Circuitry (Schematic) Organization

Each of the nine sheets of the system-control board schematic (which is in
chapter 9) includes the electronics that support a board task. The titles of
the circuitry on the nine sheets of schematic N041-9000, and the sheet
numbers, are listed below:
• microprocessor and memory circuitry - sheet 1
• IEEE control circuitry - sheet 2
• motor-control circuitry - sheet 3
• keyboard and display interface circuitry - sheet 4
• lamp and identification control circuitry - sheet 5
• external-interface circuits - sheet 6
• signal-processing circuit - sheet 7
• A/D conversion and control circuits - sheet 8
• power supplies - sheet 9
Microprocessor and Memory Circuitry - Sheet 1
The processor (U14) for this design is the Motorola CMOS 68000 which
has a clock frequency of 8 MHz. (See sheet 1 of the system control board
schematic.)
Reset for system control is generated by the TI voltage supervisor TL7705

(U16). C101, a 33 µF capacitor, is the component that determines the width
of the reset pulse. For the C101 value of 33 µF, the reset pulse width is
424.24 msec. The pulse width is determined using the following equation:
4
pulse width (in seconds) = 1.3 x 10 x C
A LED (light-emitting diode) with integral resistor CR10 (see sheet 1)

provides a visual indication of the HALT status of the processor (U14). In
normal operation, the LED is extinguished. If the LED is on continuously,
the processor has detected a double-bus fault. This can only occur if an
illegal address or instruction is detected during the interrupt service of an
illegal address or instruction.
All of the address decoding for the chip-selects, read and write signals,
interrupt decoding, and gain switching for the photomultiplier (PMT) signal
is done in the Xilinx (U19). There are 24 chip-selects, 7 interrupt sources, 18
control lines, and portions of the address bus and data bus that are handled
by the Xilinx. The Xilinx is configured on power up in the traditional manner,
i.e. using the serial configuration PROM (U18). The system reset is held off
from the processor by the DONE/PG* pin (pin 55) until the Xilinx is
configured.
NOTE: The asterisk (*) alongside the PG* designation indicates

that the signal is active-low. Another way of indicating active-low
has been to to draw a line over the designation. However,
throughout this manual a trailing asterisk (or a trailing
underscore) is used to indicate active-low.
The memory for the system control board is divided into the following
three parts:
• the system PROM (U10)

• the system RAM (U11 and U12)
• the non-volatile RAM - [NVRAM](U13).
The three parts of the memory are described in the three paragraphs below:
The PROM (U10) is an AMD 27C2048. It is a one-time programmable

(OTP) part that provides a configuration of 128K X 16. It is a 150-nsec part.
Jumper SP10 provides a possible upgrade path to U10, which can be used if
the firmware is to be expanded. The second position of the jumper (1-2),
connects the system R/W* line to the PGM pin. This is done to allow the use
of a ROM monitor in place of an ICE (in-circuit emulator). As long as the
VPP pin remains at ground potential, there is no danger of affecting the
program space in the PROM.
Jumper SP11 is provided for factory testing. It provides the ability to

disconnect the chip-select from the PROM.
The system RAM includes U11 & U12. They are 128K X 8 parts, and
they are connected to provide word-wide access.
The NVRAM (U13) is a chip that is configured as 32K X 8. This space

only resides on the upper half of the data bus, which means the firmware
must ensure only byte accesses at even addresses. This non-volatile RAM
contains a real-time clock. When the manual instrument (AAnalyst 100) is
used without a computer, the clock will be used to time-stamp the printouts
of the data.
The firmware normally defaults to IEEE address 7, but there will be a

command that can be executed via a PC to change it.
IEEE Controller - Sheet 2
The IEEE controller for the AAnalyst 100/300 has been made simpler
through the use of the TNT4882C controller chip (U20); it is is a single-chip
solution to bus control. This means that the controller and the bus drivers
are included in the one chip (U20). U20 also has the capability of operating
at the higher transfer rate of 8 Mbytes per second when the high-speed mode
of the chip is invoked.
The LED (CR20) on the service request line (SRQ at J12-10 - refer to
sheet 2) also has an integral resistor. The LED is used to determine the state
of controller U20 during data transfers. When the led is lit, the AAnalyst 100
or 300 spectrometer is indicating that data is ready to be transferred to a PC
via IEEE. If the instrument is an AAnalyst 100 (i.e., it does not have a flame
board N041-9014), only the system control board can be requesting service
when the LED is lit. If the instrument is a AAnalyst 300, it will not be
obvious whether the flame board or the system control board is requesting
service.
For the (manual) AAnalyst 100, the LED remaining lit means that the
system control board is ready to transfer data to a PC. For the (automatic)
AAnalyst 300, with the IEEE flame board, the LED being lit indicates that
the spectrometer has data ready. It will not be obvious which of the devices
(system-control board or the flame board) is requesting service.
The IEEE connector at the rear of the instrument is shown on sheet 2 of

the schematic as J12. For the AAnalyst 300 (with the IEEE flame board),
data and control lines from the flame-control board are also connected to J12
from J2 (see the upper-left of sheet 2). J2 is the connector that provides
IEEE access to the automated flame control board for the automated
instrument. ( J2 is a 26-pin header for a ribbon cable, and eliminates the
need for two IEEE cables as well as two IEEE connectors. For the AAnalyst
100 (where there is no IEEE Flame board), there is no cable connected to J2.
Initially the instrument’s IEEE address is 7. The AAnalyst 100

instrument’s IEEE address can be changed using a diagnostic display and the
keypad. The AAnalyst 300's address can be changed via IEEE, and is stored
in BRAM for future use. The flame control board’s address starts at 8, and
since no BRAM is available on the flame-control board, an address other than
the default address must be re-entered each time the instrument is started
up. Also, because the IEEE address for the manual and automated
instruments is chosen as described above, the need for dipswitches is
eliminated.
The controller (U20) is packaged as a 100-pin, plastic-quad flat pack

(PQFP). Each side of the chip has a filter for the VCC, and ground pins
which are found on that side. The clock for the chip is 8 Mhz; this is the
system clock and comes from the application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC)
U80. See sheet 8 of the system control board schematic (N041-9000).
Motor-Control Circuitry - Sheet 3
Sheet 3 of schematic N041-9000 is the motor-interface portion of the

system control board schematic.
Either the standard two-motor AAnalyst 100 motor control board (P/N
N041-9124), or the four-motor AAnalyst 300 motor-control board (P/N N041-
9044), interfaces to J1 on the system control board. The slit and grating
motors are motors present on both motor control boards; the turret and optic
(HCL toroid M1) motors are present only on the AAnalyst 300 motor control
board N041-9044, which is used with instruments with an automatic turret.
NOTE: Both the four-motor board schematic (N041-9040) and

the two-motor board electronics (N041-9120) are discussed in
this chapter, and the electrical schematics of both boards are
included in chapter 9.
For the standard AAnalyst 100 therefore, the interface ports for the
turret and optic motors (see sheet 3 of the system control board schematic)
are not utilized.
The interface ports for all the motors are realized using latches and
buffers. They are not bidirectional, however, and the firmware must keep an
accurate image, in RAM, of the state of each port.
As requested by our service engineers, each motor and “looker” has its
own connector and harness. Also, the connectors are not “keyed” so that a
generic motor or “looker” can be used in any position. To make sure that you
connect the right device into the right connector, check the silk screen on the
system control board. You can then easily identify the correct motor (or
looker) function. (The firmware only moves one motor at a time.)
At the bottom of sheet 3 of N041-9000 you can follow the connections

from J1 on the motor-control board to the motors as listed:
J14 grating motor assembly

J15 slit motor assembly
J16 turret motor assembly (connected for standard AAnalyst 300)
J17 optic motor assembly (connected for standard AAnalyst 300)
All the motor and “looker” connectors are AMPMODU type connectors.
The 249 Ω resistors at the top, right of sheet 3 are the current-limiting
resistors for the source diodes in the optical sensors. Approximately 12 mA is
provided to the LEDS.
The 4.75 kΩ resistors (R304,5,6,7, and 9) at the inputs of the buffer U32
are the pull-ups for the open-collector outputs of the optical sensors. The 4.75
kΩ resistors also provide a default open condition for the sensors if the
sensors are disconnected.
The 0.1-µF capacitors (C33 through C37) reduce any high-frequency noise
that is present on the sensor lines. The optical-sensor circuits receive
feedback from the sensors for initialization and position sensing. The
feedback connections can be seen above connector J1 on the left side of the
schematic. They provide signals to the system board CPU (P/N N041-9124).
Keyboard and Display Interface - Sheet 4
The keyboard and display interface module is only used on the stand-
alone (manual) spectrometer (the AAnalyst 100).
Refer to sheet 4 of the System Control board schematic for the keyboard
and display circuitry. The keyboard decoder (U40) and the display are
controlled with 6800-type synchronous bus cycles. They are controlled that
way because the response of the keyboard and display is much slower than
the response of other devices in the system.
The stand-alone (AAnalyst 100) display is a two-line by 20-character

vacuum-flourescent (VF) display. Characters are written in ASCII through
buffer U41 at the upper-right of the sheet. The 100-Ω resistors of resistor
pack (RP) 40, and the 3-terminal filters on each data line, reduce any
overshoot/undershoot signals to the display logic, and reduce the radio-
frequency interference (RFI) components.
The signal used to latch the data into the display is DISP-WR-B (active
high) found on buffer U45 and jack J6-45 (Look beneath the 3-terminal
filters LC-41 to LC-48) on sheet 4. Buffer U45 is configured as a uni-
directional device to buffer the off-board signals. Buffers U46, U47, and U48
are used to control the LEDs found on the keypad module. Bits 3, 4, and 5 of
Buffer U48 select the modes 0, 1, or 2 (FURNACE, FLAME, or FIAS??) for
the system. The LEDS indicate the mode and parameter selected by the
operator.
The 249-Ω resistor packs (RP 42 and RP43) are the current-limiting
resistors for the LEDS. Each LED draws 12.65 ma, resulting in a 40-mW
dissipation for each resistor in the pack. Since the packs are 1-watt packages,
only 10 of the available resistors are being used in either pack at one time.
The + 5 V and ground pins on J6 are all that is used to power the
keyboard and display module. Because the maximum current is 487 mA
when all of the display LEDs are on, multiple pins are used . (See J6-18
through 24, and J6-11 through 17.) The + 5 V and ground connection is made
with a 60-pin ribbon connector (P/N N041-0063).
The keypad decoder (U40) is shown at the upper left of sheet 4 of the
system control board schematic. The decoder is a National Semiconductor
MM74C923WM, and does most of the work. U40 is designed for keypads in a
4 × 5 matrix, but is expanded for a larger matrix with the aid of external
components.
Since the AAnalyst 100 keypad is in a 4 × 10 matrix, we have used the

following components to expand the decoder:
• diodes CR400 − CR404

• resistor pack RP 41 (whch consists of twelve, 100-KΩ resistors)
• AND gates U42 A through D
• latches U43 A and B
• tristate inverter U44.
Decoder U40 scans the matrix at the rate (600 Hz), as determined by the
value of capacitor C402 (0.1 µF). When a key closure is detected, the scan of
the matrix stops, and the DATA pin is asserted high.
The upper bit of the key code is then latched in, as is the interrupt to the
processor (KB-DA-IRQ*). The firmware then determines which key was
pressed by reading the data on the bus.
The decoder read will then clear the interrupt line and start the internal
oscillator (C4020), so that the keypad-matrix scan can restart.
Key debouncing is handled internally by decoder U40. The debounce time

(50 ms) is determined by the value of capacitor C401 (4.7 µF). There are
additional key closures that can be seen on the bottom of sheet 6 of the
system control board schematic (S1-EMTR, S2-EMTR, and S3-EMTR and
REM-EMTR) that are decoded by U40. (See X1, X2, X3, and X0 at the upper-
left of sheet 4). These signals are coupled through optical isolator U61 and
diodes CR 60 through CR63 (see sheet 6) to protect the system control board.
With these additional closures, there are a total of 38 key positions used.
Lamp and Identity (ID) Control - Sheet 5
This sheet includes the circuitry that provides analog and digital control
of the following:
• HCL (hollow-cathode lamp)

• EDL
• Deuterium (D2) lamp
• PMT (photomultiplier tube)
The circuitry shown on sheet 5 provides both analog and digital control of
the devices bulleted above. The analog portion of the lamp and ID circuitry is
in the upper, left corner of the sheet, and is used in both the manual
(AAnalyst 100) and automated (AAnalyst 300) versions of the instrument.
U501, an AD7228, is an octal 8-bit D/A converter with internal latches. It

can provide 0 to 10 volts on each of the devices bulleted.
Each internal digital-to-analog converter (DAC) is selected through a 3-bit

address code, and latched in with the LAMP-D2A-WE* signal (see the top,
left signal designation on sheet 5). These DACs also require a voltage
reference; that voltage reference determines the output range of the DAC and
is provided by U500, a 10-V reference chip. The 10-V reference is also used in
the signal processing circuit (see sheet 7 of the system control board
schematic).
One quarter (¼ ) of op-amps U508 and U509 (opamps OP400G) buffers

each of the DAC outputs to the devices bulleted. Also, activating analog
switches U507 will pulse the HCL and D2 signals. Pulsing the lamp signals
is done for the following two reasons:
• The signals must be turned off, for the emission clamp, during
the time the flame is sensed .
• In the AA-BG mode each lamp is only on for ½ of the chopper cycle.
NOTE: An external recorder can be connected to J10-3 and
J10-4 if you are not using a printer.
The remaining circuitry on sheet 5 is for digital control of the turret

board, and for identifying coded lamps. The LSEL signals from buffer U502
select the lamp that receives primary HCL current, and the WSEL signals
select the lamp that receives warmup HCL current. One of each (LSEL and
WSEL) can be selected at a particular time; the actual high-voltage
switching is done on the turret PCB, discussed later in these circuit
descriptions.
NOTE: Since there is no turret board in the AAnalyst 100,

buffer U502 is only used in the AAnalyst 300.
Each lamp contains an add-only memory chip (DS2502) which contains

data about the lamp. In order to interrogate a lamp, a 2-way dialog must
occur between the processor and the lamp. These data lines are shown at the
inputs to buffer U505. (See J8 at the lower, left corner of sheet 5.)
The data input to buffer U505 is in serial format, and therefore there
must be some control over the direction of the transfer. Bit 6 of buffer U502
is used to select the direction of that communication. That bit controls the
tri-state condition of latch U504, and a transceiver on the turret board. The
firmware keeps track of the necessary direction and selects the output latch
(U504) for writing, or the buffer (U505) for reading.
Buffer U506 at the bottom of sheet 5 allows the firmware to read 2

miscellaneous bits of data:
• DSYNC is a pulse that comes from the ASIC on Sheet 8. It is used to

determine whether the data being read is sample data or reference data.
This signal is generated as one of the timing bits that are generated by
U80 via the chopper signal.
• BUSY comes from the display (AAnalyst 100 only). It indicates whether
the display can be written to or not.
External Interface - Sheet 6
The circuitry on sheet 6 provides access to the following functions:

• remote read
• manual gasbox PCB interlock inputs and control outputs
• parallel printer port
• RS-232 serial port
Note the optically isolated signals from the back of the instrument at the
bottom of sheet 6. These signals accept key closures from external devices.
The top input is marked REM-READ (remote read). It is used to interface to
the furnace power supply and the FIAS. There is one internal and one
external line for REM-READ. The internal line can be used to directly
connect to an attached furnace power supply via the IEEE ribbon cable.
Each external input has a 332-Ω resistor (R61 - R64) which current-limits
the LED in the optical isolator (U61) to 12 mA when the switch is closed.
Input buffers U62, U64 and output Latches U63 go to the manual gas-box
board (AAnalyst 100). This allows the microprocessor to read the interlock
status from the manual gas box PCB, and provide that information to the
firmware or accessory PC via IEEE.
The microprocessor can control three functions of the gas box. First, it
can initiate the ignition sequence with the FLAME-CTL line. Second, it can
initiate a swap of the oxidant gas with the N2O-CTL line. Lastly, it can start
the sequence to bleed the gases from the lines with the BLEED-CTL line.
The actual timing and sequencing for the three functions is done by the
Xilinx circuit found on the manual gas box control PCB.
Buffer U63 also provides an optional line to control a solenoid for the D2
background corrector. At low wavelengths, the D2 signal is very strong and
was attenuated with a screen in the Model 3300. This can also be done here.
In the new design, however, there is dynamic gain switching for both the D2
and HCL signals that the previous design didn’t have. This gain switching
has proven to be effective at low wavelengths. This output will be used to
control a conventional attenuator screen.Controller U60 is at the top of sheet
6. It contains the drivers and intelligence to implement a Centronics parallel
interface and serial port. In older instruments, the printer was connected to
a serial port. However, since printers are no longer providing serial port
capabilities as a standard feature, a Centronics parallel port is provided.
Connector J9 is a standard 25-pin, D-shell, compatible with parallel printer
cables designed for the IBM PC.
The other function of U60 is as an ACE or asynchronous communications

element. This is used in conjunction with RS-232 interface U65 to implement
a full RS232 port. This is another way to gain access to the instrument (e.g.,
by using a modem or PC).
J22 is a 9-pin, D-shell connector that should make the connection to a PC

simple. The clock for the port is the 8-MHz system clock. All baud-rate
selection and interrupt-generation is handled in the firmware initialization of
the chip.
U60 was designed to be used in a PC. Therefore many of the signal

names and functions of the ACE are functions of a data terminal (DTE).
Since Perkin-Elmer instruments have been designed in the past as data
communication equipment (DCE), some of the signal names at the connector
are different from the labels found on U60. In Table 6-1 we include the
conversions of the signal names from DTE format to DCE format. The
conversions were obtained from the EIA standard document, Rev C page 10.
Table 6-1. Signal Name Conversion from DTE to DCE Format
Standard Signal Instrument (DCE)

Mnemonic Name Input or Output
RxD Received Data Output
TxD Transmitted Data Input
RTS Request to Send Input
CTS Clear to Send Output
DSR Data Set Ready Output
DTR Data Terminal Ready Input
RLSD R’cvd Line Signal Detector Output
RI Ring Indicator Output
The spectrometer is designed to operate as a DCE when attached to a PC

(DTE), and also must work when attached to a modem. The last 2 signals
listed above are used when the spectrometer is connected to a modem, while
the remaining signals are used when the spectrometer is communicating
with a PC.
In order to insure proper communication with either type of device, the

following translations had to be made. This also allows the use of a straight-
through cable when connected to the PC, and will require a null modem when
used with a modem.
Table 6-2. Translation made to Ensure Proper Communication of the AAnalyst

with a Modem or PC.
Standard Controller Connector Connector

Mnemonic Name Name Pin No.
RxD Sin0 TXD 3
TxD Sout0 RXD 2
RTS RTS0* CTS* 8
CTS CTS0* RTS* 7
DSR DSR0* DTR* 4
DTR DTR0* DSR* 6
RLSD RLSD0* RLSD* 1
RI RI0* RI* 9
Signal Processing - Sheet 7
The circuitry on this sheet is controlled by the ASIC (U80) on sheet 8. This
circuitry accepts the output from the photomultiplier tube (PMT) at J7-1
and J7-2, and helps the ASIC digitize the signal to a 15-bit resolution.
The PMT coax cable normally conducts the output current via a coaxial
connector (J7) to the PCB. However, a simulated signal from U700 is
available for adjustment and test purposes.
To accomplish the switch to the simulated signal, remove the coaxial PMT
connection and move jumper SP70 to between positions 1 and 3 (from
positions 1 and 2). The simulator develops a fixed signal which is typical of a
good PMT signal. By switching to the simulated signal, you can separate
electronic problems from optical problems. SIM-SAMPLE and SIM-REF are
the timed, 5-volt signals that produce the simulated waveform.
NOTE: The preamp circuit is normally shielded with a

galvanized steel cover. The cover should be kept in place even
when doing the initial circuit alignment.
During normal operation, the PMT current is applied to the preamplifier.

The current varies depending on the part of the chopper cycle being sampled.
The “cycle” refers to a complete revolution of the chopper mirror in the

optical path. It is the chopper that determines the timing for the entire
instrument. All of the signals at the left of sheet 7 with a number in
parentheses are timing signals. They are derived from the chopper signal on
J13 on sheet 8.
U701, the first stage of the preamplifier circuitry, is more of a current-to-

voltage converter than a preamplifier. (see sheet 7). It has a variable
current-to-voltage transfer ratio. The transfer ratio is changed by switching
in different components in the feedback path using switch U710B. Switching
in different components provides the ability to reduce the output signal when
operating in the AA-BG mode. This AA-BG mode requires the amplitude of
the Background (D2) signal and the amplitude of the AA (HCL or EDL) signal
to be similar. (Relative strengths of the AA and BG signals are wavelength
dependent.)
At low wavelengths, the BG (D2) signal is very strong, and the AA (HCL
or EDL) signal may not be capable of matching it. At higher wavelengths,
the BG signal can be so weak that the amplitude cannot match the AA
signal. To achieve a match, the CPU reduces the transfer ratio of the stage
(U701), while sampling the AA signal, by bringing R744 and C730 into the
feedback loop with U710B. This switch (to include R744 and C730) is
accomplished with the GAIN-OF-0.1* signal that is generated in the Xilinx??.
R709 is used in the alignment of the circuit to remove any DC offset in

the preamplifier stage. See the Electronic Calibration (Alignment)
procedures in Chapter 5 of this manual.
Preamplifier Output
The preamplifier output is applied to two circuits: emission-clamp and

integrator. Only one is active at a particular time, and which one is active
depends on the system timing.
Emission-Clamp Period
During the time that the lamp is off, the emission from the flame is
sampled and subtracted from the input signal. This emission clamp is
accomplished by using the track-and-hold circuit which includes U705. It is
located just below and to the right of the preamplifier on sheet 7. Also during
the lamp-off time, after the signal is sampled by U705 and just before the
lamp is turned on, the system timing forces U705 into the hold mode. The
output signal from U705 is then fed back to the preamplifier input through
switches U707A, B, and C, and switch U710A. See the Electronic
Calibration (Alignment) procedures in Chapter 5 of this manual.
Switch U707 selects the emission mode for spectrometer operation. In the
emission mode, switch U707B is open and switches U707A and C are closed.
This disconnects the output of the emission clamp (U705) from the
preamplifier (U701) input, as a ground level is applied instead. If this wasn’t
done and the entire emission signal was subtracted from the preamplifier
input, there would never be a usable signal at the output of the preamplifier
(U701).
During all other times, switch U710A and the GAIN-OF-0.1* control
signals are active. They are used to modify the gain of the preamplifier with
respect to the emission signal. This keeps the gain of the preamplifier at the
default value regardless of the intensity of the input signal. The entire
emission signal, which is present at the output of the preamplifier, is then
always subtracted from the input signal. R728 is the DC offset adjustment
for the stage.
Integrator Circuit (Sample and Reference Signals)
The other circuit that the preamplifier output sees is the integrator,
which includes U702 (an LF356). This circuit does a true integration of the
input signal over the time the signal is present. U709C is the switch that
connects the preamp output to the integrator at the appropriate time.
U709A, B, and D are used at all other times to discharge the integration
capacitor (C709), in preparation for the next integration period.
Track and Hold (T/H) chip U703 is used to charge C712 with a linear
ramp. R706 is used to provide a bias voltage on C709 to provide the DC
offset adjustment to the T/H stage. R719 is used to take the skew out of the
output waveshape. See the Electronic Calibration (Alignment)
procedures in Chapter 5 of this manual.
The output of the integrator is a negative signal and is applied to the

track and hold (T/H) circuit (U703). This is used to hold the peak value of the
output of the integrator so a correct A/D conversion can take place. The track
and hold modes are controlled by the system timing from the ASIC at the
"logic" input (pin 8) of U703.
The output of the T/H (U703) is one of the inputs to the output
comparator U704. The A/D conversion, that takes place in the ASIC on sheet
8, is accomplished with a 15+ bit counter embedded in U80. The counter is
only allowed to run for a specified period of time after U703 is put in the hold
mode. That period of time is determined by either a fixed maximum limit
(1.43 msec) or a variable time determined by the output comparator (U704),
whichever appears at the chip first.
The other input to the comparator comes from the waveform (lin/log)
generator (U706). (See the bottom, right of sheet 7.) Depending on what
mode the user has selected, this circuit will produce a linear or a logarithmic
voltage to the comparator. The linear ramp has a negative slope from 0 to -
14 volts, and the log waveshape is a rising waveshape from -10 volts to 0
volts.
The linear ramp or log waveshape is compared to the output of U703-5.

When the differential voltage crosses 0, the comparator output flips, the
counters in the ASIC are disabled (see sheet 8) and their outputs are latched.
The ASIC then presents the data to the CPU.
R734 is used to adjust the output of the generator for an acceptable

comparator output with a fixed signal input. See the Electronic
Calibration (Alignment) procedures in Chapter 5 of this manual.
A/D Conversion and Control - Sheet 8
On sheet eight you see the A/D ASIC (U80), a PROM (U81) and support
circuits including logical NAND gates, power supply filters and Y80, a crystal
clock-signal generator. The A/D ASIC (application-specific integrated circuit )
is the same one used in the past on the 3300 and 3110; it has four functions:
1. to develop timing signals for the signal processing circuitry (see sheet 7)
2. to divide the incoming chopper signal (from J13-1, 2, and 3) into 256
equal-time divisions
3. to produce a digital representation of the PMT signal
4. to generate system-clock signals for the rest of the board.
There are 2 main clock signals sent to the ASIC. One comes from crystal
Y80 (see the center of sheet 8). This serves as the time base for the rest of
the circuitry in the ASIC. Its uses are:
• to develop the 8-MHz system clock

• it is an internal A/D signal processing conversion counter
• it is the time base which divides the chopper signal into 256 discrete
segments utilizing a phase lock loop circuit (input frequency on J13).
The chopper signal is developed from the reflective (chopper) optic (M3-
see Figure 5-1) that spins on the shaft of an AC-synchronized motor. As the
optic spins, it passes in front of a reflective optical sensor (looker) and
produces a digital signal that is found at J13.
The PROM is divided into 8 pages, each one with 512 bytes. The pages
are selected by the mode inputs (see the lower-left hand corner of sheet 4)
which are selected by the user. The PROM holds the ASIC timing
information for each mode of operation.
For each A/D segment, 2 bytes are read from the PROM, and a
16-bit word is developed. This word controls each of the 15 lines shown at
the output of the ASIC (POL 0 - POL 14). These are the analog-switch
control lines used on sheet 7. The analog switches control the data
acquisition from the detector.
After the completion of a conversion, when the COMP-OUT (comparator

output - see sheet 7) line turns off the counters, POL2 (ASIC - IRQ) generates
an interrupt to the processor to indicate the data can be read.
Since the A/D ASIC U80 was developed for a 68008 system, the data bus
to the device is 8 bits wide. This requires the device be read twice for each
data conversion in a cycle. The type of data (sample or reference) is
determined by the state of DSYNC (POL3) at the time of the interrupt.
Mode bits (0, 1,and 2) from buffer U48 (see the lower left-hand corner of
sheet 4) impact PROM U81 (see sheet 8); they set up timing patterns. The
resulting signal from U81 is sent to (ASIC) U80. Data acquisition timing is
determined in U80; the pulses control the analog switches in the ASIC to
determine the timing.
The mode bits also determine the mode of the analog/digital data
handling. The data bus to buffers U46, U47, and U48 (see the top of sheet 8)
select 5 of 8 possible modes of,operation. They are:
• AA Log
• AA Lin
• AA-BG Log
• AA-BG Lin
• Em
AA Lin, AA-BG Log, and AA-BG Lin are used to read reference energy
only.
AA Log and Em are used to sample analytical data.
Power Supplies - Sheet 9
On this sheet you see the 4 power supplies used by this board, as well as
the AC power supplies that are directed from the transformer secondaries to
the motor control PCB, the lamp supply PCB and the turret PCB.
+ 5 Volt Supply
At the top of the page is the + 5 Volt supply. The regulator (VR 90) is a
1.5-amp switcher.
The maximum current load on the + 5 Volt supply is 800 mA. This logic
supply powers this PCB as well as the turret board, the motor-control board,
and the keypad module. As mentioned previously (see the description of the
Vacuum Flourescent Display), the keypad (AAnalyst 100 only) requires the
majority of the current from this supply.
+ 11.5 Volt Supply

The second supply (second supply down from the top of sheet 9) is the
+ 11.5 V supply. The + 11.5 V supply is used in 2 places:
• the programming supply for the DS2502 (U510) on sheet 5 (see the
bottom, left of sheet 5).
• for the MAX239 chip that completes the RS232 port (see sheet 6)
±15 Volt Supplies

The last two supplies shown on sheet 9 are the + 15 V and − 15 V Supplies.
They are used to supply power to all the spectrometer analog circuitry. The
+ 15 V supply has a load of 53.5 mA, and the − 15 V supply has a load of 43.5
mA.
VR 91 (for the + 15V supply) and VR 92 (for the − 15V supply)

are 1-amp regulators, as is VR 93 for the + 11.5 V supply (see above).
Other lines
The lines at the bottom of sheet 9 are the AC voltages that are routed
from the main transformer (J11) and the lamp power supply (J3) to the motor
board (J1), turret board (J19), lamp power supply (J3), and the D2 (J29)
assembly.
Most of these voltages are high voltages.
Warning
See the NOTE on page three of this chapter for a description of the single-
point ground for the System-Control board, and for a description of the
chassis ground for the spectrometer.
A fifth supply is at pin 1 of J18. It supplies unregulated + 24 Vdc to
the D2 fan.
PC Board Electronics HCL/PMT/D2 Warm-Up (WU) Board (N041-9054) 6-21
HCL/PMT/D2 Warm-Up (WU) Board (N041-9054)

Overview
There are two sheets for the circuitry on this board. (The schematics are
in chapter 9.) Sheet 1 includes the circuitry for the hollow cathode lamp
(HCL), and the circuitry for the D2 lamp power supply. The second sheet
contains the circuitry for the photomultiplier tube (PMT) power supply.
Hollow Cathode Lamp (HCL) Circuit

360 Vac of unregulated power from the transformer inputs at J3-1 and
J3-4 of the board (see the middle, left of sheet 1 of schematic N041-9050).
When regulated and filtered, the voltage is 450 Vdc across C112 and C131.
R137 and R173 balance the voltage across C112 and C131, and bleed it down
to approximately 300 mV one minute after turning power off.
Two HCL current channels are available. The AAnalyst 100 uses only
one of them. The primary control voltage (HCL_CV) comes in on J4 pins 11
and 12. The secondary (warm-up) control voltage (HCL_WARMUP_CTRL)
comes in on J4 pins 23 and 24. The two supplies are identical; therefore only
the primary channel is described below.
The HCL lamp is driven by a 0 - 50 mA current source. The input control

voltage (0 to 10 V) is divided in two by R138 and R141. It should be 0 - 5 V
as measured at TP22, and has a scale factor of 11.1 mA/V. The HCL supply
circuit is a closed-loop circuit in which field-effect transistor Q19 is used as a
current sink.
The feedback of the loop consists of a lead/lag network which includes

capacitor C115, resistors R144 and R145, and the input capacitance of
transistor Q19. The current through the HCL lamp is present as a voltage
across R148 and R149, and is available at TP 30. Since the HCL current
pulses in all modes, use a scope. The current is equivalent to the peak
voltage of the waveform at TP 30 divided by the sum of R148 and R149 (49.9
+ 40.2) or 90.1 ohms. For example, 1.35 V peak indicates 1.35 V/90.1 Ohms
or 15 mA.
Deuterium Arc Power Supply Circuit Description

The D2 lamp needs three different voltages to operate: the filament heater
voltage, anode striking voltage, and anode sustaining voltage (see sheet 1 of
schematic N041-9050.)
6-22 PC Board Electronics HCL/PMT/D2 Warm-Up (WU) Board (N041-9054)
Filament Heater Supply Voltage
The transformer has a low voltage (2.21 Vac), high-current (5A) winding
for the D2 filament heater. This winding passes through the fuse board (see
schematic N041-9070) and goes directly to the D2 lamp to minimize voltage
drop due to excessive wire length. The filament heater is always on and
heats the cathode to the lamp to provide an internal environment for
ignition. The filament is also considered the cathode for the D2 lamp, and is
brought onto the board via J3-25 and 28. CR21 and CR20 isolate the
filament voltage from the arc voltages.
Anode Striking Voltage
The D2 lamp needs a high voltage (450 V) to strike its arc and begin
operation. The HCL supply provides this potential via R134. With Q17 off,
the anode and cathode have only a small potential difference; therefore the
lamp is off. At ignition, 10 volts is applied to the gate of Q17, which in turn
applies 380 volts across the lamp via voltage division accomplished by R128,
R129, R130, and R134. The 380 volts is on only for the short discharge-time
constant of C111 and R133.
Anode Sustaining Voltage and Current
Once the arc is struck, current flows through the lamp. CR 19 is used as
a high voltage blocking diode against the 450-volt striking voltage, while it
allowes an anode sustaining voltage of 150 Vdc. This lower voltage is needed
to sustain the lamp's discharge. Q17 and U14, an op amp, operate in a
feedback network to regulate the current in the lamp.
The 0-10 VDC control signal from the Main Systems board enters the
board through J4-6 and 7 and is available on TP21 as 0-5 Vdc. The control
voltage is always pulsing; use a scope to view it. The current through the D2
lamp is present as voltage across R128 and R174, and is available at TP 31.
Since the D2 current is pulsing with the control voltage, use a scope. The
current is equivalent to the peak voltage of the waveform at TP 31 divided by
the sum of R128 and R174 (5 + 5), or 10 Ω. For example, 2 V peak voltage
indicates 2V/10Ω, which is equivalent to 200 mA.
Photomultiplier Tube Power Supply

The 0-10 Volt control voltage for the PMT (see sheet 2 of schematic N041-
9050) enters on pins 1 and 2 of J4, and is available at TP10. Op-amp U11
buffers and scales the control voltage to between − 2.4 and − 8.2 volts. Op-
amp U12 supplies the error signal for the regulation feedback using a current
sink (Q11) to control the light-emitting diode (LED) in photoFET U13. (A
PC Board Electronics HCL/PMT/D2 Warm-Up (WU) Board (N041-9054) 6-23
photofet is a LED coupled, field-effect transistor which changes resistance

when exposed to light.)
Loop stability is obtained with the equalizer circuit consisting of C15 and
R17. The equalizer circuit provides optimum response for suppressing the
120-Hz ripple from the unregulated input. The variable signal to op-amp
U12 is divided by the resistor network at pin 3, which consists of R16, plus
R19, R110 and R111. The resistors close the feedback loop. The photoFET
(U13) contols the base-to-emitter voltage of Q12. Q13, Q14, and Q15
complete the cascade configuration for a series mode of voltage regulation.
Entering on the backside of this HPD (WU) board, via J2 pins 9 and 7,
is 980 Vac. The diodes CR11, 12, 13 & 14 rectify and capacitors C11 & C12,
together with R15, filter the ac to a nominal, unregulated voltage of -1280
Vdc with no load, and -850 Vdc with a 3-mA load.
The PMT_HV_OUT is available at TP26, and is scaled for -250 to -850

volts. The PMT output exits behind this board via J2 pins 1 and 3. The
dynode-string load in the PMT socket is 3.3 MΩ, and is in parallel with R200-
R203 for an equivalent resistance load of 1.25 MΩ. The maximum current
load is under 1.0 mA with the transformer winding rated at 3.0 mA. The
250V fuse is de-rated for 1000V operation, and is rated at 31 mA. (The fusing
current is much greater than the board current.)
6-24 PC Board Electronics Motor-Control PCB (N041-9044 - AAnalyst 300)
Motor-Control PCB (N041-9044 - AAnalyst 300)

The Motor Control PCB (P/N N041-9044) includes the control and drive
circuitry for four stepper motors. These are the grating motor, the rotating
optic motor, the slit motor, and the turret motor. This board is always
shipped with the AAanalyst 300, and can be purchased as an option for the
AAnalyst 100.
The AAnalyst 100 is normally shipped with two-motor control PC board

N041-9124, which includes the grating and slit motors only. The circuit
description for the two-motor board is included in the next section of this
chapter.
Control and Drive Circuitry
Turret Motor
The turret motor control circuitry is found on sheet 3 of schematic

N041-9040. The stepper motor controller L297 (U34) controls the motor in
half-step mode (200 steps per revolution). The Pulse Width Mode chopper
frequency is set by R313 and C306 and is 1/(0.69 * 22100 Ohms * 3300 pF) or
20 KHz. This is the only channel which is independent of the Xilinx
and CPU’s E Clock. The Xilinx is shown on sheet 1 of the schematic.
The drive portion of the circuit uses a dual, full bridge L298N driver
(U35) and dual schottky diode L6210 bridges (U36A&B). (See sheet 3 of
schematic N041-9040.)
The hold circuit for the turret channel is controlled by the TURRET-
HOLD signal. While stepping, the firmware does not assert TURRET-HOLD
and the voltage divider R310 and R311 sets the reference voltage to 5 V *
(100 / (4750 + 100)) or 103 mV. After stepping is complete, the firmware
asserts TURRET-HOLD which switches the field-effect transistor (FET)
Q31C to bring resistors R326 and R327 in parallel with R311. The lower leg
of the divider is now reduced from 100 ohms to 14.2 ohms. This divides the
reference voltage to 5 V * (14.2 / (4750 + 14.2)) or 15 mV, thus reducing the
motor current while holding.
The winding current is present across the 0.2 Ohm sense resistors R314
and R315. When stepping, the maximum winding current is 103 mV / 0.2
Ohms or 0.52 Amps. When holding, the maximum current is 15 mV / 0.2
Ohms or 0.075 Amps.
PC Board Electronics Motor-Control PCB (N041-9044 - AAnalyst 300) 6-25
Slit Motor
The Xilinx (U1 - see sheet 1) controls the slit motor in half-step mode (400
half steps per revolution). The Pulse Width Mode chopper frequency is set
by the CPU’s E-Clk (J1 pin 15). The E-Clk is 1/10th the master clock
frequency or 8 MHz / 10 = 800 KHz. The Xilinx divides this 800 KHz down to
100 KHz.
The drive portion of the circuit uses a dual, full bridge L298N driver U32
and dual-schottky diode bridges U33A&B (see sheet 3). Comparators U32
A&B are used to monitor the voltage across the sense resistors for the slit
motor (R300 and R301). The comparator outputs go back to the Xilinx.
The comparators U32A and U32B also use the reference voltages
produced by the networks R304+R320 and R305+R306 to set winding
current. The two comparators have identical reference voltages; the
following paragraph describes only the network attached to U32A:
The hold circuit for the slit channel (Q31A, Q31B, R322, R323, R324,
and R325 - see sheet 3 of schematic N041-9040) is never used. The voltage
divider R304 and R320 sets the reference voltage to 5 V * (49.9 / (4750 +
49.9)) or 52 mV.
The winding current is present across the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors R300
and R301. The maximum winding current is 52 mV / 0.3 Ohms or 0.173
Amps.
Grating (G) Motor
The Xilinx (U1 - see sheet 1 of the schematic) controls the grating motor
in a micro-step mode ( 3200 micro-steps per revolution). This gives the
wavelength drive a resolution of 0.003 nm per step.
(U25) and dual-schottky diode bridges U26A&B (see sheet 2 of schematic
N041-9040). Comparators (U21 C&D) are used to monitor the voltage across
the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors (R220 and R222) for the grating motor. The
comparator outputs go back to the Xilinx.
Figure 6-2. Winding-current Phase Difference for the Microstepped

Grating Motor.
The comparators also use the reference voltages produced by the dual
channel 8-bit DAC (U24). While micro-stepping, the Xilinx sends data to the
DACs that varies sinusoidally. Channel 1 of the DAC controls the current in
winding A and channel 2 controls the current in winding B of the
microstepped grating motor. There is a 90° phase difference between the
sinusoidal current in winding A and winding B of the grating motor, as
The hold circuit for the grating channel is controlled by the GRAT-HOLD
signal (see sheet 2 of schematic N041-9044). While stepping, the firmware
does not assert GRAT-HOLD and the voltage dividers at the output of each
DAC supply the comparator's positive (+) input with (150 / (2000+150) =
6.98% of the DAC’s output. For example, with the DAC at full scale, it’s
output is 2.5 V and the comparators positive (+) input sees 2.5 x 6.98% or
0.174 V. The winding current is present across the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors
R220 and R222. When stepping, the maximum winding current is 0.174V /
0.3 Ohms or 0.58 Amps.
To reduce power dissipation and heat build-up after stepping has been
completed, the firmware reduces the motor current by asserting GRAT-
HOLD. This action commands the FETs (Q20C and Q20D) to bring R213
and R215 into the network, and therefore divide the reference voltage from
the DACs even further. The divider would see 150 ohms in parallel with 182
ohms, or 82.2 ohms to achieve (82.2 / (2000 + 82.2)) = 3.95%. With the DAC
at full scale, the comparator's positive (+) input sees 2.5 x 3.95% or 0.099 V.
The winding current is present across the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors R220 and
R222. When holding, the maximum winding current is 0.099V / 0.3 Ohms or
0.33 Amps.
Rotating Optic (M1) Motor
The Xilinx (U1 - see sheet 1 of the schematic) controls the rotating optic
motor in a micro-step mode (12,800 micro-steps per revolution). This
enhanced resolution is needed because the optic is driven directly with no
gear reduction. This gives the rotating optic drive a resolution of 0.028° per
step.
(U22) and dual-schottky diode bridges U23A&B (see sheet 2 of schematic
N041-9040). Comparators (U21 A&B) are used to monitor the voltage across
the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors (R211 and R210) for the optic motor. The
comparator outputs go back to the Xilinx.
The comparators also use the sinusoidal reference voltages (see

Figure 6-2) produced by the dual channel 8-bit DAC (U20).
The hold circuit for the optic channel is controlled by the OPTIC-HOLD
signal (see sheet 2 of the motor-control schematic). While stepping, the
firmware does not assert OPTIC-HOLD and the voltage dividers at the
output of each DAC supply the comparator's positive (+) input with
(150 / (2000+150) = 6.98% of the DAC’s output. For example, with the DAC
at full scale, it’s output is 2.5 V and the comparators positive (+) input sees
2.5 x 6.98% or 0.174 V. The winding current is present across the 0.3 Ohm
sense resistors R211 and R210. When stepping, the maximum winding
current is 0.174V / 0.3 Ohms or 0.58 Amps.
To reduce power dissipation and heat build-up after stepping has been
completed, the firmware reduces the motor current by asserting OPTIC-
HOLD. This action commands the FETs (Q20A and Q20B) to bring R201
and R203 into the network, and therefore divide the reference voltage from
the DACs even further. The divider would see 150 ohms in parallel with 182
ohms, or 82.2 ohms to achieve (82.2 / (2000 + 82.2)) = 3.95%. With the DAC
at full scale, the comparator's positive (+) input sees 2.5 x 3.95% or 0.099 V.
The winding current is present across the 0.3 Ohm sense resistors R211 and
R210. When holding, the maximum winding current is 0.099V / 0.3 Ohms or
0.33 Amps.
Voltage Regulator Circuit

The voltage-regulator circuit at the bottom of sheet 3 of schematic N041-
9040 provides regulated 35 V for the turret, optic, slit, and grating motors. It
consists of rectifier bridge CR30, filter capacitors C312 and C313, regulator
VR30, and a voltage divider including the five resistors R330 - R334. The
regulated voltage can be monitored at test point 30.
NOTE: Jumper SP11, when switched to the 3 - 2 position from
the 1 - 2 position, allows testing the regulator with no load
applied.
Motor-Control PCB (N041-9124 - AAnalyst 100)

General
The Motor Control PCB (P/N N041-9124) includes the control and drive
circuitry for two stepper motors. These are the grating motor and the slit
motor. This is the standard motor-control board shipped with the AAnalyst
100.
There is also a voltage regulator circuit, containing a voltage regulator,

rectifier bridge, and voltage divider on this board. It supplies regulated 35 V
to both motors.
Control and Drive Circuitry
Slit Motor
The slit motor control circuitry is found on the upper third of schematic
N041-9120. The stepper motor controller L297 (U2) controls the motor in
half-step mode (400 half steps per revolution). The Pulse Width Mode
chopper frequency is set by R4 and C3 and is 1/(0.69 * 22100 Ohms * 1000
pF) or 65 KHz.
(U3), and dual-schottky diode (L6210) bridges U4A & U4B.
The winding current is present across the 2.0 Ω sense resistors R5 and
R6. When stepping or holding, the maximum winding current is 0.373 V / 2.0
Ω or 0.186 Amps. Motor direction is controlled by the logic level at J1, pin 16
(SLIT-DIR); pulses at J1, pin 17 (SLIT-STEP) cause the motor to step.
Grating (G) Motor
The grating motor control circuitry is found on the middle third of

schematic N041-9120. The stepper motor controller L297 (U6) controls the
motor in half-step mode (400 half steps per revolution). The Pulse Width
Mode chopper frequency is set by R4, C3 (and U2 pin 1) and is 65 kHz.
The drive portion of the circuit uses a dual, full bridge L298N driver (U7)
and dual schottky diode L6210 bridges (U5A & U5B).
The hold circuit for the grating channel is controlled by the GRAT-HOLD
signal. While stepping, the firmware does not assert GRAT-HOLD, and the
voltage divider R12 and R14 sets the reference voltage to
5 V*(100/(332 + 100)) or 1.157 V.
After stepping is complete, the firmware asserts GRAT-HOLD which

switches the field-effect transistor (FET) Q1 to bring resistor R13 in parallel
with R14. The lower leg of the divider is now reduced from 100 to 33 Ω. This
divides the reference voltage to 5 V * (33 / (332 + 33)) or 0.0456 V, thus
reducing the motor current while holding.
The winding current is present across the 2.0 Ω sense resistors R16 and
R17. When stepping, the maximum winding current is 1.157 V / 2.0 Ω, or
0.578 A. When holding, the maximum current is 0.456 V / 2.0 Ω or 0.228
Amps. Motor direction is controlled by the logic level at J1, pin 1 (GRAT-
DIR); pulses at J1, pin 2 (GRAT-STEP) cause the motor to step.
U8 is a "divide-by-eight" counter which divides the number of pulses at

J1, pin 2 by 8. It therefore takes the same number of pulses (3200) to
produce one full rotation of the grating motor on this board (N041-9124) as it
does on the microstepping motor-control board N041-9044.
Voltage Regulator Circuit

The voltage-regulator circuit at the bottom third of schematic N041-9120
provides regulated 35 V for the slit and grating motors. It consists of rectifier
bridge CR1, filter capacitor C15, regulator VR1, and a voltage divider
including the five resistors R18 - R22. The regulated voltage can be
monitored at TP 3.
NOTE: Jumper SP1, when switched to the 3 - 2 position from

the 1 - 2 position, allows testing the regulator with no load
applied.
6-30 PC Board Electronics Burner Interface (Interlock) Board (N041-9064)
Burner Interface (Interlock) Board (N041-9064)

Overview
The Burner Interlock board interfaces between the flame control board
(AAnalyst 300) or manual gas control board (AAnalyst 100). Refer to Figure
6-1. This board contains the circuitry that detects the flame status. It also
includes interlock circuitry. The interlocks shut down the flame when the
signals they require are not present; see the list of interlocks in the last
paragraph of this board description.
Flame Detector
Flame detector Q1, located on the burner interlock board (see schematic
N041-9060), is a multi-junction thermopile. This thermopile is a voltage-
generating device which needs no bias voltages or currents. Its spectral
response is flat from low UV to far IR.
The time constant of Q1 is 40 msec; the response is to the burner flame's

thermal energy. When Q1 is 10 cm from the flame, with the flame varying
from lean to rich, the output voltage of the thermopile is between 8 mV and
30 mV.
This output voltage from Q1 is fed into the non-inverting input of U1, a
chopper-stabilized amplifier. Even the leanest flame (lowest output voltage)
condition causes the amplifier output to reach its maximum positive voltage,
which is > 4.75 V. The flame-detector resistance is matched for voltage-
offset compensation.
Burner-Head Detectors (Sensors)

The burner-head sensors on the interlock board (U2 and U3 - see
schematic N041-9060), are magneto-resistive digital-position sensors. They
respond to a magnetic field and are omnipolar, i.e. they sense either a north
or south magnetic pole.
A rubberized magnetic strip is mounted appropriately on each burner

head to identify it as an N2O head or as a C2H2 head. The sensor outputs a
positive logic level if it senses the magnet. The output of the C2H2 head
sensor is buffered with logic inverter U4A. The output of the N2O head
sensor is buffered with logic inverter U4B.
PC Board Electronics Burner Interface (Interlock) Board (N041-9064) 6-31
Interlocks and Other Functions

Interlocks have been implemented for the following (see
schematic N041-9060):
• Burner Head
• N2O Head
• Neb Detect
Provision has been made for interlocks to be implemented for Gas Detect
and End Cap Detect.
For convenience, the burner-head interlock (interface) board also provides

an electrical path that connects the gas box circuitry to the glow plug and the
rotary solenoid flame pipe. The glow plug is a standard resistive filament,
and the flame pipe rotary solenoid activates at +24 Vdc.
6-32 PC Board Electronics Fuse Board (N041-9074)
Fuse Board (N041-9074)

Fuse Voltage Function Rating Part No Fuse Voltage Function Rating Part No
(Amps) (Amps)
[All fuses 250 [All fuses 250
V V
slo-blo] slo-blo ]
F1 980 PMT 1/32 0998- F7 18 Vac Sys Bd 2 0998-

Vac (+ 850 Vdc) 1767 (− 15 Vdc) 1614
F2 115 Chopper 1 0998- F8 36 Vac Stepper 8 0998-

Vac (115 Vac) 1611 Motors 1643
(+ 35 Vdc)
F3 20 Vac Gas Box 5 0998- F9 360 D2 Strike & 3/8 0998-

(+ 24 Vdc) 1617 Vac HCL 1619
( + 450 Vdc)
F4 20 Vac Gas Box 5 0998- F10 18 Vac Sys Bd 2 0998-

(− 24 Vdc) 1617 (+ 15 Vdc) 1614
F5 2.2 Vac D2 Htr 10 0998- F11 220 D2 Lamp 2 0998-

(2.2 Vac) 1753 Vac (+ 140 Vdc) 1614
F6 10 Vac Sys Bd 7 0998- F12 3 Vac Glow Plug 5 0998-

(digital) 1757 (3 Vac) 1617
(+ 5 Vdc)
Figure 6-3. Location of Fuses on PC Board N041-9074.

PC Board Electronics Flame-Control Board (N041-9014)-(For AAnalyst 300 Only) 6-33
Flame-Control Board (N041-9014)-(For AAnalyst 300

Only)
General Design Principles
The flame-control board circuitry was designed with emphasis on the
following board functions:
• to control the pneumatics of the automated AAnalyst 300
• to maintain gas flows with interlocks that are constantly monitored
• to ensure safe shutdown regardless of the reason for shutdown.
The flame-control board operates independently of all the other AAnalyst
300 printed circuit boards. Surface-mount technology was used extensively
in the board’s design, while compatibility was maintained with the AAnalyst
300 instrument controllers.
Each of the five flame-control board schematics (which are in chapter 9)
includes the electronics that support a board task. The titles (tasks) of the
five sheets of schematic N041-9010 are listed below:
• microcontroller and memory (sheet 1)
• IEEE control (sheet 2)
• power supply and interlocks (sheet 3)
• solenoid control (sheet 4)
• data conversion (sheet 5)
The circuit descriptions of the five sheets of the flame-control board
schematic are included as the next five paragraphs. The memory map of the
flame-control board is included after the last of the descriptions.
6-34 PC Board Electronics Flame-Control Board (N041-9014)-(For AAnalyst 300 Only)
Sheet 1 - Microcontroller and Memory

The circuitry on Sheet 1 includes three major functional components:
• MC68332, a MotorolaR microcontroller

• Xilinx U13, its timer (U10) which is used for the Xilinx clock, and a serial
PROM for the Xilinx (U14); the PROM provides the necessary timing
codes to the Xilinx only upon powering up the spectrometer.
• Systems PROM (U12), which provides the code for the microcontroller.
The Microcontroller
Microcontroller U11 contains the main processor for the flame control
process. The major functions of the microcontroller are the following:
• it provides 12 bits of digital I/O

• it handles all the interrupts
• it provides some timing functions [with the help of the time-processing
unit (TPU)]
• it generates all the necessary chip selects
• it includes all the system RAM (which is embedded in U11).
The digital I/O consists primarily of the interlocks for the system. These
are connected to the controller to allow the firmware to determine the source
of an interlock interrupt. The other digital lines are used to selectively
enable or disable the interlock interrupt, as well as reset the watchdog in the
Xilinx.
The TPU (time processing unit) channel of U11 is used to produce an

interrupt to the microcontroller that acts as a 1-msec time base for the
firmware. This is used to create time delays for the code when waiting for
specific events, e.g., waiting for transducers to respond, or waiting for the
burner head to warm up after ignition (before switching to nitrous oxide.)
The internal, periodic-interrupt timer (PIT) is used to schedule servicing

of the IEEE flame board function, as well as to schedule service for the Xilinx
watchdog. The PIT generates an interrupt every 19.5 msec; after each 19.5
msec the nebulizer is checked to determine if an adjustment should be made
to the auxiliary flow.
The PIT is also the input to a firmware counter that triggers service for
the Xilinx watchdog after 0.5 seconds. The watchdog timer is set for 5
seconds. This means that the reset from the processor is 10 times faster than
the time-out for the watchdog. This was done so that the processor could
actually miss 1 or 2 resets and still retain control of the system.
The watchdog is serviced in the main firmware loop. Any algorithms that
are especially long contain service loops for the watchdog, so the time-out is
never realized during normal operation.
The clock for the controller is derived from the 32.768 KHz crystal (Y1) at
the bottom right of sheet 1. The clock acts as the input to the internal phase-
lock loop (PLL), which generates a 16.77 MHz system clock. The clock is used
with the Xilinx Circiut (U13) to generate the necessary clocks for the IEEE
controller, the A/D converter, and for the time-processing unit.
Filters have been used on all power pins of devices that operate at
frequencies of ≥1 MHz. These can be seen on sheet 1 (see LC12-17) on the
Vcc lines of both the MC68332 (U11) and the Xilinx (U13). These filters will
also be seen with other components as we discuss other sheets.
Xilinx
The Xilinx and its associated circuitry are located at the left of sheet 1.
The NE555 timer chip (U10) is used as the time base for the Xilinx. The time
base is determined by the RC combination of C100 and R100, and is
calculated from the following:
t = 0.722/RC
The time base is then 1.07 seconds.
The controller holds off the Xilinx watchdog through the T signal at pin
31, located in the upper-right quadrant of the Xilinx chip (U13). If the
controller fails to assert this signal, the Xilinx will execute an orderly
shutdown of the flame to prevent flashbacks; this shutdown includes a
switch-to-air if the selected oxidant is nitrous oxide. The switch will occur
between 3.4 and 4 seconds after the processor fails. One clock after the
switch-to-air, the fuel is shut off, and 2 clocks later (3 clocks after the switch-
to-air), the air shuts off.
Systems Prom
Program space is provided by the 44-pin PROM (U12). This is a one-time

programmable device; its configuration is 64K words. It is placed in a socket
for easy firmware changes in the field when the proper extraction tool, P/N
0994-0335, is available.
Sheet 2 - IEEE Controller

U20, a National Instruments TNT 4882C, which is an IEEE controller
Chip, has simplified the design of the IEEE Controller of the AAnalyst 300.
U20 is a single-chip solution to the bus-control circuitry, i.e., the controllers
and the bus drivers are included in the single chip.
NOTE: Invoking the turbo 488 mode of the chip allows

operation at the higher transfer rate of 8 Mbytes/second.
The impact on the firmware of using U20 is that there are no unsolicited
messages on the internal IEEE-48 bus. Therefore, the PC must interrogate
the flame-control board to determine its condition even if an interlock has
faulted.
The light-emitting diode (LED) CR20, on the IEEE Controller service-

request line (SRQ), determines the state of the controller during data
transfer. When the LED is lit, the flame-control board indicates that data is
ready to be transferred to the PC.
The data and control lines are connected to the external IEEE-488 bus by
a 26-channel ribbon cable which transfers the data to the main systems
board and out to the PC. (The 26-channel ribbon cable eliminated the need
for two IEEE cables, as well as the need for two connectors.)
The address for the flame-control board is 8. The firmware defaults to

address 8; there is no need for DIP switches. The chip clock frequency is 8.38
Mhz.
The IEEE Controller (U20) is packaged as a 100-pin plastic quad flat

pack (PQFP). Each side of U20 has a filter for the Vcc and ground pins. I.e.,
filters LC 20 and LC 21 are located on the left side of the chip, while filters
LC22 and LC23 are located on its right side.
Sheet 3 - Power Supplies and Interlock Interface

Refer to sheet 3 of the flame control board schematic. There are four of
the power supplies used on this (flame control) board located on the top half
of the sheet. They, and the reference + 10 V, are listed, along with their test
points and jumper designations in Table 6-3.
NOTE: To help the service engineer troubleshoot this circuitry,

a test point and jumper have been included for every input and
output on the sheet (see the schematic for sheet 3).
NOTE: The fifth power supply used is the 3-Vac supply shown
on sheet four of the schematic. See the discussion of sheet four
(solenoid control) which follows this discussion of sheet 3.
Table 6-3. Power Supplies, their Test Point and Jumper Designations.
POWER SUPPLY TEST POINT JUMPER DESIGNATION
+ 24-volt unregulated TP 300 SP 30
+ 15-volt regulated TP 301 SP 31
+ 5-volt regulated TP 302 SP 34
− 15-volt regulated TP 304 SP 33
+ 10-volt reference TP303 SP 32
The bottom half of this sheet (sheet 3) shows the system interlocks.
The system interlocks are discussed after the power supplies.
Power Supplies
+ 24-volt Unregulated
The + 24 volts is used for the flame-board solenoids. (This supply provides
24 volts ± 10% over the worst case-load range.)
C300, C301, and C302 are the filter capacitors for the 24-volt supply (see
the schematic). Total capacitance of the 3 capacitors is 45,000 µfarads. This
large amount of capacitance provides the time required for a clean transfer
from a nitrous-oxide to an air flame when line voltage is lost during a flame-
on condition. When the line voltage is lost, the MC68332 controller receives
an interrupt and conducts the switch. (See the description of sheet 1.) The
Xilinx will make the switch if the processor fails.
CR31, at the filter-capacitor input, eliminates the possible discharge path

for the capacitors (C300-302) through the Vcc superevisor circuit (see the
Interlock discussion, below).
When the Model AAnalyst 300 Spectrometer is powered up, there is an

extremely large current surge through the diode bridge (which includes
CR30) which charges capacitors C300-302. Capacitors rated high enough to
handle the surge currents have been chosen.
This 24-volt unregulated supply also supplies the required input voltages
for the ±15- and + 5-volt regulators (see the following paragraphs).
+ 15-volt regulated
The + 15-volt supply provides the power to the analog circuits for data
conversion and the transducers. The voltage regulator for this supply is
VR30 (see sheet 3). It is a 1-amp regulator packaged in a TO-220 case.
VR30 is a larger regulator than required, but it is a through-hole version.
Also, it does not require a heat sink.
The diode (CR32) across the regulator prevents the regulator from being
damaged if the regulator input voltage falls below its output. (This is an
important consideration during a fault condition.)
+ 5-volt regulated
The voltage regulator for the 5-volt supply is VR32. It is a switching

regulator packaged in a TO-220 case; the regulator switching frequency is
660 KHz.
The + 5-volt supply is used for all the digital logic, as well as for the power
supplies for the drain sensor, the burner-logic circuit, the thermal sensor, the
pressure sensors and the keyboard module.
VR32 is a 1.5-amp regulator; the worst case load for this supply is 800
mA. Each of the AAnalyst 300 solenoids require ∼ 100 mA, and the keyboard
module needs 500 mA (worst case - i.e., all LEDs lit). The rest of the current
from the + 5-volt supply is required by the flame-board logic circuits and
miscellaneous supplies.
The Zener diode (CR34) at the output of regulator VR32 limits the
maximum output voltage of the regulator. (See the discussion of diode CR32
in the paragraph describing the + 15-volt supply, above.)
− 15-volt supply
The − 15-volt supply is controlled by regulator VR31. It is a negative

version of the + 15-volt supply discussed above; i.e., it is the negative voltage
needed by the analog circuits for data conversion.
The diode (CR33) across VR31 prevents the regulator from being
damaged if the regulator input voltage falls below its output. See the
description of diode CR32 in the + 15-volt discussion.
Interlocks
In the center of sheet 3 you see the monitor circuits required for two of
the system interlocks: the VCC− SUP interlock and the FLAME− INT
interlock. The circuits are the Vcc supervisor circuit (upper circuit) and the
flame-sense circuit (lower circuit). Both of these circuits were made + 5-volt
circuits, to make their functions the last-to-be-lost when a power failure
occurs.
Vcc Supervisor Circuit (VCC-SUP) Interlock (Test Point 305)
The upper circuit (the Vcc supervisor circuit) monitors the level of the
input voltage to the Flame Control board. C308, a 4.7-µf capacitor, filters the
input voltage somewhat, and stabilizes the voltage input to comparator U31
(see sheet 3).
The reference voltage for comparator U31 originates at the voltage

divider consisting of R308 and R309, which is across + 5 volts. This is
compared, by U301, to the input-voltage sample from R307.
When the sample voltage falls below the reference voltage, the output
state of the comparator changes. That change in state is detected by the
Xilinx circuit (see sheet 1) which monitors the interlock lines. The Xilinx
circuit then generates an interrupt to the MC68332 processor.
NOTE: All of the flame-board interlock lines are considered

faulted with a Logic “0” and satisfied with a Logic “1.”
Flame Sense Circuit (FLAME-INT) Interlock (TP 306)
The flame-sense circuit operates in way similar to the way the Vcc
supervisor circuit operates. The flame sense circuit monitors the condition of
the flame sensor in the burner head assembly.
When a flame is present, the voltage-comparator sample voltage is a

higher voltage than the reference voltage developed across R317. The output
of voltage comparator U32 is then a Logic “1”, which is what the Xilinx
circuit regards as the satisfied state. When the flame goes out, the sample
voltage (at pin 2 of U32) becomes lower than the reference voltage (which is
at pin 1 of U32), and the output state of the comparator becomes a Logic”0”.
The Xilinx circuit then generates an interrupt to the microprocessor.
Remaining Interlocks
The rest of the flame-board interlocks are shown at the bottom of sheet 3.
They and the test points at which they can be accessed are:
• BURNER− HD TP 308
• FUEL− PRESSURE TP 309
• THERMAL− SWITCH TP 310
• N2O− HEAD TP 312
• DRAIN TP 313
• AIR− PRESSURE TP 311
• OX− PRESSURE TP 314
• NEB− DETECT TP 316
• END− CAP (not implemented)
All of the interlocks are “pulled down” to force a faulted condition (Logic
“0”) if a harness is disconnected or if an interlock sensor is removed. Each of
the interlocks also has a dedicated test point. All of the flame-board
interlocks are also connected to the Xilinx (see sheet 1) and are combined into
a single interrupt line, which then goes to the microprocessor.
The microprocessor reads the message that comes over the interrupt line
so that, when an interrupt occurs, the cause of the interrupt can be
determined. [When the processor is questioned by the computer, the
intrerrupt information is sent to the computer as part of the “status-block”
information of the pneumatics system.]
Sheet 4 - Solenoid Control

On this sheet we illustrate the drive circuitry for each of the four
solenoids. The four solenoids are for activating the following:
• air
• acetylene (C2H2)
• N 2O
• flame ignition.
The sixth power supply for the system (3 Vac) is also shown on sheet 4.
Integrated circuit U40, shown near the left side of this sheet, is an octal
latch with tristate outputs. U40 is the interface between the MC68322
microprocessor, the Xilinx circuitry, and the drive circuitry shown on this
sheet. The digital inputs to pins 2 - 9 on octal latch U40 are part of the
microprocessor’s data bus.
The SOL-SEL* line is the signal from the chip-select logic (see sheet 1)
that latches the data present on the bus into the latches.
NOTE: SOL-SEL* refers to solenoid-select. (See sheet 4 of

then Flame Control schematic N041-9010 in Chapter 9.)
The asterisk (*) alongside the solenoid-select designation
indicates that it is active low. Another way to indicate active
low is to draw a line over the designation.
The data present is determined by the firmware and the operating mode
selected.
The SOL-EN* line (solenoid enable - see the note, above) is the master
enable signal for the solenoid. The SOL-EN* line comes from the Xilinx (see
sheet 1) and is part of the watchdog circuit. (See the discussion of sheet 1 of
the flame control board schematic.)
As long as the microprocessor is able to hold-off (delay) the watchdog

signal, the SOL-EN* line is a logic “0”, and the latch is enabled. When the
watchdog must take control of the solenoids, the line will toggle to a logic “1”
and disable the octal latch.
When the octal latch is disabled, the microprocessor is removed from the
control loop, and the outputs of the microprocessor are placed in a “tristate”
condition. The N-O, OX-O, and F-O signals are ouputs from the Xilinx (see
Sheet 1); they would now control the solenods for an orderly shutdown (and
for a switch back to air if necessary). When the microprocessor is in control,
the N-O, OX-O, and F-O signals from the Xilinx are forced to “tristate”.
The control circuit for the glow plug and for the ignitor are shown at the
top of sheet 4. The 3-Vac power supply from the transformer is also shown
at the top of the sheet. (This supply is the only supply used on the flame-
control board not mentioned in the discussion of the power supplies shown on
sheet 3.)
During ignition, bit 0 from the octal latch is set to a logic “1”. Field-effect
transistor (FET) Q40 then switches on. The drain of FET Q40 provides two
functions:
• it activates the igniter solenoid
• it turns on relay K40, allowing 3 Vac to reach the glow plug.
NOTE: The igniter is a tube that is positioned over the burner

head. When the gasses are turned on, a small amount enters
the tube, and rapidly reaches the glow plug at the end of the
tube (which is over the burner head). At the same time the
FET (Q40) turns on (closes) relay K40, thereby sending 3 Vac
to the glow plug (pin J3-11). The glow plug then ignites the
gases in the ignition tube which, in turn, light the burner
flame.
Gate resistor R46 (1 KΩ) pulls the gate down to a low enough state so
that the gasses in the ignition tube are not lit when the octal latch is
disabled; the microprocessor outputs are then forced into tristate.
Diode CR40 suppresses the electromotive pulse generated when the

power to the solenoid is turned off.
The rest of sheet 4 includes three identical circuits; one each for air,
nitrous oxide, and acetylene. Each circuit contains a FET (field-effect
transistor): Q44 for air, Q47 for nitrous oxide, and Q41 for acetylene.
The gate of each input FET are pulled down; therefore with no input to
the FET gate, the default condition is for the gases to be off. (These circuits
were designed with safety in mind.)
The most common cause of failure of a bipolar transistor is excess current,

which results in a shorted device (from base to emitter or from emitter to
collector.) The most common cause of failure of a FET is an overvoltage
condition; this results in an open device.
A drive-circuit configuration that accomodates component failures,

without an unsafe condition, requires both bipolar and FET devices.
The circuits for air, nitrous oxide, and acetylene are therefore series
circuits containing N-channel FETs and PNP bi-polar transistors. In order
for a gas solenoid to be activated, both types of transistors would have to be
turned on. Therefore, the possibility of a component failure resulting in the
gas flows being turned on is minimal.
NOTE: Diodes CR42 for air, CR43 for nitrous oxide, and CR41
for acetylene suppress the electromotive (EMF) pulse from the
respective solenoid coil when the solenoid is turned off.
Sheet 5 - Data Conversion

All data conversions are done via 12 bits, and all the data flows are closed
loop.
D/A (digital-to-Analog) Conversion
The D/A (digital-to-analog) converter (U53) is shown at the bottom, left of

sheet 5; the drive circuits, including op-amps U54 and U55 are at the bottom,
center of the sheet. The fuel-transducer drive circuit includes op-amp U54,
while the aux-transducer circuit includes op-amp U55.
U53 is a dual converter with input latches. It is configured for 0-to 10-
volt outputs. There is a common write line (R − W*), and individual select
lines to direct the input data to the D/A converter.
The outputs of the converter are applied to the transducer drive circuits.
The fuel-transducer and aux-transducer circuits are sourced from the
regulated +15-volt supply, and have an input impedance of 1K Ohms. .
A/D (Analog-to-Digital) Conversion
The A/D circuit is shown at the top of this sheet. U50 and U52 constitute
the control circuitry for the mass flow sensor used to sense nebulizer flow.
The top of the sheet shows the A/D circuit. The A/D converter is
expecting to see 0-to-10 volt inputs. The opamp (U50) at the left of the sheet
drives the input signals. The RC network (R50 and C50) at the connector
pins filters any higher frequency transitions to stabilize the inputs to the A/D
converter. The RC network is needed because there is no sample/hold circuit.
The mass-flow sensor for the nebulizer flow produces an output voltage
range of 1 to 4 volts (between J7-2 and J7-3). The opamp U50 at the top, left
of the sheet amplifies this signal with a gain of 2.
6-44 PC Board Electronics Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084)
Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084)

Introduction
The Manual Gas Box Control Board controls the solenoid valves for the
three gases: air, acetylene (C2H2) , and nitrous oxide ( N2O). The board also
controls the ignition and shut-down sequence.
There are several safety interlocks that need to be satisfied before a flame
is allowed to ignite, and for a flame to stay on once it is lit. The timing and
control logic is accomplished with a Xilinx XC3020PC84. Three keyboard
commands, via the systems board CPU, and several interlocks are
interpreted logically in the Xilinx to turn the gases on and off in the correct
sequence.
Power Supply Circuitry

The power supply circuitry for the manual gas box PC board is shown
near the top of sheet 1 of schematic P/N N041-9080 (which is in chapter 9).
An AC secondary from the transformer is converted to unregulated + 24 Vdc
via a rectifier (CR10 &CR11). Capacitors C104, C107 and C108 sustain the
voltage for 2 seconds after power is interrupted (e.g., due to a black-out,
brown-out, or power glitch). A rectified + 5 Vdc is derived using switching
regulator VR10.
Voltage Supervisor Circuit

The instant a power fault is detected, CR12 (in the 20 Vacc line from the
transformer-see the top, left of sheet 1) separates the power fault from the
+24V DC that is being sustained by C104, C107 and C108. The power fault
causes the watchdog comparator, U10, to trip, sending the output of the
comparator (VCC_SUP) low. (VCC_SUP can be found at test point 13.) If a
flame exists during a power fault, the flame will therefore be shut
down.
Flame Sense Circuit

The Flame-Sense comparator circuit is located beneath and to the right of
the watchdog circuitry on sheet 1 of the N041-9080 schematic. Comparator
U11 of the flame-sense circuit receives a 0 V or + 5 Vdc level for a flame-off or
flame-on condition, respectively. The off/on threshold of + 2 Vdc is located at
the inverting input (pin 2) of U11. The flame-sense signal is initially low (no-
go) at power up.
PC Board Electronics Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084) 6-45
Interlocks
Ten other interlocks appear on sheet 1 of the schematic. Only eight are
implemented, however, and only those that are implemented are included in
Table 6-4. (End-cap detect and gas detect are not implemented and are not
included in the table.)
Therefore, the flame/ignite sequence is in a no-go position if any one of

the following signals is low:
Table 6-4. Implemented Interlocks on Manual Gas Control Board.
Signal Connector Pin

BURNER-HD J3-5
FUEL-PRESSURE J4-8
THERMAL-SWITCH J3-20
AIR-PRESSURE J4-9
N2O-HD J3-7
OX-PRESSURE J4-10
NEB-DETECT J3-16
DRAIN J3-18
Drivers
On the right hand side of sheet 2 are four solenoid drivers consisting of
Q21 and 24 (C2H2-SOL), Q22 and 26 (AIR-SOL), Q23 and 28 (N2O-SOL)
and Q30 and Q31 (BOOST-SOL). They activate the four gas solenoids as
specified. They are driven from the Xilinx via AND gates (U24A, U24B,
U24C, and U25A).
One input of each AND gate is tied to the Done_Pg pin of the Xilinx,
which is low during configuration. This assures that the solenoids are off
during Xilinx configuration (at power-up). In each driver, both the IRLR120
FETs and the PMBT4403 transistor have to operate in saturation as
switches. Thus the solenoids are pulled up to +24 Vdc on one side, and the
returns are pulled to ground to be energized.
The glow plug and the ignite solenoid are turned on simultaneously by
AND gate U24D and Q20. The voltage to the glow plug is 3 Vac, via relay
K1. The 3 Vac is shown at the lower, left of sheet 2 of the schematic. It
originates at the transformer.
6-46 PC Board Electronics Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084)
Xilinx 3030
U21 (beneath the interlock signal lines on sheet 2), is a programmable
oscillator that is programed to output a clock of 3 Hz. This clock is the time
base for all of the logic timing in the Xilinx.
The interlock signals shown on sheet 1, and listed in the table above, are
modified in the Xilinx (U22) and sent to the CPU on the system control board
via J20 at the upper, right of sheet 2.
The interlocks listed in the table above, the flame-sense signal, and three
commands from the CPU are inputs to the Xilinx. The commands are
FLAME (at J20-10), N2O (at J20-20), and GAS_ON_OFF (at J20-9).
Xilinx Logic
The timing and control logic is implemented in the Xilinx PGA
(programmable gate array). All the timing is derived from the 3-Hz CLK
signal input on pin 13 of U22 (see sheet 2 of schematic N041-9080). The
Xilinx input and output signals are described in the paragraphs below.
The SAFE TEST signal (the output at pin 70) is the signal to the CPU
(when it is high) that allows (enables) a flame to be lit. SAFE TEST is high
when all interlocks, including FLAME SENSE, are high.
These interlocks are sent on to the CPU after passing through internal
latches in the Xilinx. The latches make certain that a momentary failure on
any of the interlocks listed above (while the flame is lit) latches in the failure.
This ensures that the flame stays shut down.
If the FLAME_SENSE signal (at pin 62 of the Xilinx) does not stay high
after 3 seconds, the gases are shut off in the standard sequence, which is
FUEL off first and AIR off 5 seconds later (for a C2H2/AIR flame) . The
OX_PRESS_OUT signal at pin 71 of the Xilinx must be high 1 second after
the FLAME command is received, indicating that the oxidant is present. The
one-second time delay is necessary because the oxidant pressure sensor is
located downstream from the AIR and N2O solenoid valves.
The N2O-CTRL signal from the CPU causes a switch from air to N2O
when the flame is lit. The N2O-HD interlock must be high for that switch
to occur, and the switch can occur only after the flame is lit for six seconds.
The BOOST command (at pin 68 of U22) is turned on one second before
the N2O command is asserted, and goes off one second after the N2O
command is turned off. AIR-SOL is always turned off when the N2O
command is turned on and vice-versa.
PC Board Electronics Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9084) 6-47
The GAS ON_OFF command (input to the Xilinx at pin 29) is used to
adjust flows and bleed the system. When GAS ON_OFF is asserted, the
AIR PRESS_OUT and FUEL_PRESS OUT valves are turned on for ten
seconds. At the end of the ten seconds, if the N2O_HD_OUT command is
asserted, the N2O valve is turned on for five seconds.
6-48 PC Board Electronics Turret Board Assembly (N041-9094)
Turret Board Assembly (N041-9094)

The turret board was designed to provide an interface between the main
system board and the new, wireless HCL lamps used in the new turret
design. The board includes the current switching for the primary lamp. The
turret will accommodate 6 lamps at a time. In addition, each lamp has an
identification circuit embedded in it. The turret board is the communications
interface to the lamp ID circuits.
The plastic turret hub and six connectors are an integral part of the
turret board assembly. The turret board is mounted inside the turret hub
and the connectors are mounted on the other side.
The turret-board schematic (N041-9090), which is included in Chapter 9,

is divided into three separate circuits. The circuits are:
• current switching control for primary lamp
• interface for lamp-coding chips
• provision for board-identification information
Primary Lamp Control
The primary lamp selection is accomplished with decoder U106 at the left,
and near the top of, schematic N041-9090. The inputs to the decoder come
from sheet 5 of the main systems board schematic (N041-9000). When the
firmware selects a primary lamp, the proper output of the decoder is driven
low, and the LED in the chosen solid-state relay (U10A - U15A) is turned on.
There is then a return path for the lamp cathode, and the selected lamp
lights. Since the outputs of decoder U106 are mutually exclusive, only one
primary lamp can be energized at one time.
Interface for Lamp-Coding Chips
This bi-directional transceiver (U116) interrogates each lamp for the

information in its DS2502 add-only memory chip. This serial memory
component contains 1024 bits of write-once, non-volatile memory. The
component manufacturer programs the unique serial number, and P-E
Manufacturing programs the type of lamp, cookbook information, and
manufacturing data.
The processor on the main system board sets up a dialogue with the
DS2502 chip through transceiver U116. The communications is bi-
directional and is controlled by the LAMP-DIR signal to the transceiver via
PC Board Electronics Keyboard Display Board (N040-1054) 6-49
J8-2 (see schematic N041-9090). This is the same line that controls the latch
and buffer for data transfers on sheet 5 of the main system board schematic
(N041-9000).
Board-Identification Provision
The board-identification provision is another DS2502 add-only memory

chip (U117). This chip is identical to the memory chip in the lamp. One of
these ICs is included on most all printed-circuit board in the AAnalyst. The
IC contains board ID information.
Keyboard Display Board (N040-1054)
Figure 6-4. Keyboard.

6-50 PC Board Electronics Keyboard Display Board (N040-1054)
Figure 6-5. Keyboard schematic.

PC Board Electronics Timing Diagrams 6-51
Timing Diagrams
The following figures (Figures 6-6 through 6-10) are the system timing
diagrams. (The specified intervals at the top of the diagrams are in counts.)
Figure 6-6. Timing Diagram for AA Mode (Mode 0).

6-52 PC Board Electronics Timing Diagrams
Figure 6-7. Timing Diagram for AA− BG Mode (Mode 1).
Figure 6-8. Timing Diagram for AA-Lin Mode (Mode 4).

PC Board Electronics Timing Diagrams 6-53
Figure 6-9. Timing Diagram for AA-BG Lin Mode (Mode 5).
Figure 6-10. Timing Diagram for Emission (Mode 6).

6-54 PC Board Electronics
Burner Control System 7
About This Chapter
This chapter describes, and includes maintenance and calibration
procedures for, the AAnalyst burner systems; the burner systems include the
AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300 gas controls. The AAnalyst 100 operates
with manual gas control, and the AAnalyst 300 operates with automatic gas
(flame) control. Figures 7-2 and 7-4 are flow schematics of the AAnalyst 100;
Figures 7-3 and 7-5 are flow schematics of the AAnalyst 300.
The major parts of the burner control system are the:
Burner Assembly
Drain System
Igniter Assembly
Gas Box
The maintenance instructions for the parts listed above include the following:
l Burner Maintenance - This material includes instructions for removing

the burner assembly from the spectrometer and for cleaning the burner
head, the burner chamber, and the nebulizer.
l Drain System Maintenance - This material describes flushing the drain
system, replacing the drain tube, and replacing the trap and switch
assembly.
l Igniter Assembly Maintenance - This paragraph describes adjusting,
removing, and servicing the igniter assembly.
7-2 Burner Control System About This Chapter
l Gas Box Maintenance and Calibration - This paragraph includes the

procedure for calibrating the gas flows for the AAnalyst 300 and basic
maintenance procedures for the gas boxes of both the AAnalyst 100 and
the AAnalyst 300. These procedures include adjusting the internal
(nebulizer) pressure regulator and replacing the (gas) solenoids.
Burner Control System System Description 7-3
System Description
The System Description includes a system overview, burner assembly
description, igniter and drain system description, and descriptions of the
AAnalyst 100 and AAnalyst 300 gas control systems.
System Overview
The burner control system includes the burner assembly, nebulizer,
burner drain system, igniter assembly, and gas controls (or gas box). See
Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1. Burner System Diagram.

7-4 Burner Control System System Description
There are two versions of the "gas box" available; manual gas control is
used for the AAnalyst 100 (see Figures 7-2 and 7-4), and automatic flame
control is used for the AAnalyst 300 (see Figures 7-3 and 7-5). Figures 7-2
through 7-5 are the pneumatic and schematic diagrams for the AAnalyst 100
and 300.
Burner Assembly
A sample solution is aspirated through the GemTip nebulizer and sprayed
as a fine aerosol into the burner mixing chamber. Here the sample is mixed
with fuel and either air or nitrous oxide gases and then carried to the burner
head, where combustion and atomization occur. Fuel gas enters the burner
mixing chamber through the fuel inlet hose, while the oxidant enters through
the nebulizer side-arm and the Aux. Oxidant inlet.
Burner Drain System

Unused sample is drained from the burner assembly down to a 15-liter
(four gallon) polyethylene bottle. The drain system includes a drain tube
which is clamped onto the mixing chamber end cap, and two float switches in
the drain bottle that shut down the AAnalyst flame if the drain system is not
functioning properly.
The drain bottle includes an internal trap to make certain that there is
hydraulic back pressure for the burner mixing chamber. There are two
magnetically activated, hermetically sealed reed float switches in the trap.
One of the switches makes certain that there is enough liquid inside the trap,
and the other indicates that the drain bottle is full.
Since the drain is one of the safety interlocks of the AAnalyst, if either of
the reed float switches is activated an interlock signal shuts down the gases,
therefore extinguishing the flame or preventing ignition. See the discussion
of the electrical interlocks in the description of sheet 3 of the Flame Board
schematic (N041-9010) for the AAnalyst 300, and in the description of the
Manual Gas-Control board schematic (N041-9080) for the AAnalyst 100.
Drain system maintenance includes replacing the trap and switch
assembly P/N N040-0058; individual switches are not replaceable.
Instructions for replacing the drain tubing and cleaning (flushing) the drain
system are also included in the maintenance paragraphs. All maintenance
procedures are included later in this chapter.
Igniter Assembly
When the ignite switch is pressed, the glow plug is energized and heats
up. The ignite solenoid is also energized and swings the igniter arm into
place directly above the slot in the burner head. (See the igniter maintenance
procedure for repositioning the igniter arm on page 26 of this chapter.)
The igniter arm is a gas-capture tube through which the gases flow to
the glow plug. The gases are ignited by the heat of the glow plug, and a
flame is produced in the burner head slot.
The igniter assembly includes the glow plug, the ignite solenoid and
igniter arm. It also includes the burner head interface circuit (PC board
N041-9064), which includes a flame detect circuit. (See the electrical
description of the Burner-Interface board in the Chapter of this Service
Manual describing the Electrical System of the AAnalyst 100/300)
AAnalyst 100 Gas Control

The AAnalyst 100 has the following controls and indicators for setting the
oxidant and fuel flows to the burner end cap and nebulizer:
• Gases On/Off switch on the keypad

• N2O switch on the keypad
• Oxidant flow controller needle valve and flowmeter
• Fuel flow controller needle valve and flowmeter
• Nebulizer Pressure Regulator
When the Gases On/Off button on the AAnalyst 100 keypad is lit, the
oxidant and fuel solenoids in the gas manifold (see Figures 7-2 and 7-4) are
energized. Oxidant and fuel then flows through the flowmeters to the burner
assembly.
NOTE: If the fuel pressure drops below 7.5 psi, or oxidant

pressure drops below 40 psi, the fuel or oxidant pressure switch
in the gas manifold will open, shutting down the fuel and air
flow in a safe sequence, or preventing ignition.
NOTE: The oxidant and fuel flow rates can be adjusted for 9
seconds after the fuel and air solenoids are energized (after the
Gases On/Off switch is pressed).
When the N2O switch is lit, and the flame is lit, the (aux) oxidant to the
burner assembly is nitrous oxide. When the N2O switch is not lit, the (aux)
oxidant to the burner assembly is air.
NOTE: Prior to ignition, when the N2O switch on the

AAnalyst 100 is lit, an air/acetylene mixture flows to the
burner assembly. This is followed by an orderly switch over to
nitrous oxide and acetylene.
During the switch over to N2O, the fuel boost solenoid is

energized. The boost automatically increases the fuel flow rate
by approximately 50%. This additional flow (see the flow
schematics) is not adjustable, nor is it reflected in the
flowmeter readings.
The oxidant flow controller needle valve adjusts the flow of the (aux)
oxidant to the burner, while the fuel flow needle valve controls the flow of the
acetylene to the burner.
An internal pressure regulator also controls the flow of the aux oxidant to
the burner end cap (see the flow schematics). This pressure regulator also
controls the oxidant pressure to the nebulizer (NEB) line for sample
aspiration. (It is set at the factory for 32 psig). See the maintenance
procedures at the back of this Chapter for the procedure for adjusting the
regulator.
Figure 7-2. AAnalyst 100 Gas Control Schematic (Manual).

AAnalyst 300 Gas Control

The AAnalyst 300 gas control differs from the AAnalyst 100 gas control in
two ways. Instead of needle valves which you adjust to set the fuel and
oxidant flows to the burner assembly, the AAnalyst 300 includes current-to-
flow transducers, which you control via the Flame Control window of the
WinLab software.
With the AAnalyst 300, you also choose nitrous oxide or air using the
flame control page. (See the AA WinLab Software Guide, P/N 0993-6190, for
a detailed description of the flame control window.)
The AAnalyst 300 includes a "pilot" (25 psi) regulator (see Figures 7-3
and 7-5) but does not require the fuel boost solenoid. The pilot pressure
regulator maintains the required air pressure to the current-to-flow
transducers for good control amplification.
NOTE: As described in the Note in the description of the

AAnalyst 100 gas control, before the flame is lit (when N2O is
chosen as the oxidant), a mixture of air and acetylene flows to
the burner. An orderly transition to nitrous oxide and
acetylene occurs after ignition. The same is true for the
AAnalyst 300.
Figure 7-3. AAnalyst 300 Gas Control Schematic (Automatic).

7-10 Burner Control System Burner Maintenance
The two notes below apply to the AAnalyst 300 as well as to the AAnalyst
100. The one difference is that, as stated in the second note for the AAnalyst
300 (automatic gas control), the flows can be adjusted for a 15-second time
interval. For the AAnalyst 100 (manual gas control), the flow rates can be
adjusted for only 9 seconds (see page 7-5).
NOTE: If the fuel pressure drops below 7.5 psi, or oxidant

pressure drops below 40 psi, the fuel or oxidant pressure switch
in the gas manifold will open, shutting down the fuel and air
flow in a safe sequence, or preventing ignition.
NOTE: The oxidant and fuel flow rates can be adjusted for 15
seconds after the fuel and air solenoids are energized.
Burner Maintenance
In normal operation, the burner assembly (burner head, burner chamber,
end cap and nebulizer) should be cleaned weekly. If samples with high solids
contents have been aspirated, the burner assembly should be cleaned daily.
The procedures that follow describe how to remove, disassemble and clean
the burner assembly. You should remove the burner assembly first, then
disassemble it, clean the individual burner components, and finally
reassemble and replace the burner assembly in the instrument.
Removing the Burner Assembly

To remove the burner assembly from the sample compartment, refer to
Figure 3-3 and proceed as follows:
1. Extinguish the flame, turn off the gases and let the burner cool.
2. Open the burner compartment door.
3. Remove the large interlock connector at the lower back of the burner
compartment. To remove it, first press down on the latch at the top of the
connector. (The latch has a small plastic "pad" on it to make it easier to
press.)
NOTE: When you replace the interlock connector, first press

down on the back of the connector to compress the spring-
loaded mechanical (interlock) knob beneath it. The connector
can then be easily reinserted into its socket.
4. Press down, using your thumb, on the large, rectangular quick-disconnect

release plate at the bottom of the sample compartment tray. (You will
hear a loud click when the burner assembly is released.)
Burner Control System Burner Maintenance 7-11
5. Refer to Figure 3-3 and carefully slide the burner assembly out of the
sample compartment tray assembly.
Removing the Burner Assembly Components

After powering down the AAnalyst, turning off all gas supplies,
and removing the burner assembly from the AAnalyst sampling
compartment as described in the previous paragraph, proceed to disassemble
the burner components by following the procedure in this paragraph. The
maintenance (cleaning) procedures are included in the following paragraph.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press in the burner-head safety latch and remove the burner head from
the burner chamber.
2. Unscrew the large burner-head retaining ring and remove the burner O-
ring from the burner chamber.
3. Lift the nebulizer spring (retaining) clamp and remove the nebulizer from
the end cap. (You can normally leave the Oxidant tubing connected to the
nebulizer body assembly.)
4. Loosen the four screws securing the end cap and remove the end cap.
NOTE: Loosen the four screws in pairs (i.e., one in each of the
opposite corners simultaneously).
NOTE: Normally you can leave the Fuel and Aux. Oxidant
lines attached to the end cap.
5. Remove the two thumbscrews which attach the burner chamber and the
plate beneath it to the burner assembly. Then remove the chamber and
its plate from the burner assembly.
Proceed to the following paragraph for the procedures for cleaning the
burner head, the burner chamber, and the nebulizer.
Cleaning Burner Components

In this paragraph we give cleaning procedures for the burner head, the
burner chamber, and the GemTip nebulizer.
Cleaning the Burner Head
Air / Acetylene
Continuous operation of the air-acetylene burner heads will produce

deposits in and near the slot. These droplets cause a ragged flame. A badly
clogged slot may cause a flashback. Scrape the surface and interior of the
slot at frequent intervals.
NOTE: The burner head can be scraped without removing the

burner head from the burner assy. The flame must be off,
however.
Unstable acetylides, which are especially likely to explode when

permitted to dry, may be formed when nebulizing high
concentrations of silver, copper, or mercury salts in an acetylene
Warning flame. Thoroughly flush the burner mixing chamber and waste
drain tube with water immediately after this kind of analysis. Then
visually inspect the burner mixing chamber to be sure that all
traces of residue have been removed.
Nitrous Oxide
Continuous operation of the nitrous oxide burner head will produce

deposits in and near the slot. These deposits cause a ragged flame. A badly
clogged slot could also cause a flashback. Scrape the surface and interior of
the slot at frequent intervals. Use the cleaning tool (P/N N303-1573) provided
with the burner head.
NOTE: The burner head can be scraped without removing the

burner head from the burner assy. The flame must be off,
however.
Unstable acetylides, which are especially likely to explode when

permitted to dry, may be formed when nebulizing high
concentrations of silver, copper, or mercury salts in an acetylene
Warning flame. Thoroughly flush the burner mixing chamber and waste
drain tube with water immediately after this kind of analysis. Then
visually inspect the burner mixing chamber to be sure that all
traces of residue have been removed.
Cleaning the Burner Chamber
1. With the burner chamber removed from the burner assembly as described
above, check the burner-head retaining O-ring (P/N B004-7207) and the
end cap O-ring (P/N 0990-2147) for signs of wear and damage. Replace
the O-ring(s) if necessary.
2. Clean the burner-chamber interior and the end-cap interior with a

detergent solution. Be careful not to damage the surfaces with abrasive
tools.
Caution Never use acid or kitchen cleansers to clean the burner chamber or
end-cap interior.
3. After cleaning them with a detergent solution, rinse the burner-chamber

and end-cap interiors with deionized water.
Detail of end Sectional View of end of Capillary Holder

of Capillary Holder
Sapphire Tip Sapphire Tip
Bevel faces up. The inside taper of the press-fit

sapphire tip helps guide the cleaning wire.
Alignment Key
2 cm of 0.84 mm I.D.
Teflon Tubing (0998-5708)
Adjustment Nut
(N037-1492)
O-Ring
(0992-6083)
Capillary Holder Assembly
Gland Nut (N037-1520)
(N037-1505)
Capillary Tubing (0990-8265)
Body Assembly
(N037-0398) O-Rings (2)
Spring (0990-2015)
(0990-2473)
Nebulizer
Side Arm Socket-Head
Screw (2)
Locking Nut (0991-0407)

(N037-1493) Nebulizer Interlock
Two-Part Clamp
(N040-1159)
Alignment
Keyway Bar Magnet (0992-3133)
Oxidant Tubing
Connector Nut
Nebulizer End View (N037-1485)
Figure 7-6A. Standard GemTip Nebulizer Assembly.

Detail of end of Sectional View of end of Capillary Holder

Capillary Holder
Sapphire Tip
The inside taper of the press-fit sapphire tip

helps guide the cleaning wire.
Alignment Key
Teflon Tubing (0998-5708)
Adjustment Nut
(N037-1492)
O-Ring
(0992-6083)
Capillary Holder Assembly
Gland Nut (N037-1522)
(N037-1505)
Capillary Tubing (0990-8265)
Impact Bead Structure
(B050-5086)
Body Assembly
(N037-0399) O-Rings (2)
Spring (0990-2015)
(0990-2473)
Nebulizer
Side Arm Socket-Head
Screw (2)
Locking Nut (0991-0407)

(N037-1493) Nebulizer Interlock
Two-Part Clamp
(N040-1159)
Alignment
Keyway Bar Magnet (0992-3133)
Oxidant Tubing
Connector Nut
Nebulizer End View (N037-1485)
Figure 7-6B. High-Sensitivity GemTip Nebulizer Assembly.

Cleaning the Nebulizer
To maintain optimum nebulizer performance, you must periodically clean

the capillary holder assembly, and occasionally replace the capillary (sample)
tubing and Teflon tubing installed in the capillary-holder gland nut (see
Figures 7-6A or B and 7-8).
When aspirating concentrated samples with complex matrices, it is

especially important to keep the nebulizer free of sample deposits. In
addition to regular cleaning, it is beneficial to periodically aspirate a dilute
surfactant solution, such as 0.1% Triton X100, for several minutes to keep
the system clean.
The surfactant solution will encourage constant drainage, which is

required for obtaining optimum burner system performance.
When using the high-sensitivity GemTip nebulizer, the impact bead may
have to be replaced. Also, to avoid damage to the impact bead, remove the
bead when you clean the capillary holder assembly. Instructions for
removing and replacing the bead are included in the last paragraph of the
nebulizer maintenance instructions.
Nebulizer Side Arm*

Spring Clamp
Nebulizer Interlock Clamp Assembly
Connector Nut* (N037-1485)
Oxidant Tubing
Locking Nut*
(N037-1493)
Drain Clamp Nebulizer Adjustment Nut*

(N037-0391) (N037-1492)
* Part of Nebulizer Drain Tube
Figure 7-7. Burner End-Cap Assembly (N037-0392) with a GemTip

Nebulizer Installed.
Cleaning the Capillary Holder Assembly
Clean the capillary holder assembly whenever you notice a degradation in

absorbance values due to blockage of the capillary. There are two ways to
clean the capillary holder:
A. The first (simplified) way should be used for minor capillary blockage.
This method involves passing one of the cleaning wires, supplied, through
the capillary holder and replacing the capillary (sample) tubing. For the
standard nebulizer, the nebulizer can stay in the end cap. For the high-
sensitivity nebulizer, you must remove the nebulizer from the end cap to
avoid damaging the impact bead.
B. The second (complete cleaning) procedure requires removal of both the

standard and high-sensitivity nebulizers from the end cap. It also
requires shutting down the spectrometer; the tubing in the capillary-
holder gland nut is replaced, and the nebulizer body is cleaned when
required. This procedure must be performed if you had no success when
using the simplified method (A).
A. Simplified Cleaning of Standard and High-Sensitivity GemTip

Nebulizers
A1. Standard Nebulizers
For simplified (light) cleaning of a standard GemTip nebulizer capillary

holder, proceed as follows (refer to Figure 7-6A):
1. Remove the capillary tubing from the gland nut.
2. Take one of the cleaning wires (P/N 0303-0135) supplied, and push it
through the capillary holder from its wider (open) end. (It may take
several attempts to pass the wire through the narrow sapphire tip.)
NOTE: Use a straight section of the cleaning wire to avoid

scratching the interior of the capillary holder. Scratching
the interior will result in shavings appearing where the
wire exits the holder. Wipe away any shavings that
appear.
3. Repeat step 2 several times. Then replace the capillary (sample) tubing.
4. Run several standards to determine if the capillary holder has been

cleared. If it has been cleared, proceed with normal spectrometer
operation; otherwise, proceed with the Complete Cleaning procedure (B).
A2. High-Sensitivity Nebulizers
For simplified cleaning of a high-sensitivity GemTip nebulizer capillary

holder, proceed as follows (refer to Figure 7-6B):
Wear protective gloves when you remove the nebulizer from the
end cap if you were analyzing toxic samples.
Warning
1. Turn off the spectrometer and turn off all gas supplies.
2. Lift the end-cap spring (see Figure 7-7), and gently pull the nebulizer out
of the burner end cap.
3. Remove the impact bead; handle it very carefully. See the instructions for
removing and replacing the bead at the end of these cleaning instructions.
4. Remove the capillary tubing from the gland nut.
5. Take one of the cleaning wires (P/N 0303-0135) supplied, and push it
through the capillary holder from its wider (open) end. (It may take
several attempts to pass the wire through the small sapphire tip.)
NOTE: Use a straight section of the cleaning wire to avoid

appear.
6. Repeat step 5 several times. Then replace the impact bead (see the
instructions at the end of these cleaning procedures), and replace the
capillary (sample) tubing.
7. Replace the nebulizer in the end cap and secure it with the end-cap spring
clamp.
8. Turn on the spectrometer and turn on the gas supplies.
9. Run several standards to see if the capillary holder has been cleared. If it
has, proceed with normal spectrometer operation. If it hasn't, proceed
with the complete cleaning procedure (B), below.
B. Complete Cleaning of Standard and High-Sensitivity GemTip

Nebulizers
To clean a stubborn blockage from a standard or high-sensitivity GemTip

nebulizer, perform the procedure below. (Refer to Figure 7-6A or 7-6B).
Wear protective gloves when you remove the nebulizer from the
end cap if you were analyzing toxic samples.
Warning
Removal and Disassembly
1. Turn off the spectrometer and turn off all gas supplies.
2. Lift the end-cap spring clamp (see Figure 7-7) and gently pull the
nebulizer out of the burner end cap.
3. After freeing the nebulizer from the end cap, carefully remove the black
oxidant tubing (labeled NEB) from the nebulizer arm as follows:
a. First loosen the connector nut (N037-1485); see Figure 7-6A or 7-6B.
b. Then, while holding the nebulizer assembly in one hand, rock the
black tubing with the other hand while gently coaxing the tubing off
the ridges at the end of the nebulizer side arm.
4. If you are cleaning a high-sensitivity nebulizer, remove the fragile impact

bead. Handle it with care. (See the instructions at the end of these
cleaning procedures.)
5. Refer to Figure 7-6A or 7-6B, and loosen and then remove the adjustment
nut N037-1492.
6. Remove the capillary holder from the nebulizer body assembly.
7. Unscrew and remove the gland nut (N037-1505) from the capillary holder
assembly.
Cleaning
1. With the capillary holder in one hand, take one of the cleaning wires (P/N
0303-0135) supplied, and push it through the capillary holder from its
wider (open) end. (It may take several attempts to pass the wire through
the narrow sapphire tip.)
NOTES: 1) You may have to press the wire through the

narrow (sapphire-tipped) end of the capillary holder if the
blockage is very stubborn.
2) Use a straight section of the cleaning wire to avoid
appear.
2. Remove the tubing installed in the gland nut by first pulling the 0.6-mm
capillary tubing from the 0.84-mm Teflon tubing. Then, using a needle-
nose pliers if necessary, pull the 0.84-mm Teflon tubing out of the gland
nut.
3. Either clean the gland nut (P/N N037- 1505) by sonicating it in distilled
water, or discard it and replace it with a new one.
4. If the inside of the nebulizer body assembly appears dirty, sonicate the
body assembly in distilled water. Then proceed to reassemble the
nebulizer.
Reassembly and Replacement
1. Cut a 20-cm piece (8-in.) of 0.6-mm capillary tubing and a 2.3-cm (0.95-
in.) piece of 0.84-mm capillary tubing. Cut the 0.6-mm capillary tubing at
a 45°angle so that the tubing can be readily installed in step 5, below.
2. Insert the 2.3-cm piece of 0.84-mm ID Teflon tubing into the smaller-
diameter end of the gland nut (see Figure 7-6A or 7-6B) so that it is just
held in the gland nut.
3. Thread the gland nut into the capillary holder, thereby forcing the tubing
back through the nut.
NOTE: The 0.84-mm ID tubing will be forced back in the

gland nut until it just protrudes from the back (wider-
diameter) end of the gland nut.
4. Press and rotate a push-pin (or a tapered needle or thumb tack with a
similar diameter) into the piece of Teflon tubing now extending out of the
back (wider-diameter) end of the gland nut (see Figure 7-8). This will
expand the hole in the 0.84-mm Teflon tubing so that the capillary tubing
can be inserted into the Teflon tubing. (See the next step.)
Figure 7-8. Expanding the Teflon Tubing with a Tapered Pin or Needle to
Facilitate Installing the Capillary (Sample) Tubing
5. Insert one end of the 20-cm (8-in.) capillary (sample) tubing (cut at a 45 °
angle in step 1, above) into the "expanded" Teflon tubing until it is held
firmly but is not bent or crimped.
6. Replace the impact bead if you are reassembling a high-sensitivity

nebulizer.
7. Replace the capillary holder in the nebulizer body assembly. Make

certain the alignment key on the capillary holder enters the alignment
key way in the body assembly (see Figure 7-6A or 7-6B).
8. Replace the adjustment nut on the nebulizer body assembly.
9. Reinstall the nebulizer in the end cap as described in the installation

procedure.
10. Turn the spectrometer back on, and turn on all gas supplies.
C. Removing and Replacing the High-Sensitivity Nebulizer's Impact

Bead
The high-sensitivity nebulizer utilizes a ceramic, one-piece, impact-bead

structure (P/N B050-5086 − see Figure 7-6B) which improves nebulization
efficiency. The bead itself is held by two fragile support arms. The bead
structure mounts directly on the nebulizer's body assembly.
To remove the impact bead from the nebulizer, hold the bead structure
by its base only, and rotate it approximately 1/8 turn counterclockwise
before carefully lifting it from the nebulizer's body assembly.
To install the impact bead, hold it by its base and carefully push it down
to the body assembly's shoulder. Then rotate it, holding only the base,
approximately 1/8 turn clockwise (i.e., until it stops).
7-22 Burner Control System Drain System Maintenance
Drain System Maintenance

This section describes how to service the drain system (see Figure 3-6).
The following procedures are included:
l Cleaning (Flushing) the Drain System

l Replacing the Drain Tubing
l Cleaning the Drain-Trap Switch Assembly (including the drain loop)
l Replacing the Drain Assembly
Cleaning (Flushing) the Drain System

The drain system should be flushed thoroughly with water at the end of
each working day to remove caustic, corrosive, or organic waste materials
that could otherwise damage the burner chamber or drain tubing.
To flush the drain system, remove the burner head and slowly pour about
500 ml of water into the burner chamber. Allow the water to drain into the
waste vessel.
Replacing the Drain Tubing

If the drain tubing (P/N 0250-7987 for one foot of tubing) is damaged or
dirty and needs to be replaced, refer to Figure 3-6 and proceed as follows:
1. Turn off the AAnalyst Power switch and remove the line cord.
2. Remove all effluent from the drain (waste) bottle.
All waste must be disposed of following the regulations applicable

to the pertinent locality, state, and or, country.
Warning
3. Disconnect the (white) drain-switch electrical connector from the burner

assembly.
4. Disconnect the drain tubing from both the drain vessel and the drain
outlet on the burner end cap by loosening the clamps on each end of the
tubing. Once the clamps are loosened, the tubing will pull out easily.
5. Unwrap the spiral wrap from the drain tubing.
6. Place the new piece of drain tubing (P/N 0250-7987 for one foot) next to
the drain interlock cable and carefully rewrap the spiral wrap around
both the tubing and the cable.
Burner Control System Drain System Maintenance 7-23
7. Place the drain clamp on the upper end of the new drain tubing, and
attach the tubing to the drain outlet on the burner end cap. Tighten the
clamp securely.
8. Place the other drain clamp on the lower end of the drain tubing. Then
attach the tubing to the drain trap switch assembly. Tighten the clamp
securely.
9. Plug the drain interlock connector into the receptacle under the burner.
Make sure the interlock connector is plugged in all the way.
10. In order for the sample introduction system to drain smoothly, the
internal surface of the new drain tube needs to be prepared. This is easily
accomplished by aspirating a 50/50 solution of water and methanol for
approximately 5 minutes.
NOTE: The internal surface of the drain tube must be

prepared, as specified in step 10, after the drain tubing is
replaced.
Cleaning the Trap Switch Assembly

1. Extinguish the flame, turn off the gases (if on) and power down the
instrument. Then remove the instrument line cord.
2. Obtain a bucket or a container large enough in which to dip the trap

switch assembly up to the water line (see Figure 3-6).
NOTE: The drain-trap switch assembly should not be

immersed above the water line shown in the figure. This
makes certain you will not get water into the holes at the top of
the assembly.
3. Unscrew the retainer cap from the drain vessel. Slide out the drain-trap
switch assembly including the drain loop (leaving the drain tubing and
white interlock cable attached).
4. Place the trap switch assembly (including the drain loop) in the bucket
after filling it with soapy water.
5. Then clean the trap switch assembly, while it is in the bucket, with a test
tube brush.
6. Remove the assembly from the bucket, dump out the soapy water, and
replace it with clean water.
7. Rinse the trap switch assembly in the clean water.

7-24 Burner Control System Drain System Maintenance
8. Replace the drain loop and the trap switch assembly in the waste vessel
and replace the retainer cap.
Replacing the Drain Assembly

Since the individual float switches are not replaceable, if the switches
become inoperable due to the build up of slurry liquids over long periods of
time, or if a float malfunction occurs in one of the switches, you must replace
the drain assembly (P/N N040-0058). See Figure 3-6.
The procedure for replacing the assembly is given below. When you have
removed the assembly, prepare it for disposal. To remove and replace the
assembly, proceed as follows:
Removing the Used Assembly
1. Turn off the AAnalyst Power switch and remove the instrument line cord.
2. Remove all effluent from the drain bottle.
3. Disconnect the (white) drain-switch electrical connector from near the

burner end cap.
4. Remove the drain tubing from both the drain bottle and the burner end
cap by loosening both clamps.
5. Remove the (white) electrical wiring from the spiral wrap around the
drain tubing.
6. Unscrew the large, white cap (retainer ring) at the top of the drain bottle.
7. Drain all the liquid from the drain assembly, and prepare it for proper
disposal.
Installing the Replacement Drain Assembly
NOTE: After replacing the drain assembly, you must prepare

the internal surface of the drain tube by aspirating a 50/50
solution of water and methanol for approximately five minutes.
1. Make certain that the AAnalyst Power switch is Off and the line-power
cord is removed.
2. Insert the (white) electrical wiring in the drain-tube spiral wrap as shown
in Figure 3-6.
3. With the large, white cap (retainer ring) at the top of the drain bottle
removed, insert the trap in the drain bottle and tighten the bottle cap.
Burner Control System Igniter Assembly Maintenance 7-25
4. Secure the drain tubing to the burner end cap and to the drain bottle
using the clamps loosened in Step 4 of the removal procedure, above.
5. Attach the (white) drain-switch electrical cable to the connector near the
burner end cap.
6. Fill the drain assembly (see Figure 3-6) with water to activate the trap
switch. (Approximately 250 mL is required to fill the drain assembly.)
Then start up the AAnalyst and proceed as before.
Igniter Assembly Maintenance

The igniter assembly includes the burner-head interface circuit (which
includes a flame detect circuit), the ignite solenoid, the igniter arm and all
associated covers, brackets and mounting hardware. Refer to Figure 7-9
whenever you replace any igniter assembly component.
Adjusting the Igniter Arm position

If the flame is not igniting properly (i.e. if it sometimes doesn't ignite
right away or doesn't ignite at all), the igniter arm may not be positioned
properly when the ignition is to occur. The end of the igniter arm must be
positioned precisely over the burner slot for proper ignition to occur.
To make certain the end of the igniter arm will be centered over the slot,
perform the following procedure:
1. Shut down the instrument and turn off all the gases.
2. Loosen the two nuts beneath the igniter assembly (see Figure 7-9).
3. Press down on the igniter assembly and rotate the igniter arm until its
end is positioned precisely over the burner slot.
4. Then tighten the two nuts, and again press down on the igniter assembly
and rotate the arm to its stop.
5. If the end of the arm still appears to be precisely over the slot, turn on all
gases and start up the AAnalyst.
6. Attempt to ignite the flame. If there is no longer any problem with

ignition, the problem has been corrected. If there is still a problem,
repeat this procedure.
7-26 Burner Control System Gas Box Maintenance
Rear View of
Igniter Assembly
End of Igniter Arm

positioned over
Burner Slot
Nuts (2)
which allow
Igniter Arm
Adjustment
Figure 7-9. Adjusting the Igniter Arm Position.
Gas Box Maintenance

Adjusting the Nebulizer Pressure Regulator (AAnalyst 100 and 300)
(See flow schematics 7-2 through 7-5.)
The pressure regulator, which controls the oxidant pressure to the

nebulizer (NEB) line and controls the flow of AUX oxidant to the burner end
cap, must be adjusted when it is first installed. It can also be checked and, if
necessary, adjusted if the oxidant pressure and/or aux oxidant flow is
suspected of causing poor precision (with higher or lower absorbance than
you expected).
Burner Control System Gas Box Maintenance 7-27
To check and adjust the regulator for an AAnalyst with a manual gas box,
proceed as described in the procedure below. See the flow schematics of the
AAnalyst 100 manual gas box (Figures 7-2 and 7-4).
Adjusting the regulator is carried out a little differently for an AAnalyst

300. For an instrument with an automatic gas box, you will bleed the gases
using the Bleed Gases icon in the WinLab Flame Control window. You will
also adjust the flows by using the Flame Control page. See the flow
schematics of the AAnalyst 300 (automatic) gas box (Figures 7-3 and 7-5.)
There is also a difference in the AAnalyst 300 hardware used to check and
adjust the regulator when connecting the pressure gauge to the pressure
regulator. You must add a Swagelok connector in order to mate the gauge
fitting with the pressure regulator fitting for the AAnalyst 300. (See step 4,
below.)
Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove the AAnalyst top and rear covers.
2. Remove the flame pipe assembly from the burner assembly.
3. Disconnect the nebulizer output hose from the nebulizer pressure

regulator by holding the output connector's red collar down and pulling
the hose out of the connector.
4. Push the red collar down and insert the tube from the nebulizer pressure
gauge into the nebulizer pressure regulator. (See the procedure for
Assembling the Gauge which appears earlier in this Chapter.)
You must add a Swagelok connector for an AAnalyst 300. See the last of
the four introductory paragraphs above.
5. With the AAnalyst 100 on, bleed the gases by pressing the Gases On/Off
button. For the AAnalyst 300, use the Bleed Gases icon in the WinLab
Flame Control window.
6. For safety reasons, adjust the Fuel flowmeter for no flow. (For the
AAnalyst 300, use the Flame Control window.)
A potential explosive danger exists when performing this

procedure. You must use a hood; pure acetylene will be flowing.
Warning
7. The nebulizer pressure gauge should read 32 psig. If it doesn't, adjust the
nebulizer pressure regulator until it does.
8. Remove the gauge from the nebulizer pressure regulator, and reconnect
the nebulizer output hose to the regulator.
9. Re-adjust the fuel flow controller for 2 divisions on the fuel flowmeter.
(For the AAnalyst 300, use the Flame Control window.)
10. Replace the instrument covers.
Replacing Solenoids
Use this procedure to replace any of the solenoids. There are four in the
manual gas box (AAnalyst 100, see Figure 7-10): nitrous oxide, air, fuel
(acetylene) and fuel boost. There are three in the automatic gas box (see
Figure 7-11): nitrous oxide, air, and acetylene.
1. Slightly loosen the hex nut on the end of the solenoid to be replaced.
2. Rotate the solenoid in a clockwise direction to allow future

counterclockwise movement.
3. Tighten the hex nut.
4. The base of the solenoid is connected to a knurled nut on the gas manifold
via a flat-head screw, the head of which you can see in the hex nut. Free
the screw from the knurled nut.
5. Loosen the hex nut on the end of the solenoid, and turn the knurled nut
until the solenoid is free.
6. Remove the Faston connections.
7. Loosen the hex nut on the new (replacement) solenoid.
8. Screw the new solenoid into the knurled nut on the gas manifold. If there
is not enough finger space, tighten the flat-head screw to make the
connection.
9. Tighten the hex nut on the end of the solenoid and attach the Faston
connections.
Figure 7-10. Exploded view of the Manual Gas Box.

Figure 7-11. Exploded view of the Automatic Gas Box.

Assembling a Gauge Fixture

Before you can adjust the nebulizer pressure regulator, you must
assemble a gauge fixture using the procedure below. When you test the
nebulizer pressure regulator, you insert the gauge fixture in the regulator.
To build the gauge fixture, you need the following parts:
Table 7-1. Parts needed to build a Gauge Fixture
Description Part No. Quantity
Pressure Gauge 0990-7135 1
Elbow Fitting 0990-3173 4
1/4 inch O.D. Tygon tubing 0250-6515 1 foot
Swagelok Nut 0990-3199 1
Rear Ferrule 0990-3104 1
Front Ferrule 0990-3103 1
Tubing Insert 0990-3094 1
Teflon Tape 0990-8134 1
To assemble the gauge fixture, proceed as follows:
1. Wrap one layer of Teflon tape around the male thread of the pressure
gauge.
2. Attach the female end of the elbow fitting to the pressure gauge.
3. Cut about a 45-cm (18-inch) length of Tygon tubing with a single edge
razor blade. Cut the ends as square as possible.
4. Slide the Swagelok Nut, the rear ferrule, and the front ferrule over the
tygon tubing so that there are 4 mm between the end of the tubing and
the front ferrule.
5. Push a tubing insert into the end of the tubing (with the fittings).
6. Push the tubing assembly into the elbow connector. Check that the end
of the tubing bottoms out in the elbow connector before the front ferrule
makes contact.
7. Screw the Swagelok nut onto the male connector finger tight.
8. Using a 9/16-in. open-end wrench, tighten the Swagelok Nut 3/4-to a full
turn past contact.
9. Remove the Swaged assembly and inspect the front ferrule for evidence of
contact (see that it is "swaged" on the tubing). If the front ferrule has not
made contact, repeat steps 6 and 7.
10. Replace the Swaged assembly and screw the nut on finger tight (past
contact). Then, using the 9/16-in. wrench, tighten the nut an additional
quarter turn
Building a Flowmeter Fixture

Before testing the gas flows of the AAnalyst 300 in the next paragraph,
you must build the flowmeter fixture, which is to be connected between the
Fuel and Aux-Oxidant fittings on the burner end cap and the ends of the fuel
and oxidant tubing. (See the procedure, below, for testing the gas flows.)
To build the fixture, you need the following parts:
Table 7-2. Parts needed to build a Flowmeter
Description Part No. Quantity
Dual Flow Meter 0040-1052 1
Male Connector 0990-3428 4
1/4 inch O.D. 0250-6515 2 foot

Tygon tubing
Teflon Tape 0990-8134 1
Swagelok Nut 0990-3199 4
Rear Ferrule 0990-3104 4
Front Ferrule 0990-3103 4
Tubing Insert 0990-3094 4

1. Using a single-edge razor blade, cut the Tygon tubing into two 6-in.
lengths. Cut the ends as square as possible.
2. Slide a Swagelok nut, rear ferrule, and a front ferrule over each end of the
tubing. Leave 4 mm between the end of the tubing and the front ferrule.
3. Place a tubing insert into each end of the tubing.
4. Apply one wrap of Teflon tape to the 4 male threads on the back of the
dual flow meter and attach one male connector to each.
5. Push an end of one of the tubing assemblies into one of the male
connectors. Check that the end of the tubing bottoms out in the male
connector before the front ferrule makes contact.
6. Screw the Swagelok nut onto the male connector finger tight.
7. Using a 9/16-in. open-end wrench, tighten the Swagelok nut 3/4-turn to a

full turn past contact.
8. Remove the Swagelok nut assembly and inspect the front ferrule for
evidence of contact (see that it is "swaged" on the tubing). If the front
ferrule has not made contact, repeat steps 6 and 7.
9. Repeat the preswaging procedure on the three remaining tube ends.
10. Install a hose assembly on the two top fittings. Tighten the fittings finger
tight, and then tighten them an additional 1/4 turn.
7-34 Burner Control System Testing the Gas Flows (AAnalyst 300)
Testing the Gas Flows (AAnalyst 300)

To test the fuel and aux-oxidant flows, you will remove the Fuel and Aux-
Oxidant lines from the burner end cap and connect the dual-flowmeter
fixture* between the fuel and aux-oxidant lines and the end cap. You will
then measure the actual flows that correspond to the AAnalyst 300 Flame-
Control window default settings of 3 L/min for fuel and 10 L/min for air.
If, using the dual-flowmeter fixture, you obtain readings of 24 units for
C2H2 and 43 units for the oxidant, the gas box is calibrated correctly. If you
don't obtain those values, you will probably have to adjust the AAnalyst 300
transducer's zero and span pots, using the procedure following the test
procedure.
Proceed as follows to test the flows:
1. Shut down the AAnalyst and remove the aux-oxidant and fuel gas lines
from the burner end cap. Use two, 9/16-in. open-end wrenches.
NOTE: To remove a gas line, place one 9/16-in. wrench on the

end-cap fitting, and loosen the fitting on the tubing with the
other wrench.
2. Insert the dual-flowmeter fixture* between the open ends of the fuel and
oxidant gas tubing and the burner end-cap fittings.
NOTE: When you read a flow using the flowmeter fixture,

read the flow value at the center of the ball.
NOTE: The meter with the red ball must be the fuel-flow
reading.
3. Turn on the AAnalyst and, with WinLab initialized, click on the Flame
icon; the flame-control window will appear. [Note that the default
settings in the window for fuel and oxidant flows are 3 L/min for the Fuel
meter and 10 L/min for the Oxidant meter.]
4. Click Flame On/Off switch to On.
5. Read the flow meter connected between the fuel line and end cap (red
ball). It must read between 23 and 26 units.
6. Read the flow meter connected between the aux-oxidant line and the end
cap. It must read between 42 and 44 units.
7. Click Flame On/Off switch to Off.

* See the procedure for building a flowmeter fixture beginning on page 7-33.
Resetting the Flows (AAnalyst 300)
Burner Control System Resetting the Flows (AAnalyst 300) 7-35
Introduction
If you do not obtain 43 and 24 units when checking the oxidant and fuel
flows, you should now simulate a flame, reduce the fuel flow to 0.2 liters/min,
and adjust the voltage-to-flow transducers as directed below:
A potential explosive danger exists when performing the following

procedure. You must use a hood; pure acetylene will be flowing.
Warning
Procedure
1. Remove the top and rear covers from the AAnalyst.
2. If the dual-flowmeter fixture is not installed between the gas tubing and
the burner end cap, install it as instructed in steps 1 and 2 of the
procedure for testing the flows which proceeds this paragraph. (Also see
the two notes following steps 1 and 2 of the testing procedure.)
3. Turn on the AAnalyst and, with WinLab started, click on the Flame icon.
You will then see the Flame Control window, including the screen
representations of flowmeters.
4. Remove the flame pipe from the igniter assembly; pull it straight up.
5. Click on ignite; this would normally light the flame.
6. After hearing the ignitor solenoid click, move the suitcase jumper (SP35)
on the flame control board (see Figure 7-12) one position (i.e., to its other
position nearer the rear of the AAnalyst.) This simulates "flame sensor
on" after the ignition sequence.
7. Using the mouse, quickly reduce the fuel-flow setting on the flame-control
window to 0.2 L/min.
Until the flow is reduced, a potential explosive danger exists as the

fuel flowing into the end cap is being released instead of being
burned. You must use a hood.
Warning
7-36 Burner Control System Resetting the Flows (AAnalyst 300)
Figure 7-12. Components on the Flame Control Board (N041-9014) and Zero
and Span adjustments on the both the Fuel and Aux
Transducers.
Checking and Calibrating the Oxidant Flow
1. Connect the DVM between TP 52 and TP 307 (GND) on the flame control
board (see Figure 7-12). Then check the flowmeter readings after making
the oxidant window settings in Table 7-3, using the mouse and the flame-
control window.
Table 7-3. Calibrating the Oxidant Flow
Oxidant Window Setting Flowmeter Reading DVM Reading (Volts)

(L/min) (Oxidant Flows)
3 (zero set point) 21 - 23 0.64
7 34 - 36 1.35
10 42 - 44 2.18
25 (span-adj. point) 91 - 93 9.99
2. If the flows are within the ranges specified in the table above, proceed to
"Checking and Calibrating the Fuel Flow" which follows this procedure.
If the oxidant flows you get are not within the ranges specified in the
table above, proceed as follows:
a. Adjust the (oxidant) flow-control window setting to 3 L/min, and use

the Zero Adjust screw on the aux-oxidant transducer (see Figure 7-12)
until the flowmeter reading is between 21 and 23 units
(see Table 7-3).
b. Adjust the oxidant window setting for 25 L/min, and use the Span
Adjust screw on the aux-oxidant transducer until the flowmeter
reading is between 91 and 93 units.
NOTE: Repeat steps a and b until both flowmeter readings

are correct.
c. Finally, check the flowmeter reading at an oxidant window setting

of 7 L/min. If the flowmeter reading is between 34 and 36 units, the
calibration has been completed.
NOTE: If you are unable to obtain the correct flow readings

after adjusting the aux-oxidant transducer's zero and span,
replace the transducer.
7-38 Burner Control System Resetting the Flows (AAnalyst 300)
Checking and Calibrating the Fuel Flow
1. Connect the DVM between TP 51 and TP 307(GND) (see Figure 7-12) on

the flame control board. Then check the flowmeter readings after making
the Fuel window settings in Table 7-4, using the mouse and the flame
control window.
During this test, for added safety, increase the oxidant flow to 25
L/min. The additional air will help to vent the acetylene. It is
mandatory that you use a hood.
Warning
Table 7-4. Calibrating the Fuel Flow
Fuel Window Setting Flowmeter Reading DVM Reading(Volts)

(L/min) (Fuel Flows)
1.0 (Zero set point) 7-9 0.474
3.0 23 - 26 1.321
8.5 (Span-adj. point) 69 - 71 7.20
2. If the flows you obtain are within the ranges specified in the table above,
perform the following:
• Turn off the flame using the flame-control window
• Replace jumper SP35 in its position nearest the front of the Aanalyst
(See Figure 7-12)
• Replace the flame pipe
• Remove the flowmeter fixture
• Replace the fuel and aux-oxidant lines to the end cap
• Replace the instrument covers.
3. If the flows you get are not within the ranges specified in Table 7-4,
above, proceed as follows:
a. Adjust the fuel window for a setting of 1.0 L/min, and use the Zero
Adjust screw on the fuel transducer (see Figure 7-12) until the
flowmeter reading is between 7 and 9 units.
b. Adjust the fuel window for a setting of 8.5, and use the Span Adjust
pot on the fuel transducer until the flowmeter reading is
between 69 and 71 units (see the Table above).
NOTE: Repeat steps a and b until both flowmeter readings

are correct.
c. Finally, check the flowmeter reading at a fuel window setting

of 3 L/min. If the flowmeter reading is between 23 and 26 units, the
calibration has been completed.
NOTE: If you are unable to obtain the correct flow readings

when adjusting the fuel transducer's zero and span, replace the
transducer.
4. Perform all six bulleted instructions in step 2, above, before

allowing normal spectrometer operation to resume.
After completing the calibration, it is essential that you turn the

flame off using the flame-control window, replace jumper SP35 in
its position nearest the front of the AAnalyst, replace the flame
Warning pipe, and replace the fuel and aux-oxidant lines to the end cap.
These things are essential because you must not leave the
AAnalyst in a condition in which fuel is escaping. Again, it is
mandatory that you use a hood.
Diagnostics 8
Overview
The AAnalyst service diagnostics provide a way for a Service Engineer to
operate the spectrometer (and the Furnace) so that he can quickly analyze
and correct problems that have occurred.
A Service Engineer can enter diagnostic commands for an AAnalyst
100 by using the keypad. All the commands, such as initializing motors,
applying offsets for repositioning the slit or the grating, for selecting
wavelength or slit, and changing the PMT voltage can be entered after
accessing the service diagnostics. To access the keypad service diagnostics,
use the procedure and list of Parameter Entry Codes (Table 8-1) beginning on
page 8-4.
A Service Engineer can enter the diagnostic commands for a computer-
controlled AAnalyst (all AAnalyst 300's and some AAnalyst 100's) by using
the WinLab software. After accessing the WinLab service diagnostics as
described beginning on page 8-6, you can initialize any one of the four motors
(including the turret and optic motors), and enter offset counts to reposition
the slits, grating, rotating optic, and turret. You can also perform
wavelength scans, and control (adjust) instrument parameters such as HCL
(lamp) current, PMT voltage, etc. There are also service-diagnostic menu
items which allow you to align lamps conveniently and to view continuous
graphics.
There are separate menus for Flame and Furnace diagnostics. The
WinLab flame diagnostics menu is shown in Figure 8-1, on page 8-7.
Following the menu, most of the flame diagnostics pages have been
reproduced. The WinLab furnace diagnostics menu is shown in Figure 8-2,
on page 8-14. Many of the furnace diagnostics pages have been reproduced
following the menu.
8-2 Diagnostics Overview
System Initialization on Power Up

Upon powering on the AAnalyst 100 or 300, the following actions are
performed.
1. clear the latches
2. read battery RAM
3. read P.C.B. (printed circuit board) DOW parts
4. initialize the display
5. initialize the serial port
6. initialize the clock on the battery RAM
7. perform a battery RAM checksum test
8. perform a microprocessor test
9. perform a RAM test
10. perform a battery RAM test
11. perform a ROM test
12. perform an ADC interrupt test
13. turn all LEDs on
14. perform a line cycle test
15. turn all LEDs off
16. initialize the grating motor
17. initialize the slit motor
18. initialize the turret motor (with turret installed)
19. initialize the optic motor (with turret installed)

Diagnostics Using Service Diagnostics with a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst 8-3
Using Service Diagnostics with a Keypad-Controlled

AAnalyst
To perform service diagnostics using a keypad-controlled AAnalyst 100,
you must first enter a series of commands to access the parameter entry
codes, check a table of the available codes, and then enter the codes which
you need to check out the instrument problem. There are codes for
initializing motors, applying offsets for slit or grating position, changing the
PMT voltage, etc.
Accessing the Parameter Entry Codes

After the Startup Diagnostics conclude with Recall Method Y/N, proceed
as follows:
1. Press the Energy key.
2. Type 1996, then press the Param Entry key.
3. When you see PE PERSONNEL ONLY, type 42, then press Enter.
4. Finally, press Energy, type the parameter code you want to enter (see
Table 8-1, below), and press Param Entry.
NOTE: Press Param Entry or Enter to advance to the next

higher parameter entry code. (Pressing Option and the left
arrow (⇒ ) key takes you to the previous code.) To access any
parameter entry code at any time, repeat step 4, above.
You can now use the parameter entry codes in Table 8-1 to initialize
motors, enter offsets, set voltages, etc.
The Diagnostics Parameter Entry Codes

We have listed in Table 8-1 the parameters (functions) that can be
accessed, their default values and acceptable ranges (when applicable), and
their entry codes.
8-4 Diagnostics Using Service Diagnostics with a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst
Table 8-1. Keyboard Parameter Entry Codes for the

Stand-Alone AAnalyst 100.
Parameter Default Value Range/Comment Entry Code

(Function)
Display Diagnostics − − 44
Keypad Diagnostics − − 45
Printer Diagnostics − − 46
HCL Current Ramp − − 47

Diagnostic
PMT Voltage Ramp − − 48

diagnostics
D2 Lamp Current Ramp − − 49

diagnostics
Recorder Output Voltage − − 50

Ramp Diagnostics
Enter PMT Voltage 250 V 250 - 850 V 58

(no scroll)
Enter D2 Counts 0 0-255 59

(no scroll)
PC Remote Control 1 0-NO 60

(no scroll) 1-YES
Set GPIB Address 7 − 61

(no scroll)
Grating Motor Offset 5000 0 - 10,000 65
Slit Motor Offset 22 − 66
Turret Motor Offset 800 0-1000 67
Optic Motor Offset 250 100 - 400 68
Optic Cal Setup 0 − 69

Diagnostics Using Service Diagnostics with a Keypad-Controlled AAnalyst 8-5
Parameter Default Value Range/Comment Entry Code

(Function)
Init. Any Motor ( G = 0, − − 70

S = 1, T = 2, O = 3)
Move Grating to 185000 nm 0=0nm*, 1=324nm(Cu), 71

Position (without 2=405nm, [3=436nm,
peaking) 4=546nm**, 5=577nm-all
Hg],6=579nm
*White Line
**Green Line
Move Slit to Position 1 0=2.0 H, 1 = 0.7 H, 72

2=0.2H, 3=0.2L, 4=0.7L
Move Turret to Position 1 1-6 73
Move M1 to Position 45° 40°to 360° 74

(integers only)
Peak Grating (Fine (2) − − 75

Coarse (3)
Peak Slit Fine (2) − 76

−
Coarse (3)
Peak Turret Fine (2) − 77
Coarse (3) −
Peak Optic Fine (2) − 78
Coarse (3)
Test Any Motor ( G = 0, − − 79

S = 1, T = 2, O = 3)
Set Real-Time Clock − − 81
Time
Set Real-Time Clock − − 82
Date
Inspect Lamp − For Lamp in turret 83
position 1, the lamp
element, serial #, and
part no. are shown.
8-6 Diagnostics Using Service Diagnostics with WinLab
Using Service Diagnostics with WinLab

Accessing WinLab Service Diagnostics
To access service diagnostics using computer control (WinLab), do the
following:
1. Click on the Program Manager (Windows) MS/DOS icon or otherwise

access DOS.
2. Type the following after the MS/DOS prompt to access the WinLab
directory:
"cd\AAWINLAB"
Then press Enter.
3. Type the following after AAWINLAB>
"edit hardware.hdw"
then press Enter.
4. Edit the hardware configuration file by:
a. Noting "iconized = yes" appears at the bottom of the first grouping of

parameters (Common Parameters).
b. Type "no" in place of "yes." The last item will then be "iconized = no,"
which means that the service diagnostics icon will appear, and that
you can open and use service diagnostics.
5. Save the hardware configuration file, exit the hardware configuration

file, and finally exit DOS by typing "exit" and pressing Enter.
NOTE: When you have finished using service diagnostics,

repeat steps 1 - 5 and change "iconized = no" back to
"iconized = yes", as the service diagnostics are NOT to be easily
accessible by our customers.
6. If WinLab was open, close and reopen it; otherwise just open it. You will
then see the flame "X100/300" and furnace "hga" icons, which open
service diagnostics, and allow communication with the spectrometer.
7. Click on the appropriate icon. Then click on Tools for the flame
diagnostics menu (see Figure 8-1) or "Control" for the furnace diagnostics
menu (see Figure 8-2).
Diagnostics Using Service Diagnostics with WinLab 8-7
Following Figure 8-1, many of the flame diagnostic screens are included.
Following Figure 8-2, many of the furnace diagnostic screens are included.
WinLab Flame Diagnostics
Figure 8-1 WinLab (Flame) Service Diagnostics "Tools" menu.
Reset Device
When you activate "Reset device," the following occur:
• the deuterium lamp is turned off
• the printer is initialized
• the serial port is initialized
• the IEEE-488 GPIB is initialized

WinLab Furnace Diagnostics
Figure 8-2 WinLab (Furnace) Service Diagnostics "Control" menu.

`````````````
8-18 Diagnostics Error Messages For AAnalyst 100
Error Messages For AAnalyst 100
ERR:1RESULT > THAN ALLOWED FORMAT
ERR:2EXPANSION > THAN 100
ERR:3STANDARD IS NOT IN ORDER
ERR:4STANDARD NOT IN SEQUENCE
ERR:5RESLOPE STD > THAN HIGH STD
ERR:6ABS/EM&CONC SIGNS DO NOT MATCH
ERR:7INVALID CONCENTRATION CURVE
ERR:8S SHAPED CURVE - 2 COEF USED
ERR:9SAMPLE CONC > THAN HIGHEST STD
ERR:10 CALIBRATION RANGE EXCEEDED
ERR:11 SAMPLE CONC > MAXIMUM STD
ERR:12 NO CONC VAL. ENTERED FOR STD
ERR:13 RSLP STD > 20% IN ERROR
ERR:14 CORR COEF ERROR
ERR:15 NO CALIB. CURVE FOR RESLOPE
ERR:16 CURVE FIT PROBLEM
ERR:17 CALIB CURVE MAY NOT BE LINEAR
ERR:18 At SIGNAL TOO BIG FOR A/D
ERR:19 BG SIGNAL TOO BIG FOR A/D
ERR:20 MofADD ADDITIONS TOO SMALL
ERR:21 SIGNAL CHANGES DURING BOC
ERR:22 HI STD > THAN 2 COEF ASYMP.
ERR:23 CAN’T RESLOPE WITH MOFA

Diagnostics Error Messages For AAnalyst 100 8-19
ERR:24 RAM ERROR (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:25 ROM ERR (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:26 CHOPPER MTR (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:27 NO A/D IRQ (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:29 MPU ERROR (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:30 LINE FREQ (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:32 BRAM ERROR (DEPRESS CE KEY)
ERR:33 TOO MANY DIGITS
ERR:34 ENTRY MUST BE AN INTEGER
ERR:35 VALUE OUT OF RANGE
ERR:36 TOO MANY DECIMAL PLACES
ERR:38 TOO MANY SIGNIFICANT DIGITS
ERR:39 D2 CURRENT RANGE IS 0 - 255
ERR:40 PMT VOLTAGE RANGE IS 250 - 850 V.
ERR:42 SELECT GAIN WITH ENERGY OR EM
ERR:43 AGC CANNOT ASSIGN CORRECT GAIN
ERR:44 AIC CANNOT ASSIGN CORRECT GAIN
ERR:45 IEEE 488 BUS TIMEOUT
ERR:46 DATA KEY MUST BE SELECTED
ERR:47 AUTOSAMPLER NOT SELECTED
ERR:48 D2 OPTION NOT AVAILABLE
ERR:49 CAN’T SELECT EM WITH ENERGY
ERR:50 CAN'T A/Z IN PARAM ENTRY/ENERGY
ERR:51 PRINTER NOT SELECTED
ERR:52 EMISSION TOO HIGH FOR PMT

ERR:53 AUTOSAMPLER TRAY TYPE ERROR
ERR:54 AUTOSAMPLER FLUSH ERROR
ERR:55 AUTOSAMPLEFR TIME OUT ERROR
ERR:56 REPS HAVE NOT BEEN COMPLETED
ERR:57 CAN’T RECAL. WITH METH OF ADD
ERR:58 SELECT MOFA FOR A/Z FREQ
ERR:59 CAN’T USE A/S FOR PEAK AREA/HT
ERR:60 TOO MANY STD FOR LAST SAMPLE POS
ERR:61 YES/NO ENTRY IS NOT VALID
ERR:62 YES/NO ENTRY IS REQUIRED
ERR:63 STEPS BEFORE ATOM. MUST BE >4 SEC
ERR:64 AUTOSAMPLER NOT AVAILABLE
ERR:65 SAMPLE LOC. MUST BE > LAST STD
ERR:66 SAMPLE LOC. MUST BE < LAST SMP
ERR:67 SELECT NO (0) ON MENU 488
ERR:144 MAX. POWER TEMP TOO LOW <1000
ERR:145 CHECK HGA POWER. NO COMM.
ERR:146 HGA POWER FAILURE
ERR:147 TOTAL VOLUME MUST BE <100 µL
ERR:148 IEEE CAN’T ACCESS FURNACE
ERR:149 IEEE CAN’T ACCESS FIAS
ERR:150 PARAM ENTRY MUST BE SELECTED
ERR:151 READ PULSE MISSING. CHECK CABLE
ERR:152 PRINTER OUT OF PAPER
ERR:153 PRINTER NOT ONLINE

ERR:154 PRINTER NOT SELECTED
ERR:155 PRINTER TIMEOUT
ERR:156 HGA FURNACE IS OPEN
ERR:157 VALVE AT UNKNOWN POSITION
ERR:158 LAMP NOT FOUND
ERR:159 MENU UNAVAILABLE
ERR:301 AS72 MISSING AUTOSAMPLER
ERR:302 AS72 TAKEUP RANGE ERROR
ERR:303 AS72 NOT READY FOR TAKEUP
ERR:304 AS72 TAKEUP POSITION ERROR
ERR:305 AS72 TAKEUP VOLUME ERROR
ERR:306 AS72 PIPET RANGE ERROR
ERR:307 AS72 NOT READY FOR PIPET
ERR:308 AS72 ROTATE POSITION ERROR
ERR:309 AS72 FLASH RANGE ERROR
ERR:310 AS72 PIPET TEMPERATURE ERROR
ERR:311 AS72 NO FLUSH SOLUTION
ERR:312 AS72 NO PIPET TIMEOUT
ERR:313 AS72 RINSE TIMEOUT
ERR:314 AS72 ET RINSE TIMEOUT
ERR:315 AS72 PIPET TUBE TIMEOUT
ERR:316 AS72 RINSE PUMP UP TIMEOUT
ERR:317 AS72 RINSE PUMP DOWN TIMEOUT
ERR:318 AS72 SAMPLE PUMP UP TIMEOUT
ERR:319 AS72 SAMPLE PUMP LOAD TIMEOUT

ERR:320 AS72 PUMP PREPARATION
ERR:321 AS72 TAKE SAMPLE TIMEOUT
ERR:322 AS72 ROTATE TIMEOUT
ERR:323 AS72 SWING TIMEOUT
ERR:324 AS72 TASK COMMAND ERROR
ERR:325 AS72 POWER ON NOT READY
ERR:326 AS72 BUSY
ERR:327 AS72 RINSE PUMP LOAD TIMEOUT
ERR:401 HGA PAGE PROGRAMMING ERROR
ERR:402 HGA GAS FLOW RANGE ERROR
ERR:403 HGA GAS TYPE ERROR
ERR:404 HGA TEMP. RANGE ERROR
ERR:405 HGA TEMP. SEQUENCE ERROR
ERR:406 HGA CALIB. TEMP. ERROR
ERR:407 HGA TEMP. CALIB. TIMEOUT
ERR:408: HGA TEMP. CALIB. FAIL ERROR
ERR:409 HGA TEMP. CALIB. SENSOR TIMEOUT
ERR:410 HGA FURNACE OPEN ERROR
ERR:411 HGA RAMP RANGE ERROR
ERR:412 HGA RAMP KIND ERROR
ERR:413 HGA HOLDTIME ERROR
ERR:414 HGA MAXIMUM POWER ERROR
ERR:415 HGA FAST RAMP ERROR
ERR:416 HGA NORMAL RAMP ERROR
ERR:417 HGA READ VALUE ERROR

ERR:418 HGA STEP SEQUENCE ERROR
ERR:419 HGA NOT CALIBRATED
ERR:420 HGA GAS FLOW ERROR
ERR:421 HGA NORMAL GAS ALARM
ERR:422 HGA ALTERNATE GAS ALARM
ERR:423 HGA HIGH TRAFO TEMPERATURE
ERR:424 HGA POWER FAIL
ERR:425 HGA TUBE BREAK ALARM
ERR:426 HGA TUBE ABSENCE ALARM
ERR:427 HGA HIGH FURNACE TEMPERATURE
ERR:428 HGA HIGH MAGNET TEMPERATURE
ERR:429 HGA MAGNET POWER SUPPLY ERROR
ERR:430 HGA MULTI READ ERROR
ERR:431 HGA READ STEP MISSING
ERR:432 HGA MAX. POWER RAMP TIMEOUT
ERR:433 HGA FAST RAMP TIMEOUT
ERR:434 HGA MAGNET POWER ALARM
ERR:435 HGA MAGNET TEMP. ALARM
ERR:436 HGA MANUAL TEMP. ABORTED
ERR:437 HGA NO PAGE LOADED
ERR:438 HGA NO PAGE RUNNING
ERR:439 HGA LAST TASK COMMAND ERROR
ERR:440 HGA POWER ON NOT READY
ERR:441 HGA BUSY

ERR:442 HGA HIGH WATER TEMP.
ERR:443 HGA MANUAL TEMP. RUNNING
ERR:501 HGA/AS72 ALARM ERROR
ERR:502 HGA/AS72 POWER ON NOT READY
ERR:503 HGA/AS72 ILLEGAL PASSWORD
ERR:504 HGA/AS72 COMMAND DISABLED
ERR:505 HGA/AS72 UNKNOWN PROBLEM
ERR:506 HGA/AS72 INVALID PARAMETER
ERR:507 HGA/AS72 ILLEGAL COMMAND
ERR:508 HGA ALARM NORMAL GAS PRESSURE
ERR:509 HGA ALARM ALTERNATE GAS PRES.
ERR:510 HGA ALARM XFMR. TEMP.
ERR:511 HGA ALARM PWR. CIRCUIT BREAKER
ERR:512 HGA ALARM HIGH FURNACE TEMP.
ERR:513 HGA ALARM MAGNET TEMP. FAIL
ERR:514 HGA ALARM MAGNET POWER FAIL
ERR:515 HGA ALARM GRAPHITE TUBE BREAK
ERR:516 HGA ALARM MANUAL TEMP. RUNNING

9
Electrical Schematics and
Board Layouts
System Control Board (N041-9000, 9002)
HCL/PMT/D2 Warm Up Board (N041-9050, 9052)
Burner Interface Board (N041-9060, 9062)
Fuse Board (N041-9070, 9072)
Flame Control Board (N041-9010, 9012)
Four-channel Motor Control Board (N041-9040, 9042)
Turret Board (N041-9090, 9092)
Manual Gas Control Board (N041-9080, 9082)
Two-channel Motor Control Board (N041-9120, 9122)
Keyboard/Display Board (N040-1050)
HGA-800 Controller Board (B310-0107-Rev 0)
HGA-800 Controller Board Component Layout
HGA-800 Controller Board Configuration Jumpers
9-2 Electrical Schematics and Board Layouts
Appendices
Preparing Your Laboratory for PE AA Spectrometers

Installation Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Preventive Maintenance Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Pre-Installation Checklist, AAnalyst Spectrometer
Pre-Installation Report, AAnalyst Spectrometer
IPV Test Certificate, Model AAnalyst
Instrument Performance Verification Instructions
Customer Orientation Script, AAnalyst Without Computer
Customer Orientation Script, Systems Running Under AA WinLab
Hollow Cathode And Electrodeless Discharge Lamps
Attention! Redesigned Intensitron Series HC Lamps
Installation Instructions, Background Corrector Kit (0993-6203)
Installation Instructions, Backlight Conversion Kit (0993-6202)
Setting AAnalyst Config. W/PC Using the Terminal Utility
Appendix
(blank)

AAnalyst 300 Service Manual Part

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AAnalyst 300 Service Manual Part

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy 0993-6036

AAnalyst 100 and

Manual Valid for

General Safety Practices .......................................................................................2-3

Mercury/Hydride Analyses Safety Practices...................................................2-21

Chapter 3: AAnalyst Installation

Installing the AAnalyst 100 and 300 ....................................................................3-8

Chapter 3A: Furnace Installation and Alignment

Chapter 3B: Installing Flame Accessories

Chapter 4: Performance Tests

Chapter 5: Optical/Electrical Alignment

Chapter 6: PC Board Electronics

Fuse Board (N041-9074)........................................................................................6-32

Chapter 7: Burner Control System

Burner Maintenance ............................................................................................7-10

Chapter 9: Electrical Schematics and Board Layouts

A comprehensive list of replacement parts and their PE Part Numbers is

Who is This Manual for?

The AAnalyst Spectrometers contain high-voltage electrical components

We strongly advise our customers NOT to try servicing the spectrometer

In Chapter 2 we have included the hazards which the Customer Support

Detailed information about ultraviolet radiation, electrical, gas, and

The following conventions are used in this manual:

A caution indicates an operation that could cause instrument damage if

A warning indicates an operation that could cause personal injury if

NOTE: A note emphasizes significant information in a

How is the Manual Organized?

This service manual is divided into 9 Chapters. Each chapter is preceded

NOTE: Many of our new service manuals also include the

A list of the Chapters is included below:

• Chapter 1 - Overview of the Manual and of the AAnalyst

• Chapter 2 - Precautions (It includes hazards and recommended safety

• Chapter 3 - Installing the Spectrometer and Accessories This

• Furnace Installation and Alignment (3A)

• Installing Flame Accessories (3B)

• Chapter 4 - Performance Tests

• Chapter 5 - Overview and Alignment of the Optical System

• Chapter 6- Descriptive Overview of the Electrical System and

• Chapter 7 - Overview and Maintenance Procedures for the

• Chapter 8 - Service Diagnostic Programs and Commands (Includes

• Chapter 9 - Electrical Schematics

Introducing the AAnalyst Spectrometers

Overview of the AAnalyst Optical System

When the light reaches the chopper, it is alternately reflected by the

In the monochromator, the beam is directed by a paraboloid (M5) to the

Figure 1-1. Optical schematic of the AAnalyst 100/300.

General Features and Instrument Configurations

The AAnalyst 100 is the next generation of the Model 3110 AA

AAnalyst 100 Configurations

The spectrometer is shipped in one of the following configurations:

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, Single Lamp, no D2 Background

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, Single Lamp, with D2 Background

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret and D2 Background

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret, no D2 Background

The AAnalyst 100 can be used with the following accessories:

• FIAS 100 or 400

• HGA-800 Graphite Furnace

• MHS-10 Mercury/Hydride System, including the Electrically-heated

• Okidata Microline 320 printer or other compatible printer

• AS-72B, AS-90, or AS-91 Flame Autosampler

See the Appendix, Product Information Sheet New “Configure-Them-

AAnalyst 300 Configurations

The spectrometer is shipped in the following configuration:

• Flame, 115/230 Vac, with Lamp Turret and D2 Background